NHBC Standards 2024 6

Chapter
6.1
External masonry walls
This chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical
Requirements for external masonry walls.
6.1.1 Compliance 01
6.1.2 Provision of information 02
6.1.3 Structural design 02
6.1.4 Fire resistance 05
6.1.5 Acoustic resistance 06
6.1.6 Exposure 06
6.1.7 Thermal insulation 10
6.1.8 Concrete blocks 14
6.1.9 Bricks 14
6.1.10 Stone masonry 16
6.1.11 Construction of masonry walls 16
6.1.12 Lintels 21
6.1.13 Materials suitable for mortar 23
6.1.14 Mortar 23
6.1.15 Render 25
6.1.16 Cladding 25
6.1.17 DPCs and cavity trays 27
6.1.18 Wall ties and bedjoint
reinforcements 33
6.1.19 Handling materials 34
6.1.20 Protection of the works
during construction 35
For figure reference tables in this chapter, please go to the end of the chapter
1 External masonry walls I 2024
Chapter 6.1
Introduction
This chapter provides guidance on external masonry which is used for the outer and inner leaves of a cavity wall construction,
cladding to framed structures and to the limited solid wall construction used in housebuilding such as garages. General guidance
on masonry cavity wall construction including the masonry inner leaf of a cavity wall are also provided within this chapter.
The guidance is consistent and complementary to that provided within Chapter 6.9 Curtain walling and cladding which should be
used for products and systems falling under that description.
There is a strong link to all chapters in Part 6 of this standards, particularly Chapters 6.2 – 6.5, 6.10 and 6.11.
The aim of this chapter is to provide clarity for external and cavity walls constructed of clay and concrete bricks and blocks as
well as natural stone.
Definitions for this chapter

Aggregate concrete masonry Masonry unit manufactured from cementitious binder, aggregates and water and which may
unit contain admixtures and additions and colouring pigments and other materials incorporated or
applied during or after unit manufacture
Aircrete masonry unit Masonry unit manufactured from hydraulic binders such as cement and/or lime, combined with
siliceous based fine material, cell generating material and water and cured with high pressure
steam in autoclaves
Blocks Masonry units which when used in its normal aspect exceeds the length or width or height
specified for a coursing unit (typical brick size). A common block size is 440mm long x
100mm wide x 215mm high
Bricks Are designated in terms of their intended use. The coordinating sizes for bricks is generally:
225mm long x 112.5mm wide x 75mm high. The work sizes are in effect coordinating sizes
less a nominal thickness of 10mm for the mortar joint
Clay masonry unit Masonry unit made from clay or other argillaceous materials with or without sand, fuel or other
additives fired at a sufficiently high temperature to achieve a ceramic bond
Coastal locations A site within a distance of 500m from the general coastline of the United Kingdom
Compressive strengths Where these are quoted in this chapter, they refer to the declared compressive strengths of
masonry units
6.1
Coordinating size Size of a coordinating space allocated to a masonry unit including allowances for joints
Coursing unit Masonry unit, commonly of brick sizes, used to assist in achieving the storey height of a wall in
conjunction with full height blocks
Fully filled cavity The insulation thickness is such that the it will be in full contact with both leaves of masonry
when the building meets normal construction tolerances
Manufactured stone masonry Facing masonry unit having at least one exposed face with a close structure formed from
unit either one or two homogeneous mixtures of aggregate, cementitious binder and other
materials moulded under pressure and/or vibration and with or without further processing,
intended to resemble and be used as an alternative to natural stone
Masonry Assemblage of masonry units laid in a specified pattern and joined together with mortar
Masonry unit Preformed component intended for use in masonry construction
Natural stone masonry unit Masonry unit manufactured from natural stone
Recessed joints Where the mortar is raked out, about 5mm from the wall face. There are certain exposure
conditions where these should not be used (clause 6.1.6)
Work size Size of masonry unit specified for its manufacture, to which the actual size conforms within
permissible deviations
6.1.1 Compliance Also see: Chapter 2.1
External walls shall comply with the Technical Requirements.

External masonry walls that comply with the guidance in this chapter will generally be acceptable.
2024 I External masonry walls 2
Chapter 6.1
6.1.2 Provision of information

Designs and specifications shall be produced in a clearly understandable format, include all relevant
information and be distributed to the appropriate personnel.
Designs and specifications should be issued to site supervisors, relevant specialist subcontractors and suppliers, and include the
following information:
z construction materials z reveals
z wall layout with all dimensions shown z how support is given to other elements,
z position and size of openings eg padstones and wall plates
z wall layouts and elevations with dimensions shown z movement joints
z coursing of bricks and blocks in relation to storey heights z acceptable methods of pointing or mortar joint finish
and opening positions z type of insulant to be used
z all junctions, indicating position of DPCs and cavity trays z type, spacing and location of wall ties
(isometric sketches are recommended for z position of fire breaks, cavity barriers and other passive
complicated junctions) fire-stopping; the required fire resistance period should
z position and type of lintels be specified
z position of restraint straps z the setting out dimensions should be masonry
z cavity closers co-ordinating dimensions.
Where proprietary products are to be used, manufacturers generally have specific requirements for fixing and/or assembly.
This information should also be made available for reference on site so that work can be carried out satisfactorily in accordance
with the design and specification.
6.1.3 Structural design

External masonry shall be designed to support and transfer loads to foundations safely and without undue
movement. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) compliance with relevant standards d) bonding
b) lateral restraint e) movement joints
6.1
c) concentrated loads f) damp proof courses.
Compliance with relevant standards

Design of masonry walls should comply with relevant standards:
Structural design BS EN 1996-1-1 ‘Eurocode 6. Design of masonry structures. General rules for
reinforced and unreinforced masonry structures’
PD 6697 ‘Recommendations
for the design of masonry structures to
BS EN 1996-1-1 and BS EN 1996-2’
Intermediate floors, roofs and walls designed BS 8103 (all parts) ‘Structural design of low-rise buildings’
to provide lateral restraint to external walls
Ancillary components BS EN 845-1 ‘Specification for ancillary components for masonry. Wall ties,
tension straps, hangers and brackets’
BS EN 845-2 ‘Specification for ancillary components for masonry. Lintels’
BS EN 845-3 ‘Specification for ancillary components for masonry. Bed joint
reinforcement of steel meshwork’
Walls of homes, or buildings containing Designed by an engineer in accordance with Technical Requirement R5
homes, over three storeys high
Lateral restraint
Lateral restraint provided by concrete floors:
Concrete floors, with a minimum bearing of 90mm onto the wall, can provide adequate restraint. Concrete floors running parallel
to, and not built into, walls require restraint straps to provide restraint to the wall.
Lateral restraint provided by timber floors:
Timber joisted floors can provide adequate restraint when joists are carried by ordinary hangers to BS EN 845-1, and connected
to the wall with restraint straps. In buildings up to two storeys, timber joisted floors can provide adequate restraint without
strapping when:
z the minimum bearing onto masonry is 90mm z joists are carried by BS EN 845-1 restraint-type hangers
(or 75mm onto a timber wall plate), or with performance equivalent to a restraint strap spaced at a
maximum of 2m centres.
Chapter 6.1
Lateral restraint provided by buttressing walls Figure 1: Lateral restraint by buttressing wall
The ends of every wall should be bonded or otherwise

securely tied throughout their full height to a buttressing wall,
pier or frame. Long walls may be provided with intermediate
buttressing walls, piers or support dividing the wall into distinct
lengths within each storey with each distinct length being a
supported wall for the purposes of this section.
The intermediate buttressing walls, piers or supports should
provide lateral restraint to the full height of the supported wall,
and they may be staggered at each storey.
Lateral restraint and acoustics

The ends of separating walls are only tied into the inner leafs and do not have multiple ties across the separating wall cavity at
the end of the wall.
Concentrated loads
Concentrated loads should be designed by a suitably qualified Engineer, for example at the bearing of trimmers, lintels, multi-ply
trusses or steel beams.
Where bearing stresses under concentrated loads are greater than the strength of the supporting masonry wall, padstones and
spreaders should be provided.
Padstones and spreaders may be required, to support concentrated loads.
Bonding
Where partition walls abut an external wall constructed of similar materials, fully bonded or tied joints are acceptable. Partition
walls may act as buttressing walls mentioned above. To reduce the risk of cracking, a tied joint is preferable where:
6.1
z materials have dissimilar shrinkage or expansion z there is a connection between a load-bearing wall on
characteristics, eg dense concrete and aircrete concrete foundations and a non load-bearing wall supported on a
ground-bearing slab.
Tied joints should be formed using expanded metal, wire wall ties or a proprietary equivalent, spaced at maximum 300mm intervals.
Dissimilar materials should not be used in the same wall (eg clay bricks as “make up” courses in concrete blockwork walls).
Movement joints
Movement joints should be included in long lengths of walling to control expansion or contraction of masonry panels and reduce
unsightly cracking and detailed so that stability is maintained. Where possible, joints should be hidden in corners, or behind
rainwater pipes, and:
z run the full height of the superstructure masonry wall z continue from those provided in the substructure to the
z should not coincide with window and door openings superstructure (movement joints may be needed in the
superstructure and not in the substructure, providing
suitable allowance is made for relative movement).
Vertical movement joints should be provided in the outer leaf, in accordance with Table 1.
Chapter 6.1
Table 1: Suitable dimensions and spacings for movement joints(1)

Material Joint width (mm) Normal spacing (m)
Clay brick 16(2) 10 – 12
Dense concrete bricks 10 7.5 – 9
Lightweight concrete block and brick (aircrete or using 10 6(4)
lightweight aggregates)(3)
Dense concrete block and reconstructed walling (using dense aggregate)(3) 10 7.5 – 9(3)
Any masonry in a parapet wall 10 Half the above spacings and 1.5
from corners (double frequency)
Natural stone masonry 10(5) 15 – 20(6)
Notes
1 Manufacturer’s guidance for the provision of movement joints and bed joint reinforcement should be considered.
2 For clay bricks, the joint width in mm should be spacing in metres+30%. i.e at 8m movement joint spacing the joint width should be 10mm.
3 Lightweight concrete masonry units are generally made of aggregates that have a gross density not exceeding 1,500 kg/m³. Dense concrete masonry units are
generally made of aggregate that have a gross density exceeding 1,500 kg/m³.
4 The ratio of length to height of the panels should generally not exceed 3:1.
5 As defined within PD 6697.
6 Located no more than 7.5m from an external corner.
The spacing of the first movement joint from a return should Figure 2: Movement joint sealant
not be more than half of the dimension in Table 1.
Movement joints are not generally necessary in the inner leaf
of cavity walls, but consideration should be given to providing:
z movement joints in rooms with straight unbroken lengths of
wall over 6m
z bed joint reinforcement as an alternative to movement joints
in areas of risk, eg under window openings.
6.1
Wall ties should be provided on either side of movement joints, in accordance with Clause 6.1.18.
Where masonry walls form panels in a framed structure, movement joints should be provided in accordance with BS EN 1996-2
and PD 6697.
Movement joints should be formed using the correct materials, and account taken of:
z joint width and depth z surface preparation and backing materials
z anticipated movement and capability of the material z likely design life of the joint.
Clay bricks expand and require movement joints formed from easily compressible materials, such as:
z flexible cellular polyethylene z foam rubber.
z cellular polyurethane
Concrete bricks and blocks contract, and the following materials are acceptable for use in contraction joints:
z hemp z cork.
z fibreboard
The joints should be formed using semi-rigid, closed cell polyethylene or other suitable materials.
To perform effectively a sealant in a movement joint should be applied against a suitable debonding joint filler board/backing rod
so that the sealant only adheres to the two opposing masonry faces.
Chapter 6.1
Damp proof courses

Damp proof course (DPC) materials should conform to BS 8215 and PD 6697 Table 1.
Designers should pay adequate attention to the characteristics of the materials chosen for DPCs. Materials that squeeze out
or are impaired on highly stressed walls are undesirable and should not be used as DPCs. DPCs adhesion to mortar and their
ability to resist sliding and/or shear stresses should be considered especially in relation to lateral loading.
Where DPCs are required to provide resistance to shear eg in frame or crosswalled structures, the design of wall panels should
reflect this and the deemed to satisfy rule of Approved Document A or equivalent regulation may not be appropriate.
In general, advice on the resistance to compression, tension, sliding and shear should be sought from the manufacturers
of the DPC.
6.1.4 Fire resistance

External cavity walls shall adequately resist the passage of fire.
The cavity in the masonry cavity wall of a building can provide a route for the spread of smoke and flames.
Cavities should be closed with cavity barriers, in accordance with Building Regulations.
Cavity barriers should be provided:
z at the edges of cavities, including around openings eg z where to break up extensive cavities which could act as a
window and doors, route for fire spread.
z where the cavity abuts compartment walls and floors,
Cavity barriers need to achieve a minimum of 30 minutes’ integrity (E 30) and 15 minutes’ insulation (I 15).
Vertical cavity barriers, where required, should extend below the DPC and care should be taken to ensure continuity of cavity
barriers where cavity barriers are installed at DPC level.
Where cavity barriers are used, they should be sized appropriately for the dimensions of the cavity. Normally they are installed
under compression and as such maintaining the design cavity width is critical.
Significant reduction in cavity width will mean that the barrier cannot be fitted without creating problems for the following leaf
6.1
of masonry. Significant widening in the cavity width will mean that the barrier may not be fitted with the appropriate level of
compression and its performance may be impaired.
Concealed spaces
Where cladding is fitted to a masonry substrate wall, cavity barriers should be provided. Cavity barriers to concealed spaces
behind external cladding should be positioned:
z at the edges of cavities including eaves and verges, around z at the junction between an external cavity wall and every
openings such as windows and doors and entry/exit points compartment floor and compartment wall.
for services
Chapter 6.1
6.1.5 Acoustic resistance

External walls adjacent to separating walls shall be designed to resist flanking sound transmission.
Acceptable levels of sound reduction between homes may be
Figure 3: Lateral restraint and acoustics
achieved by:
z the inner leaf of an external cavity wall having
sufficient density
z sealing air paths, particularly at junctions between the
masonry cavity and separating elements
z allowing appropriate spacing between the openings in
external walls
z structural members not transferring across or breaching
separating walls.
The density of external walls and the position of openings adjacent to separating walls should be in accordance with Building
Regulations and, where relevant, an assessment which complies with Technical Requirement R3. Refer to the Robust Details
Handbook for the specification of separating wall and floor constructions and their associated flanking walls.
Where different block materials are used eg, aggregate separating wall with aircrete inner leaf, differential drying and cracking
can occur, so it is important that the separating wall goes through (and not up to) the inner leaf.
6.1.6 Exposure Also see: Chapter 6.7
6.1
External walls shall be suitable for their exposure and resist the passage of moisture to the inside of
the home. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) durability c) freeze/thaw cycles.
b) rain penetration
Durability
Masonry can become saturated, and may remain so for long periods. Therefore, precautions should be taken to resist frost
damage and sulfate attack affecting:
z parapet walls and copings z masonry below the DPC at ground level
z sills and projections z freestanding walls.
Masonry units and mortar should comply with BS EN 1996-1-1 and be used in accordance with Table 15 of PD6697 and the
manufacturer’s recommendations. In addition, mortar mixes should be selected from BS EN 998-2 Table NA.1, and only cement
types listed in BS EN 998-2 NA1.2 should be used.
Cement with sulfate-resisting properties should be used where S1 clay bricks are used in the following situations:
z below the DPC where there are sulfates present in z parapets
the ground z freestanding walls
z below the DPC where there is a high risk of saturation z rendered walls
z retaining walls z areas of severe, or very severe, exposure to driving rain.
Reclaimed bricks should only be used where in accordance with Technical Requirement R3.
Chapter 6.1
Rain penetration
In prolonged periods of driving rain, water will penetrate the outer leaf of a masonry wall. The following should be taken
into account:
z site-specific exposure to wind-driven rain z wall tie drips should be located in the centre of the
z suitability of the wall construction and insulation method clear cavity
z design detailing for the local exposure, and the likely quality z cavity trays, DPCs and weep vents should be installed in
of workmanship on site accordance with this guidance.
z single skin garage walls, additional care needs to be taken
to ensure this type of structure does not allow for water
penetration prematurely
Exposed parts of the building should be given particular attention when selecting a suitable construction method, as this may
affect the choice for the whole building.
Complete resistance can only be achieved with an impervious cladding. However, the following approaches can reduce the risk
of rain penetration:
z providing cladding to the wall z designing protective features to keep the wall dry, eg
z increasing the clear cavity width (minimum 50mm) or the projecting sills and deep overhanging eaves and verges
width of full-fill cavity insulation (increasing the cavity width z ensuring mortar joints are fully filled. Where full-fill cavity
for full-fill cavity insulation greatly reduces the risk of rain insulation is proposed, recessed joints should not be used
passing through the cavity) z following the recommendations of any assessment of the
z rendering the wall and specifying crack-resistant insulation and the manufacturer’s recommendations
backing material z ensuring that cavities are not bridged.
Cavities should be continuous around enclosed porches

and habitable areas.
Figure 4: Check reveal
Insulation should be in accordance with Clause 6.1.7
and Table 2.
In Scotland, Northern Ireland, the Isle of Man and in other
6.1
places where the exposure to driving rain is very severe,

masonry should form a rebate at the reveals of openings
to avoid a straight through joint where the frame abuts the
masonry, or a proprietary cavity closer assessed in accordance
with Technical Requirement R3 should be used.
Sills, copings and similar features should be weathered

and throated unless adequate alternative provision is made
to protect the brickwork from saturation, frost damage and
staining and meet the requirements of BS 5642 parts 1 & 2.
Variations to the exposure shown on the map can only be
made by site-specific calculations using BS 8104 ‘Code of
practice for assessing exposure of walls to wind-driven rain’.
Adapted from BRE report ‘Thermal Insulation: avoiding risks’.
Chapter 6.1
Figure 5: Exposure zones
Dornoch
Lerwick
Inverness
Aberdeen
Dundee
Perth
Stirling
Dunbar
Glasgow Edinburgh
Ayr
Londonderry
Newcastle
Carlisle
Enniskillen Belfast Stranraer Alston
Dungannon Workington Middlesborough
Darlington Whitby
Ripon
York
Hebden Bridge
Hull
Skelmersdale
6.1
Colwyn Bay Doncaster
Manchester Grimsby
Bangor Sheffield
Chester Macclesfield Lincoln
Skegness
Bala Nottingham
Stafford
Shrewsbury Leicester
Norwich
Llanidloes Birmingham Peterborough
Llandrindod Wells Northampton
Hay-on-Wye Cambridge
Brecon Colchester
Gloucester Luton
Swansea Swindon Welwyn Garden City
Bristol Newbury London
CardiffWeston-super-Mare Staines
Watchet Aldershot
Barnstable Taunton Gatwick Dover
Southampton
Exeter Brighton
Poole
Eastbourne
Sidmouth
Exposure zones Exposure to wind-driven rain (litres/m² per spell) Variations to the exposure shown on
the map can only be made by site-specific
Very severe 100 or more calculations using BS 8104 “Assessing
exposure of walls to wind driven rain”
Severe 56.5 to less than 100 and the table above.
Moderate 33 to less than 56.5 Adapted from the map in the

BRE report “Thermal Insulation:
Sheltered Less than 33 avoiding risks”
Chapter 6.1
Freeze/thaw cycles
Common factors which affect the level of freeze/thaw cycles include:
z degree of exposure (incidence of frost) z localised protection of the masonry by roof overhangs,
z saturation of the masonry trees and other buildings.
z frost resistance of the masonry
Good detailing can limit persistent wetting and reduce the risk of frost attack:
z paths should drain away from walls to avoid saturating z a coping or capping should be provided for all parapet walls,
bricks near the ground chimneys and freestanding walls, unless clay bricks of F2
z sills, copings and similar features should have a weathered and S2 classification to BS EN 771-1 are used
upper surface z masonry units and mortar should be used in accordance
with Table 15 of PD6697.
Copings should have:
z an overhang z a continuous supported DPC which projects beyond the line
z throatings a minimum of 30mm clear of the wall of the wall.
The following should be taken into account when selecting bricks:

z manufacturers’ recommendations, including the choice
and use of mortar and the type of joint finish Figure 6: Frost exposure zones
z bricks that are not frost-resistant (F0,S2 or F0,S1 to
BS EN 771) may not be acceptable for use externally, KW
unless completely protected by a cladding which can

adequately resist the passage of water IV
z where there is a risk that brickwork may be PA
persistently wet, bricks should be specified that are low AB

in soluble salts
PH
z painted or decorated finishes can trap moisture in
external brickwork and increase the risk of frost damage, DD
sulfate attack or other detrimental effects. PA

FK
In Northern Ireland, the three criteria
for assessing severe exposure to
6.1
The manufacturer should be consulted to ensure that the G KY frost attack do not simultaneously
occur in any part.
proposed decorative finish will not have a detrimental EH
impact on the brickwork durability ML
TD
KA
z in Scotland, all clay bricks used as facings should be
frost-resistant, F2,S2 or F2,S1 to BS EN 771-11 and all DG
NE
concrete bricks used as facings should be 22 N/mm2 to CA
DH SR
BS EN 771-3.
DL TS
Severe exposure to frost attack LA

HG
The hatched areas on the map opposite have a frost over BD YO
FY PR
60 days in a year, annual rainfall over 1m and are 90m above
BB
LS
HX HU
BL OL
HD WF
sea level. They are therefore all considered to be at severe L WN M DN
WA S
exposure to frost. CH
SK
LN
CW
LL
In areas of severe exposure to frost, the following types of ST DE
NG
brick are acceptable: SY TF WS

LE NR
PE
WV
z clay facing bricks which are frost-resistant F2,S2 or DY B
CV NN
F2,S1 to BS EN 771-1 SA
LD
HR
WR
CB
IP
MK
z clay bricks which are classified in the manufacturer’s GL OX LU SG CO
NP
HP AL EN CM
published recommendations as satisfactory for CF HA UB
G
RM SS
the exposure BS
SN
RG
SL TW
DB SM
BR DA
KT CR
z concrete bricks with a minimum strength of 20N/mm2 TA
BA
SP GU RH
ME
CT
SO TN
to BS EN 771-3 EX
PO BN
DT BH
z concrete blocks with a minimum density of 1,500kg/m3 PL
or compressive strength greater than 7.3N/mm2 TQ
TR
z most types of aircrete blocks with render.
Chapter 6.1
Exceptionally severe frost exposure

These are locations which face long stretches of open countryside and are within an area of severe frost exposure, where only
frost-resistant bricks F2,S2 or F2,S1 to BS EN 771 are acceptable for the superstructure.
Where there is doubt about the suitability of a facing brick for sites in areas of exceptionally severe frost exposure, written
confirmation should be obtained from the brick manufacturer that the brick is suitable for the geographical location, and location
in the structure.
6.1.7 Thermal insulation

Thermal insulation shall be adequate and installed correctly. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) thermal insulation materials c) injected and blown fill insulation
b) installation d) construction type.
The insulation value of the wall must meet the requirements of the Building Regulations. Cold bridging should be avoided.
Particular care is needed:
z at openings z behind or around components installed in the cavity such
z between external walls and roofs, internal walls and floors as sub-floor vents, inset meter boxes, cavity trays or
windposts.
Thermal Insulation materials

Thermal Insulation materials, either full, partial, or injected and blown fill that will be placed in the cavity between the outer and
inner leaf of masonry should be:
z satisfactorily assessed by an appropriate independent z assessed in accordance with Technical Requirement.

technical approvals authority accepted by NHBC as suitable
for the proposed use
Thermal Insulation materials may:

z either be built in during, or retrofitted after the z fully or partially fill the cavity.
construction process
6.1
Materials shall be considered as full fill cavity insulation where:
z they are designed to be in full contact with both leaves z described as full fill in their technical approval document
of masonry although a narrow residual cavity is retained between the
outer leaf and the outer face of the insulation.
Partial fill cavity insulation materials shall be installed on the cavity face of the inner leaf and the appropriate residual cavity to the
outer leaf as specified in ‘Construction Type’ is maintained.
All injected and blown fill insulation systems, including blown mineral wool, and expanded polystyrene beads should be:
z installed by the certificate holder or their approved z installed by operatives trained by the assessment holder
installers subject to the certification bodies assessment and and approved by the assessment holder and the
surveillance scheme assessing organisation.
Installation
Workmanship should be maintained when installing insulation to minimise the risk of damp penetration or condensation to the
inner leaf. Gaps in the insulation layer can provide routes for moisture ingress from the outer leaf to the inner leaf and also create
localised cold spots where condensation can form. Gaps between the board and the inner leaf can result in thermal bypass (this
is exacerbated by gaps at board junctions). Insulation material should be:
z close butted with no gaps z fully engaged with the adjacent board edges where a ship
z in full contact with the inner leaf lap or other interlocking edge detail is provided
z taped at the joints where it is formed of rigid boards with z installed in accordance with the
non-compressible edges1 manufacturer’s recommendations.
Note
1 Where the insulation has a low e facing the tape face shall have the same low e value.
Chapter 6.1
Where cavity insulation is used:

z mortar joints, including perpends, should be solidly filled z excess mortar should be struck flush from the inside
with mortar of the outer leaf
z mortar droppings should be removed from wall ties and the z excess mortar should be struck flush from the cavity
edges of insulation materials side of the inner leaf.
The first row of insulation boards or batts should be supported on wall ties:
z with a minimum of two ties to each board or batt z which coincide with horizontal joints in the insulation.
Where wall ties need to be closely spaced, eg at reveals, it is acceptable to make a neat cut in the insulation to accept the
extra ties.
Rigid insulation boards should:
z be stored flat without bearers, otherwise they may distort, z be rejected where warped.
making them difficult to fix against the wall
When installing full fill insulation:

z ensure fibres in the insulation are laid parallel to the wall z cover all exposed areas of insulation slabs at the end of
z butt joint slabs and do not bend at internal and each day or in driving rain to prevent excessive moisture
external corners in the cavity and pressure on freshly laid masonry from
expansion of the insulation
z ensure vertical joints are staggered when layering slabs
of insulation.
Figure 7: Full fill insulation Figure 8: Insulation to combined lintel ends Figure 9: Cavity ties to rigid partial fill insulation
6.1
Rigid insulation should not be continuous across the end of a separating wall or floor. A flexible (mineral wool) cavity closer
should be used in line with these elements, and the rigid insulation butted up to these.
Chapter 6.1
Injected and blown fill insulation

Injected and blown fill insulation should comply with the relevant standards:
Material Standard Settlement class
Mineral wool BS EN 14064-1 ‘Thermal insulation products for buildings. In-situ S1
formed loose-fill mineral wool (MW) products - Specification for the
loose-fill products before installation’
BS EN 14064-2 ‘Thermal insulation products for buildings. In-situ
formed loose-fill mineral wool (MW) products - Specification for the
installed products’
Expanded polystyrene (EPS) beads BS EN 16809-1 ‘Thermal insulation products of buildings. In-situ N/A
formed products from loose-fill expanded polystyrene (EPS) beads
and bonded expanded polystyrene beads - Specification for the
bonded and loose-fill products before installation’
BS EN 16809-2 ‘Thermal insulation products of buildings. In-situ
formed products from loose-fill expanded polystyrene (EPS) beads
and bonded expanded polystyrene beads - Specification for the
bonded and loose-fill products after installation’
Injected and blown fill insulation systems should meet the requirements of the relevant standards and hold a satisfactory
assessment by an appropriate technical approvals authority acceptable to NHBC confirming suitability for use in a masonry
cavity wall and for the exposure rating of the site.
Separating wall and floor constructions and their associated flanking walls should be detailed correctly when using injected and
blown fill insulation. Cavity stops should be installed at the ends of separating walls and separating floors. Refer to the Robust
Details Handbook for the specification of materials and construction details.
Before installing injected or blown fill insulation materials the home should be in a condition ready to receive the insulation, this
will be defined in each systems instruction documents, but as a minimum would require that:
z the cavity wall is inspected by the installing team z all edges of cavities at window, door, and other
z the roof is in place, tops of the walls are protected from rain openings are closed with the permanent cavity closers,
as per the design.
6.1
Areas that cannot be accessed during the fill process by appropriate adaptation of the installation method (eg, below gas
membranes or low level continuous DPCs, where there is a cavity tray one course above a lintel, or where separate lintels are
used for each leaf) should be insulated with appropriate built-in materials.
On completion of the work, the Installer shall provide a declaration of compliance in accordance with the relevant standard for
the product.
Construction type
The following are recommendations and guidance according to construction type:
Partial fill cavity insulation
Where partial cavity insulation is installed:
z it should only be fixed against the cavity face of the z wall ties long enough to allow a minimum 50mm
inner leaf embedment in each masonry leaf should be used.
z a minimum 50mm clear cavity between the partial cavity
insulation and the outer leaf should be maintained
In areas of very severe exposure in England and Wales, a residual cavity of 75mm is required where the outer leaf is
fair faced masonry.
Chapter 6.1
Full fill cavity insulation

Where the cavity is to be fully filled with insulation:
z the type of insulation, its thickness and the wall construction z fair faced masonry includes clay, concrete bricks and blocks
should be suitable for the exposure of the home and dressed natural stone laid in an appropriate mortar
(see Table 2) preferably with struck, weathered or bucket handle joints
z render on an external leaf of clay bricks (F2,S1 or F1,S1 z cavity walls of random rubble or random natural stone
designation bricks to BS EN 771) is not permitted in areas should not be used
of severe or very severe exposure to wind-driven rain z painted finishes on bricks or render are not acceptable
z recessed mortar joints should only be used in where they are likely to cause damage (including frost
sheltered areas damage or sulfate attack).
Table 2: Suitable wall constructions for use with full-fill cavity insulation
Exposure Suitable wall construction Minimum insulation thickness (mm)
category Built-in insulation Retro-fill (other than UF foam) UF foam
Very severe Any wall with impervious cladding 50 50 50
Fair faced masonry with impervious cladding 100 125 N/A
to all walls above ground storey
Any wall fully rendered(2) 75 75 N/A
Fair faced masonry (1)
150 150 N/A
Severe Any wall with impervious cladding or render(2) 50 50 50
Fair faced masonry with impervious cladding 50 75 50
or render(2) to all walls above ground storey
Fair faced masonry 75 75 N/A
Moderate Any wall with impervious cladding or render 50 50 50
or render to all walls above ground storey
Fair faced masonry 50 75 75
Sheltered Any wall with impervious cladding or render 50 50 50
6.1

or render to all walls above ground storey
Fair faced masonry 50 50 50
Notes
1 In very severe exposure locations, fair faced masonry with full cavity insulation is not permitted in cavity widths of less than 150mm.
2 Render on an external leaf of clay bricks (F2,S1 or F1,S1 designation bricks to BS EN 771) in severe or very severe exposures is not permitted where the cavity
is to be fully filled with insulation.
3 This table covers walls where the external leaf does not exceed 12m in height.
4 The exposure category of the home is determined by its location on the map showing categories of exposure to wind-driven rain.
5 Fair faced masonry includes clay and concrete bricks and blocks and dressed natural stone laid in an appropriate mortar preferably with struck, weathered or
bucket handle joints. Cavity walls of random rubble or random natural stone should not be fully filled.
Multiple layers of insulation may be used where in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and within the scope of
satisfactory assessment by an independent technical approvals authority accepted by NHBC.
The thickness of materials should be as required in the design, and in accordance with Building Regulations.
Insulated dry linings
Where an insulated dry lining contains a combustible insulant, to prevent early collapse of the lining in a fire,
the plasterboard should be:
z a minimum of 12.5mm thick z mechanically fixed to the masonry inner leaf.
Chapter 6.1
6.1.8 Concrete blocks

Concrete blocks shall be capable of supporting intended loads, have appropriate thermal resistance and be
resistant to the adverse effects of climate. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) intended loads c) other characteristics.
b) freeze/thaw and sulfate attack
Intended loads
Concrete blocks should:
z comply with BS EN 771-3 & 4 and PD 6697 and be used in z be used in accordance with the
accordance with BS EN 1996-2 and PD6697 manufacturer’s recommendations.
z be of sufficient compressive strength for the application
The maximum load-bearing capacity of the wall should not be exceeded. Other factors may dictate the strength of blocks
required in certain circumstances, eg sulfate resistance may require blocks of greater strength.
For one and two storey homes, blocks with a minimum compressive strength of 2.9N/mm2 could be used.
For three storey homes or those with storey heights over 2.7m, 7.3N/mm2 blocks are required for certain parts of the structure,
unless structural design shows that strengths lower than 7.3N/mm2 are suitable.
Freeze/thaw and sulfate attack

Concrete blocks used in the outer leaf without protective cladding or render should:
z have a compressive strength >7.3N/mm2 or have a density z be aircrete concrete blocks having had their suitability
of at least 1,500kg/m3 confirmed by the manufacturer.
z be made with dense aggregate to BS EN 12620, or
Where the level of sulfates in the ground, at the level where blockwork is to used, is DS-2 or above their suitability for use should
be confirmed by the manufacturer. Where this is permissible, the mortar should be sulfate-resisting with a mix suitable for the
level of sulfates in the ground.
Other characteristics
6.1
Concrete blocks may have been specified according to their specific characteristics.
Tolerances
Tolerances should be declared in accordance with the relevant product standard.
6.1.9 Bricks
Bricks shall be capable of supporting intended loads and have appropriate resistance to the adverse effects
of freeze/thaw and sulfate attack.
The design strength of bricks should comply with:
z BS EN 1996-1 z the design.
Clay bricks
Table 3: Classification of clay bricks according to their freeze/thaw resistance and active soluble salt content in accordance
with BS EN 771-1
Durability Freeze/thaw resistance Active soluble salt content
F2,S2 Freeze-/thaw-resistant (F2), durable in all building situations (S2) low
F2,S1 Freeze-/thaw-resistant (F2), durable in all building situations (S1) normal
F1,S2 Moderately freeze-/thaw-resistant (F1), durable except when saturated and (S2) low
subject to repeated freezing and thawing
F1,S1 Moderately freeze-/thaw-resistant (F1), durable except when saturated and (S1) normal
subject to repeated freezing and thawing
F0,S2 Not freeze-/thaw-resistant (F0), liable to be damaged by freezing and thawing (S2) low
F0,S1 Not freeze-/thaw-resistant (F0), liable to be damaged by freezing and thawing (S1) normal
Chapter 6.1
Bricks that are freeze-/thaw-resistant (F2,S2 or F2,S1 to BS EN 771) should be used where there is a high risk of prolonged
wetting and freezing including:
z external facing work in Scotland z areas of the country subject to exceptionally severe
z exposed parts, including copings, sills, parapets and freeze/thaw exposure. See Clause 6.1.6.
chimneys which have no overhang to provide protection
In areas of severe freeze/thaw exposure outside Scotland, bricks that are moderately freeze-/thaw-resistant (F1,S1 or F1,S2 to
BS EN 771) may be used for general wall areas, provided they are classified in the manufacturer’s published recommendations
as satisfactory for the exposure. Further guidance can also be found within the Brick Development Association “Severely
exposed brickwork” publication.
Bricks that are not freeze-/thaw-resistant (F0,S2 or F0,S1 to BS EN 771) are not acceptable for use externally, unless completely
protected by a cladding which can satisfactorily resist the passage of water.
Where brickwork may become saturated, moderately freeze-/thaw-resistant bricks (F1,S1 or F1,S2 to BS EN 771) are not
appropriate where there is a risk of vulnerability to frost. In saturated conditions, sulfate-resisting cement mortar is required for
S1 designation bricks.
For one and two storey homes, clay bricks to BS EN 771, with a minimum compressive strength of 9N/mm2 should be adequate.
For three storey homes; clay bricks to BS EN 771 with a minimum compressive strength of 13N/mm2 are acceptable.
Tolerances of clay bricks

Guidance on tolerances for clay bricks can be found within the BDA publication ‘Designing to brickwork dimensions’.
Concrete bricks
Concrete bricks have a direct relationship between strength and durability, including freeze/thaw resistance. Most concrete bricks
have a strength of 22N/mm2 and are durable in most situations and are equivalent to frost resistance class F2 for clay bricks. For
copings and sills, bricks with a compressive strength of 36N/mm2 should be used. For one, two or three storey homes, concrete
bricks to BS EN 771-3, having a minimum compressive strength of 22N/mm2 are acceptable.
Reclaimed bricks
Reclaimed bricks:
z should be used in accordance with z may be unsuitable for external work because of a high salt
Technical Requirement R3 content or a lack of freeze/thaw resistance
6.1
z if the durability category cannot be determined may require z which have previously been used internally or which were
independent certification of suitability fully protected may be unsuitable in external situations.
z may require independent certification of suitability
It is advisable to know where reclaimed bricks came from, and if they were used internally or externally.
Special shaped bricks (only applicable to clay bricks and concrete bricks)
Special shaped bricks should conform to BS 4729.
Projecting brickwork
Where architectural detailing of brickwork is used to form decorative patterns that include projecting brickwork, exposing either
all or part of the width or length of the brick, consideration should be given to:
z perforations or frogs that may be exposed z suitable weathering of flat surfaces or ‘ledges’.
z visual appearance of exposed bed or differing face surfaces
Exposure of projecting bricks, particularly those with frogs or perforations may affect the durability and service life of the brick.
Written confirmation should be obtained from the brick manufacturer that the brick can achieve the required durability for the
proposed use.
Chapter 6.1
6.1.10 Stone masonry

Stone masonry shall be constructed to an acceptable standard, including the performance standards
for brick and block where applicable. Walls shall be capable of supporting the intended loads and have
appropriate resistance to the adverse effects of freeze/thaw.
Stone masonry as the outer leaf of a cavity wall should comply with the following:
Stone for masonry BS EN 771-6 ‘Specification for masonry units. Natural stone masonry units’
Cast stone masonry units BS EN 771-5 ‘Specification for masonry units. Manufactured stone masonry units’,
or BS 1217 ‘Cast stone. Specification’
Stone masonry, natural or cast BS EN 1996 ‘Design of masonry structures’
PD 6697 ‘Recommendations for the design of masonry structures to BS EN 1996’
Stone for copings and sills BS EN 12059 ‘Natural stone products. Dimensional stone work. Requirements’
Stone masonry as the outer leaf of a cavity wall will be acceptable where it:
z provides an adequate weather-resisting structure in z complies with BS EN 12370 or has evidence that it is not
conjunction with any brick or block backing, and/or susceptible to salt crystallisation when used below
vertical DPMs DPC level
z complies with the guidance in this chapter for z follows good local recognised practice to provide a
brickwork/blockwork high standard.
Where squared or random rubble is used it is important that the stone masonry is “brought to course” at regular intervals of not
more than 450mm. Bed joints of up to 25mm wide can be acceptable, and the selection and installation of the correct wall ties
should be carefully considered.
6.1.11 Construction of masonry walls Also see: Chapter 7.1, 9.1 and PD 6697
Construction shall ensure a satisfactory standard of brickwork and blockwork. Issues to be taken into
account include:
a) finished appearance e) corbelling
b) bonding f) chasing for services
6.1
c) construction g) protection of ancillary components.
d) openings
The construction of masonry walls should comply with the following:

z requirements of BS EN 1996-2 ‘Eurocode 6. Design of z and BS 8000-3 ‘Workmanship on construction sites.
masonry structures. Design considerations, selection of Masonry. Code of practice’.
materials and execution of masonry’
Finished appearance
A site reference panel should be constructed to agree a benchmark for workmanship and products.
The appearance of a masonry wall depends upon the:
z materials used z workmanship.
z setting out
When setting out masonry:

z avoid cutting bricks or blocks, except when it is essential z fair faced masonry bricks should be set out dry, prior to
z avoid irregular or broken bonds, particularly at openings commencement of works.
All work should be reasonably level and true, and:

z the bond detailed in the design used z courses kept level by using lines and spirit levels
z perpendicular joints kept in line and plumb z meet the tolerances defined within Chapter 9.1.
To keep courses to the correct height, use a gauge rod marked with the height of windows, doors and floors.
Where a number of openings of similar width are being formed, use a rod cut to the required size to check the width of openings
as the work rises.
Brickwork and blockwork should not be subjected to vibration until the mortar has set.
Chapter 6.1
Bonding
A regular bonding pattern should be maintained. External walls should be bonded to partitions and party walls as required by
the design. Either:
z tooth every alternate course, or z tie with wall ties, expanded metal or equivalent at maximum
300mm vertical centres.
Figure 10: Internal to external wall bonded connection Figure 11: Internal to external wall tied connection
Where joist hangers are not used, joist filling should be brickwork or blockwork and without excessive mortar joints.
Joist filling should be:
z 12mm below the top of flat roof joists to allow for z checked to ensure the cold roof ventilation is not blocked.
timber shrinkage
z the recessed portion of timber joists should be treated
Clay bricks and concrete blocks should not be mixed. Figure 12: Dissimilar masonry types
6.1
Where a different size of masonry unit is needed to

ensure correct coursing, small units of the same material
should be used to reduce cracking and problems due to
different thermal insulation properties.
Where the inner leaf of a cavity wall is being used for
thermal insulation, and where a different size of masonry
unit is used to ensure correct coursing, the unit should
have similar thermal insulation properties to the masonry
used for the rest of the wall.
Construction
The difference in heights between the two leaves of a cavity wall under construction can be up to six block courses, provided the
ties are sufficiently flexible to ensure coursing is achieved without breaking the bond. To keep the wall plumb, do not over-reach
at changes of lift; wait for the next scaffolding lift. With thin layer mortar construction having an assessment which complies with
Technical Requirement R3, it is normally permissible to build the inner leaf to storey height ahead of the outer leaf. In such cases
the recommendations of the assessment and the manufacturer’s recommendations should be followed.
Cavities should be constructed so that:
z they are uniform and in accordance with the design, z where partial cavity insulation is used, it is against the inner
including wall tie specification and cavity width leaf of the cavity
z mortar is struck from all joints as work proceeds z the thickness of the external leaf is consistent, any stone
z cavity trays and wall ties are clear of droppings and debris used should not project into the cavity
z mortar droppings are removed z cavity barriers are installed as the work progresses.
z where cavity insulation is used, mortar droppings are
removed from the top edge
Chapter 6.1
Figure 13: Masonry cavity wall plumb level Figure 14: Striking of mortar
Laying bricks and blocks Figure 15: Rain penetration to mortar joints
Bricks and blocks should have a solid mortar bedding and

fully filled perpends, to reduce the risk of rain penetration and
dampness in the wall.
Unless otherwise advised by the manufacturer, bricks with
single frogs should be laid with the frog facing upwards and
double frog bricks should be laid with the deeper frog facing
upwards. All frogs should be fully filled with mortar.
Where cutting of bricks is required to achieve bond:
z standard work sizes of cut bricks should be used, ie, quarter,
half, and three-quarter cuts
6.1
z bricks should be cut cleanly and accurately
z cutting of facing brickwork with a trowel should be avoided.
Special bricks in accordance with BS 4729 should be used to form curves, features (eg plinths or cappings) or angles other than
90 degrees (eg bay windows), which cannot be satisfactorily formed with standard bricks. Cut and stuck specials may be used in
accordance with the design where a standard special is not available.
Protection of cavity walls during construction

Masonry cavity walls shall be protected whenever work stops eg for inclement weather or overnight. The tops of both leaves, as
well as the cavity and any insulation, should be covered with sacking or plastic sheet and appropriately secured in place.
Chapter 6.1
Openings
Masonry may be built around either: Figure 16: Squareness of window openings
z the frame in-situ, or

z a profile or template to enable the frame to be fitted later.
Openings should be the correct size, square and:

z the spacing between the masonry and frame should allow for
movement and tolerance
z the frame should not be distorted by forcing bricks against
the jamb.
When window and door frames are built-in, they should be
fixed with:
z frame cramps
z proprietary cavity closers, or
z plugs and fixings.
Proprietary cavity closers should be fitted in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions. Cavity closers should be fitted Figure 17: Masonry setting out at window openings
in one continuous piece unless jointing is accepted by the
manufacturer and suitable details and installation instructions
are provided. The closer should be assessed as suitable for
the exposure zone of the site.
Where opening sizes and locations do not match brickwork
setting out, brick bonding pattern should be set out at the base
of the wall to ensure that cut bricks occur below openings.
6.1
Corbelling Figure 18: Corbelling
For feature brickwork sections the masonry should only be

self-supporting.
Where courses are corbelled outwards in ordinary masonry,
one above another; the extent of corbelling should not exceed
that shown in the diagrams on the right.
Where reinforcing is used, corbels should be designed by an
engineer in accordance with Technical Requirement R5.
Chasing for services

Chases should:
z not be cut with impact power tools, as they can damage z be limited to 1/6 of the depth of the leaf where horizontal
the wall z be limited to 1/3 of the depth of the leaf where vertical
z not cut into hollow blocks unless specifically permitted by z maintain a residual thickness of 15mm between the chase
the manufacturer and the void for hollow or cellular blocks unless otherwise
z be cut with care recommended by the manufacturer.
Protection of ancillary components

Table 4 contains guidance for a selection of ancillary components for use in buildings up to three storeys in height,
in a non-aggressive environment.
Chapter 6.1
Table 4: Protection of ancillary components

Product type EN 845 ref(1) Material/coating specification (the zinc coating masses are for one surface)
Wall ties, tension 1 Austenitic stainless steel (molybdenum chrome nickel alloys)
straps and hangers 3 Austenitic stainless steel (chrome nickel alloys)
conforming to
BS EN 845-1 8 or 9 Zinc coated (940g/m2) steel wire or component
Tension straps and 10 Zinc coated (710g/m2) steel component
hangers conforming to 11 Zinc coated (460g/m2) steel component
BS EN 845-1
(internal uses(2)) 12.1 or 12.2 Zinc coated (300g/m2) steel strip or sheet with organic coating over all outer surfaces of
finished component
13 Zinc coated (265g/m2) steel wire
14 Zinc coated (300g/m2) steel strip or sheet with all cut edges organic coated
15 Zinc precoated (300g/m2) steel strip or sheet
16.1 or 16.2 Zinc precoated (137g/m2) steel strip or sheet with organic coating over all outer
surfaces of finished component
17 Zinc precoated (137g/m2) steel strip or sheet with organic coating over all outer
surfaces of finished component
Lintels conforming to L1 Austenitic stainless steel (molybdenum chrome nickel alloys)
BS EN 845-2 L3 Austenitic stainless steel (chrome and nickel alloys)
L10 Zinc coated (710g/m2) steel component
L11.1 or L11.2 Zinc coated (460g/m2) steel component with organic coating over all outer surfaces of
finished component
L12.1 or L12.2 Zinc coated (300g/m2) steel strip or sheet with organic coating over all outer surfaces of
finished component
L16.2 Zinc coated (137g/m2) steel strip or sheet with organic coating over all outer surfaces of
finished component
Lintels conforming to L11 Zinc coated (460g/m2) steel component
BS EN 845-2, where L14 Zinc coated (300g/m2) steel strip or sheet with all cut edges organic coated
used with a separate
DPC L16.1 Zinc coated (137g/m2) steel strip or sheet with organic coating over all outer surfaces of
finished component
6.1
Bed joint reinforcement R1 Austenitic stainless steel (molybdenum chrome nickel alloys)
conforming to BS EN R3 Austenitic stainless steel (chrome nickel alloys)
845-3
R23 Austenitic-ferritic stainless steel to EN 10088 (all parts)
Windpost (3)(4)
1 Austenitic stainless steel (molybdenum chrome nickel alloys)
3 Austenitic stainless steel (chrome nickel alloys)
Notes
1 Material/coating reference in accordance with the relevant part of BS EN 845.
2 These products are not suitable for use in contact with the outer leaf of an external cavity wall or a single leaf cavity wall.
3 Outside the scope of BS EN 845 but meets the specification requirements of BS EN 845-1 for the material/coating reference.
4 Alternative material/coating specification may be provided in accordance with Cl. 5.12 and Table 2 of PD 6697:2019 where windposts are not connected to or
embedded in an external cavity wall.
Components in contact with, or embedded in, an inner leaf which is damp or exposed to periodic wetting (eg below the DPC)
should be protected in the same way as components in contact with, or embedded in, an outer leaf.
Chapter 6.1
6.1.12 Lintels Also see: Chapter 6.5
Lintels, and supporting beams, shall be installed correctly, safely support the applied loads and be of
the type and dimensions appropriate to their position within the structure. Issues to be taken into
account include:
a) thermal insulation and condensation c) placing lintels.
b) durability and resistance to water entering the home
Concrete, steel and reinforced brickwork are acceptable Figure 19: Masonry overhang to openings
materials for use as lintels. Timber lintels should not be
used, unless:
z protected from weather
z they do not support masonry or other rigid or brittle materials.
Lintels should:
z comply with BS EN 845-2 ‘Specification for ancillary z not have brickwork or masonry which overhangs more
components for masonry’, where steel or concrete than 25mm
z be designed in accordance either with Technical z have cavity trays where they are specified in the design
Requirement R5 or the manufacturer’s recommendations z have padstones and spreaders provided under the
6.1
z be provided where frames are not designed to support bearings, where necessary
superimposed loads z not have concentrated loads applied before the
z be wide enough to provide adequate support to the manufacturer’s requirement of fully bedded brickwork is met
walling above (this is to avoid overstressing).
Lintels should extend beyond the opening (at each end) by the minimum lengths shown in Table 5.
Table 5: Lintel bearing
Minimum bearing length (mm)
Span (m) Simple lintel Lintel combined with cavity tray
Up to 1.2 100(1) 150
Over 1.2 150 150
Notes
1 Minimum bearing lengths should be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
Where steel lintels are used: Figure 20: Combined lintel
z the manufacturer’s recommendations for providing adequate

fire resistance should be followed, particularly to the lower
steel flange
z the inner and outer leaf should be built up together to avoid
twisting the lintel flange
z the difference in height between the leaves should not
exceed 225mm.
Chapter 6.1
Where separate lintels are used to support the inner and outer masonry leaves:
z the cavity, at the head of the opening, should be closed off z the cavity tray should be built into the inner leaf and taken
with an insulated cavity closer to the outer face of the external wall directly over the outer
z a cavity tray should be installed to protect the cavity closer lintel and not between the cavity closer and lintel.
from moisture in the cavity
Figure 21: Separate lintels - reconstituted stone or concrete Figure 22: Separate lintels - steel
structural lintel
(continuous reinforced
reconstituted stone or
concrete without joints)
separate lintel
(concrete or steel)
supporting inner leaf
insulated
cavity closer
insulated
cavity closer
Thermal insulation and condensation

The risk of condensation at potential cold bridges, such as reveals and soffits, increases as the level of wall insulation increases.
To avoid cold bridging:
z wall insulation should abut the head of the window frame z insulation should be provided at the underside of the lintel
unless the manufacturer produces an alternative.
6.1
Durability and resistance to water entering the homes
Cavity tray/damp proof protection should be provided:
z over all openings, either combined as part of the lintel z where the outer leaf is fair faced masonry or where full-fill
or separate insulation is used, all cavity trays (separate or combined)
should have stop ends.
Separate cavity tray protection should be provided when corrosion protection to the lintel is inadequate, or where required by the
manufacturer, or the shape of the lintel is unsuitable, such as when:
z the profile of the lintel does not form a cavity tray z steel lintels in external walls have material/coating in
accordance with L11, L14 and L16.1, see Table 4.
In Scotland, Northern Ireland, the Isle of Man and areas of severe or very severe exposure to driving rain, a separate cavity tray
should be provided over all lintels.
Lintels should be:
z austenitic stainless steel (molybdenum chrome nickel z located and sized so that the external edge of the lintel
alloys) where used in aggressive environments, projects beyond, and therefore offers protection to,
eg coastal locations the window head.
Chapter 6.1
Placing lintels Figure 23: Lintel end bearing
The design should be checked and lintels should:

z be an appropriate size for the opening and the end bearings
(at each end)
z have padstones where required, eg for long spans
z be installed level on a solid bed of mortar (not soft or
non-durable packing)
z be set out to ensure that lintels bear on a full masonry unit
z not have brickwork or masonry which overhangs more
than 25mm.
Concrete floor units or other heavy components which bear on

lintels should be positioned carefully to avoid damage or
shock load.
6.1.13 Materials suitable for mortar

Materials used for mortar should comply with the appropriate requirements and standards.
Relevant standards include:
BS EN 197-1 ‘Cement. Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for common cements’
BS EN 197-1 or BS EN 413-1 ‘Masonry cement’
BS EN 459-1 ‘Building lime’
BS EN 998-2 ‘Specification for mortar for masonry. Masonry mortar’
BS EN 934-3 ‘Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout – Admixtures for masonry mortar’
BS EN 12878 ‘Pigments for the colouring of building materials based on cement and/or lime. Specifications
and methods of test’
6.1
BS EN 13139 ‘Aggregates for mortar’
6.1.14 Mortar Also see: Chapter 3.2
Mortar shall be of the mix proportions necessary to achieve adequate strength and durability and be
suitable for the type of masonry. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) sources of sulfate c) preparing mortar
b) admixtures and additives d) joints.
Unless recommended otherwise by the brick manufacturer, the mixes in Table 6 should be used for clay bricks. In the case of
concrete bricks, particular attention should be paid to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Table 6: Mortar mixes using ordinary Portland or sulfate-resisting cements
Location Recommended Recommended Recommended Mortar Equivalent
cement:lime: cement:sand masonry designation Mortar Class to
sand mix mix cement: to BS EN 1996-1-1
sand mix BS EN 1996-1-1
General wall area In areas of severe 1:½:4½ 1:3½ 1:3 (ii) M6
above the DPC or very
severe exposure
– high durability
Other exposure 1:1:5½ 1:5½ 1:4½ (iii) M4
categories –
general use
Below DPC level High durability 1:½:4½ 1:3½ 1:3 (ii) M6
and in chimney
stacks
Cappings, Low permeability 1:0 to ¼:3 – – (i) M12
copings
and sills
Chapter 6.1
Air-entraining plasticiser can be incorporated in the following general use and high durability mortars:
z 1:1:5½, cement:lime:sand, or z 1:1:4½, cement:lime:sand.
Retarded mortar
Retarded mortar and most premixed mortars can be used over a longer period of time than site-mixed, cement:lime:sand
mortars. When using retarded mortar:
z follow manufacturer’s recommendations and timescales z temporary bracing of larger walls, eg at gable peaks and
z do not use it beyond the time for which it is effective long walls, may be necessary due to delayed setting times.
z protect it against freezing prior to use
Sources of sulfate
Mortar is vulnerable to deterioration by sulfates, especially when masonry is saturated for long periods of time. Clay bricks
contain soluble sulfate (S1 designations have no limit on their sulfate content) and so a suitable mortar should be used.
To reduce risk, cement types listed in BS EN 998:2 NA1.2 with sulfate resisting properties or alternatively CEM II cements based
on blast-furnace slag are in widespread use where sulfate resistance is required, and should be used:
z below the DPC level when sulfates are present in z when there is a high saturation risk (examples below).
the ground
z when clay bricks (F2,S1 and F1,S1 to BS EN 771) are used
High saturation risk situations are:

z below the DPC z freestanding walls
z areas of severe or very severe exposure to driving rain z rendered walls
z parapets z chimney stacks.
z retaining walls
Admixtures and additives

Admixtures should:
6.1
z only be used where agreed with the designer z be dosed and used in accordance with the
z not contain calcium chloride manufacturer’s recommendations.
Mortars containing an air-entraining plasticiser are more resistant to freeze and thaw damage when set, but do not prevent
freezing before the mortar is cured.
White cement to BS EN 197 and pigments to BS EN 12878 may be used, but pigments should not exceed 10% of the
cement weight, or 3% where carbon black is used.
Preparing mortar
When preparing mortar:
z ensure the mix is appropriate for the use and location z mixers should be kept clean to operate efficiently
z plant and banker boards should be kept clean z the colour should be consistent.
When laying bricks and blocks:

z mortar should be the correct mix and used within two z mortar which has started to set should not be retempered.
hours, unless it is retarded mortar
Notes
Thin layer mortars are supplied in bag form and should be mixed with water on site strictly following the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Chapter 6.1
Joints
Jointing is preferable to pointing because it leaves the mortar undisturbed. Struck (or weathered) and bucket handle joints are
preferable for external walls. Unless the design states otherwise, only bucket handle or weathered joints should be used.
Recessed joints should not be used where:
z bricks are not frost-resistant, eg clay F1,S1 or F1,S2 to z bricks are perforated closer than 15mm to the face
BS EN 771, unless the brick manufacturer has confirmed z there is no reasonable shelter from driving rain, eg
their use for that particular location in writing from buildings or groups of trees within 50m and of
z the home is built on steep sloping ground, facing open similar height to the home
countryside or within 8km of a coast or large estuary z the cavity is to be fully filled with cavity insulation.
6.1.15 Render Also see: Chapter 6.11
The surface to which render is applied, shall be appropriately constructed and satisfactorily resist the
passage of moisture.
Walls to be rendered should be constructed in accordance with the relevant parts of this chapter. For detailed guidance on
‘Render’, see Chapter 6.11.
6.1.16 Cladding Also see: Chapter 3.3, 6.2 and 6.9
Cladding shall satisfactorily resist the passage of moisture and be of the quality, type and dimensions
required by the design. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) masonry cladding to framed structures d) vertical tile or slate cladding
b) joints e) stone veneer cladding.
c) materials for cladding
This clause is for low rise applications where the masonry is used directly for weather tightness or used in conjunction with other
vertical cladding for weather tightness. Chapter 6.9 covers curtain walling and other structural cladding.
Refer to the Robust Details Handbook to check compatibility of lightweight external treatments.
6.1
z flexible movement joints should be provided at the z vertical movement joints should be provided at corners
underside of each horizontal support member z the inner leaf should be adequately tied to the
z the masonry outer leaf should have a minimum two-thirds structural frame.
of its width supported securely by the concrete frame or a
metal angle. See diagram (water exclusion detail not
included for clarity)
Where external claddings such as fibre cement, timber or tile hanging are installed on masonry walls, cavity barriers should
be provided:
z at the edges of cavities including eaves and verges, around z at the junction between an external cavity wall and every
openings such as windows and doors and entry/exit points compartment floor and compartment wall.
Masonry cladding to framed structures

Allowance should be made for differential movement between cladding and the frame. The following precautions should be taken
to prevent buckling and fracturing of masonry panels:
Chapter 6.1
z flexible movement joints should be provided at the underside Figure 24: Masonry support
of each horizontal support member
z the masonry outer leaf should have a minimum two-thirds
of its width supported securely by the concrete frame or a
metal angle. See diagram (water exclusion detail not included
for clarity)
z appropriately detailed horizontal joint to be provided which can
accommodate all movements anticipated at the joint including
deflection of substrate and the angle support system, as well
as the limited compressibility of both the joint fillers & sealant
z additionally, horizontal movement joints should be capable of
accommodating at least 1mm movement per continuous meter
of vertical clay masonry
z vertical movement joints should be provided at corners,
where appropriate
z the inner leaf should be adequately tied to the structural frame.
Joints
Joints between claddings and adjacent materials should:
z be detailed to be watertight under the particular exposure z have provision for differential movement, where necessary.
conditions of the site
Materials for cladding

Table 7: Materials for cladding
Component Requirement Notes
Tiles and slates BS EN 1304, BS EN 490, Clay tiles for tile hanging, concrete tiles for tile hanging, slates for
BS EN 12326-1 vertical slating
Timber boarding BS EN 942 Timber should: z comply with and be at least J50
6.1
z be a naturally durable species or pre-treated
with preservative
Battens Battens should be: z of the size specified in the design
z pre-treated with preservative
Proprietary cladding systems Technical Requirement R3 Satisfactory assessment by an appropriate independent technical
approvals authority accepted by NHBC
Timber cladding should be in accordance with Chapter 3.3 ‘Timber preservation (natural solid timber)’.
Prefabricated lightweight brick clad arches

Prefabricated lightweight brick clad arches comprising cement particle or fibre cement boards, injected polyurethane core, clay fired
brick slips attached with epoxy adhesive for use a decorative non-loadbearing arch above openings in masonry cavity walls should:
z hold a satisfactory assessment by an appropriate technical z include a cavity tray over all openings (where
approval’s authority acceptable to NHBC manufacturer’s recommendations require cavity tray to be
z be supported by a loadbearing lintel located over prefabricated lightweight arches, a lintel with
z be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions suitable profile and durability and proprietary stop-ends and
weepholes should be provided).
Vertical tile or slate cladding

Vertical tile or slate cladding to walls should:
z conform with Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and cladding’ z be fixed in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Chapter 6.1
Stone veneer cladding systems

Stone veneer cladding systems should be in accordance with:
z BS 8298 when mechanically fixed z Chapter 6.9 when used as a brick slip/rainscreen system.
z technical Requirement R3 when adhesive fixed
6.1.17 DPCs and cavity trays Also see: BS 8215
DPCs and related components shall be provided to prevent moisture rising or entering the building. Issues
to be taken into account include:
a) provision of DPCs and cavity trays c) parapet details.
b) stepped cavity trays
Provision of DPCs and cavity trays

DPCs and flexible cavity trays should be of the correct dimensions to suit the detailed design.
High Bond DPC can be used for applications including parapet walls, beneath copings and cappings.
High load DPC should be used where it will be subject to a full storey of masonry.
The following materials are acceptable for use as DPCs:

Bitumen based materials BS 6398, BS EN 14967
Polyethylene (except as cavity trays in walls, below copings BS 6515, BS EN 14909
and in parapets)
Proprietary materials Technical Requirement R3
Table 8: Positions where DPCs and cavity trays are generally required
Location Provision of DPCs and cavity trays
Base of walls, piers, etc A DPC should be provided a minimum 150mm above adjoining surfaces and linked with
the DPM in solid floors
Base of partitions built off oversite The DPC should be the full width of the partition
6.1
where there is no integral DPM

Base of wall built off beam, slab, etc Detail to prevent entry of damp by driving rain
Parapets Beneath coping, and 150mm above adjoining roof surface to link with the roof upstand
In cavity walls over openings, A cavity tray should be provided to direct any water that enters the cavity to the outside.
air bricks, etc The cavity tray should fully protect the opening
At the horizontal abutment of all A cavity tray should be provided 150mm above any adjoining roof or balcony surface.
roofs over enclosed areas and The tray should be lapped over any roof upstand or flashing to ensure water penetrating
balconies to walls into the cavity does not enter the enclosed area
At sloping abutments of all roofs Preformed stepped cavity trays should be provided above the roof surface and linked to
over enclosed areas to cavity walls the roof upstand or flashing to ensure any water penetrating into the cavity does not enter
the enclosed area
Doorsteps A DPC should be provided behind a doorstep where it is higher than a wall DPC
Sills Where precast concrete or similar sills incorporate joints or are of a permeable material,
a DPC should be provided beneath them for the full length and be turned up at the back
and the end of the sill
Jambs in cavity The reveal should be protected throughout its width by a continuous DPC. The width of
the DPC should be sufficient to be fixed to, or overlap, the frame and fully protect the
reveal
For very severe exposure conditions, rebated reveal construction or a proprietary closer,
suitable for the conditions, should be used
Stone heads Where precast concrete or similar stone heads incorporate joints or are made of a
permeable material, a DPC should be provided beneath them for the full length and built
into or fixed to the inner leaf wall
Above gas membranes Where gas membranes bridge the cavity a cavity tray should be provided. Cavity trays
bridging the cavity should be sealed to the gas membrane in accordance with manufacturers instructions to
prevent capillary damp ingress at the joint
Chapter 6.1
Figure 25: Low level DPC Figure 26: Cavity tray to air brick/meter box
Figure 27: DPC to stone cill
6.1
Cavity trays
Cavity trays should be provided at all interruptions to the cavity (eg window and door openings and air bricks) unless otherwise
protected (eg by overhanging eaves). Cavity trays should:
z meet the requirements of BS EN 14909 and hold z have a 140mm minimum upstand from the inside face of the
certification from an appropriate independent technical outer leaf to the outside of the inner leaf
approvals authority accepted by NHBC confirming suitability z not be low-density polyethylene (LDPE) to BS 6515
for use as a cavity tray z be shaped to provide 100mm minimum vertical protection
z provide an impervious barrier and ensure that water above points where mortar droppings could collect
drains outwards z be provided where the cavity is bridged by air bricks,
z always be provided with stop ends where discontinuous etc and the DPC should extend 150mm beyond each
z project sufficiently beyond the lintel ends and cavity face of side of the bridge
the cavity closer or vertical DPC; forming a stop end in the z where not otherwise protected (eg by a roof at an
nearest naturally occurring perpend joint appropriate level), be provided over meter boxes
z be laid on a wet, even bed of mortar, free from projections z be in one continuous piece or where necessary have sealed
which could puncture or adversely affect the DPC material; or welded joints which are provided with rigid support and
with masonry above bedded on wet mortar to ensure the lapped at least 100mm
DPC material is ‘sandwiched’ z be preformed where used at complicated junctions
z provide drip protection to door and window heads z be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation.
Chapter 6.1
Figure 28: Cavity tray to openings Figure 29: Cavity tray stop ends and weepholes
3D
The upstand part of the cavity tray should be returned into the inner leaf unless it is stiff enough to stand against the inner leaf
without support. In Scotland, Northern Ireland, the Isle of Man and areas of very severe exposure to driving rain, the upstand part
of the damp proof protection should be returned into the inner leaf of masonry (this does not apply at sloping abutments).
Where fair faced masonry is supported by lintels:
z weepholes should be provided at a maximum of z each opening should have at least two weepholes
450mm intervals z cavity trays or combined lintels should have stop ends.
Where the lintel does not require a DPC, it should:

z have a suitable profile and durability z give complete protection to the top of the reveal and vertical
DPC, where provided.
Where the cavity has full-fill insulation, a cavity tray should be used above the highest insulation level, unless the insulation is
taken to the top of the wall and is in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
6.1
Weepholes
Weepholes in cavity walls should be the equivalent of a full brick perpend joint, eg 65mm x 10mm where exposed within the
cavity. The size of the discharge opening in proprietary weepholes may be smaller, provided it is designed to discharge any
water collected, safely. The end of the weephole within the cavity should be kept clear of mortar droppings.
Weepholes to cavity walls should be provided:
z to cavity trays above openings and penetrations through the z on cavity trays in parapet walls or at horizontal roof
wall (such as sub-floor vents, ducts, or flues), at least two abutments at not more than 1m centres
per opening at not more than 450mm centres z to cavity trays above inset gas meter boxes, a minimum of
z at least one to the bottom tray in a series of stepped cavity 180mm from the edge of the meter box at not more than 1m
trays, eg at pitched roof abutments centres. See figure 30.
Figure 30: Weepholes to inset gas meter box
For guidance on weepholes to rendered walls see Chapter 6.11 ‘Render’.

Where masonry cladding is installed to timber framed structures, the guidance on design of weep vents in Chapter 6.2 ‘External
timber framed walls’ should be followed.
Chapter 6.1
Complicated junctions
Changes of direction of a cavity tray or interfaces with other elements in the cavity are more complicated than simple joints and
would involve complex bending, folding, or cutting and sealing if fabricated on site. At complicated junctions, clear drawings and
the design should be provided, and preformed cavity trays used.
Complicated junctions include:
z pitched roof abutments (ie, stepped trays) z door thresholds (in conjunction with gas membranes, flat
z steps in horizontal level roofing detailing etc)
z internal corners z penetrations in horizontal cavity tray arrangements (ie,
z external corners telescopic vents, services etc)
z t-junctions (ie, intersection of parapet wall) z interfaces with windposts, balcony supports, balustrading or
guarding.
Where preformed cavity trays are used, the joint with the flexible DPC cavity tray should be sealed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Horizontal DPCs
DPCs should:
z be the correct width z at ground level, generally be a minimum of 150mm above
z lap the DPM where appropriate finished ground or paving level
z be laid on a wet, even bed of mortar, free from projections z where intended to prevent rising damp, joints should have
which could puncture or adversely affect the DPC material; 100mm lapping, or be sealed or welded
with masonry above bedded on wet mortar to ensure the z be considered in the design of masonry wall panel
DPC material is ‘sandwiched’ z be used in accordance with the
The concrete fill in a cavity wall should stop at least 225mm below the base DPC. This may be reduced to 150mm where special
foundations, such as rafts, are used.
Figure 31: Concrete cavity fill Figure 32: Stepped horizontal DPC
6.1
Where a jointed or permeable sill is used, a DPC should be:

z placed between the sill and the outer leaf z turned up at the back and ends of the sill.
At sills where there is:

z a DPC, it should be lapped with the reveal DPC z no DPC, the vertical DPC should be continued 150mm
below the sill level.
Special DPC detailing may be required at accessible thresholds.
Vertical DPCs
A separate vertical DPC should be provided around openings, extend to the underside of the lintel, and:
z be of a proprietary material assessed in accordance with z 150mm wide DPC material, nailed to the full height of the
Technical Requirement R3, or frame and protrude 25mm into the cavity.
Chapter 6.1
A fillet joint of sealant should not be considered a substitute for good workmanship or DPCs. However, a bead of mastic should
be used around openings.
Cavity trays and insulation material

Where full fill or partial fill insulation is installed, particular care needs to be taken to ensure the insulation continuity is maintained
around the cavity tray.
Connections with flashings
Where flashings link with DPCs, (eg horizontal or preformed stepped cavity trays), 25mm of mortar below the DPC should also
be raked out as the work proceeds to allow for the flashing to be tucked in.
Figure 33: DPC to flashing interface
Joints between the masonry and flashing should be pointed with cement mortar or suitable exterior grade sealant (polysulfide or
neutral-cured silicone) in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Arches
At openings with an arched head or circular windows it is not practical to shape a flexible DPC and achieve the correct protection
and a preformed cavity tray should be used.
6.1
Stepped cavity trays

Where the roof abuts at an angle with the wall, preformed Figure 34: Stepped cavity trays
stepped cavity trays should be provided.
To minimise the risk of water ingress below the abutment,
preformed stepped cavity trays:
z should be provided where a roof abuts a cavity wall above an
enclosed area, eg an attached garage
z should have two stop ends at the lowest cavity tray and a
weephole to allow water to drain from the cavity
z are not necessary where the roof is not over an enclosed
area, eg open car ports and open porches.
Preformed stepped cavity trays should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and positioned:
z to suit the dimension of the flashing (which should be in z so that the stepped cavity tray cannot discharge behind
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations or a flashing (where it is necessary to cut bricks or blocks,
minimum width of 65mm) the bond should be maintained in the following joint).
Chapter 6.1
Parapet details
Parapet walls should have:
z a DPC under the coping, and a DPC tray starting 150mm z coping throating which is 30mm clear of the brickwork
minimum above the roof z copings should comply with BS 5642 Parts 1 & 2.
DPCs in parapet walls should be:

z supported over the cavity to prevent sagging below copings z specified to achieve a good key with the mortar
z fully bedded in mortar z sealed to prevent water seeping through the joints.
Figure 35: Parapet walls Figure 36: Copings/cappings to parapet walls
Figure 37: Parapet to external wall junction - DPC/cavity tray arrangement
6.1
Chapter 6.1
6.1.18 Wall ties, bed joint reinforcements and windposts

Wall ties, bed joint reinforcements and windposts of the correct type shall be installed where required, and
be suitable for their intended use and location. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) position c) cavity widths of over 100mm.
b) ties for partial fill insulation
Wall ties should:

z be in accordance with BS EN 845-1 or z be of the type or classification that is appropriate for the end
Technical Requirement R3 use (including cavity width) and geographical location
z be of the type as specified in the design z be specified to accommodate movement where required by
z be long enough to be embedded a minimum of 50mm into the design
each leaf z be used in accordance with manufacturers
z be stainless steel or non-ferrous recommendations.
z be spaced above and below the DPC in accordance with
Table 9
Bed joint reinforcements should:

z be in accordance with BS EN 845-3 or z be stainless steel or non-ferrous
Technical Requirement R3 z have a minimum lap length of 225mm and laps between
z be of the type as specified in the design lengths should always be staggered
z be sufficiently wide so that minimum cover of 20mm is z be used strictly in accordance with
provided from the external face of masonry manufacturers recommendations.
Windposts should:
z be designed by an engineer in accordance with Technical z be austenitic stainless steel (chrome nickel alloys) or
Requirement R5 austenitic stainless steel (molybdenum chrome nickel
z comply with Cl. 5.12 and Table 2 of PD 6697:2019 alloys) where connected to or embedded in an external
‘Recommendations for the design of masonry structures to cavity wall
6.1
BS EN 1996-1-1 and BS EN 1996-2’ z be austenitic stainless steel (molybdenum chrome

nickel alloys) where used in aggressive environments,
eg coastal locations.
Position
Table 9: Spacing of wall ties
Maximum horizontal spacing (mm) Maximum vertical spacing (mm)
General wall area 900 450
Jamb openings, movement joints, etc Within 225 of opening Not more than 300(1)
Top of gable walls 225 (parallel to the top of the wall) Not more than 300(2)
Top and bottom of openings 450 N/A
Notes
1 Vertical spacing and number of ties may need adjusting to produce equivalent number of ties when using insulation boards.
2 Vertical spacing and number of ties may need adjusting to produce equivalent number of ties when using studded or spandrel panels.
Water should be prevented from crossing the cavity. Care should be taken to avoid:
z ties sloping down to the inner leaf z ties having mortar droppings on them.
z drips being off-centre
Cavity walls should be coursed so that the wall tie is level or slopes outwards.
Chapter 6.1
Figure 38: Wall tie locations Figure 39: Wall tie embedment Figure 40: Wall tie to partial fill insulation
Wall ties should be:

z built in and not pushed into joints z positioned so that the drip is centred in the clear cavity and
z be of sufficient length to achieve a minimum 50mm faces downwards.
embedment into each leaf of masonry, allowing for normal
tolerances in cavity width
Ties for partial fill insulation

Where partial cavity fill insulation is being used, it should be held against the inner leaf by retaining devices, which may be
clipped to the wall ties. Retaining devices should be:
z compatible with the wall ties z used in accordance with Technical Requirement R3.
Where 1,200mm boards are used with partial fill cavities, the wall ties should:
z be spaced closer to provide adequate support and restraint z be spaced at 600mm centres in rows, ie, not staggered.
6.1
Cavity widths of over 100mm
Where cavity to masonry walls is to be between 100-150mm, wall tie spacing in Table 9 above may still be used in dwelling
of up to three storeys high in sheltered and moderate exposure locations, provided they are of the right length with 50mm
minimum embedment in the masonry.
Where dwellings are exposed to severe and very severe winds including on exposed and elevated locations of over 150m
above sea level as well as coastal locations, site specific assessment of wall tie requirements should be undertaken. The wall tie
spacing in Table 9 above may still be acceptable, if used in conjunction with stiffer wall tie types – eg Type 1 or 2 in
accordance with PD 6697.
6.1.19 Handling materials

Materials shall be handled in such a way as to ensure that the construction is neat, clean and undamaged
upon completion.
Materials should be stored properly. Issues to be taken into account include the following:
z deliveries should be undertaken safely to protect both the z cement should be stored off the ground and protected
operatives and materials only using pallets provided by from weather
the manufacturer z sand should be prevented from spreading and be protected
z stacks of bricks and blocks should be protected from rain so that it remains clean
and mud splashes, etc by covering them with z insulation materials should be handled and stored in
waterproof covers accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Normally
z a suitable level and safe place should be identified on each insulation materials should be protected from the weather.
site for the masonry deliveries
Chapter 6.1
Materials should be handled with care during construction to avoid damage and staining. Chipped or fractured bricks are not
acceptable for facework.
Bricks that are tipped on delivery or moved about the site in dumper trucks often have a high degree of wastage.
The unloading of all bricks and blocks, especially facing bricks, should be:
z by mechanical means z directly onto a firm level surface.
Unless bricks have been blended by the manufacturer, bricks from different batches should be mixed to avoid colour patching.
To reduce the risk of efflorescence, newly erected masonry should be covered. This also prevents the mortar being washed out
of the joints by rain and stops masonry becoming saturated. Bricks and blocks that become excessively wet can suffer from:
z staining and efflorescence z lack of mortar adhesion to mud-stained surfaces.
z increased drying shrinkage, with a greater risk of cracking
The work place should be kept clean to reduce mortar splashes to a minimum. Any accidental mortar smears should be lightly
brushed off the face after the mortar has taken its first set.
6.1.20 Protection of the works during construction Also see: Chapter 3.2
Precautions shall be taken to protect walls from damage during construction.

Issues to be considered include:
a) cold weather working c) excessive rain working.
b) hot weather working
Cold weather working

Freshly laid mortar may fail where it freezes.
The use of air entraining agents in cold weather gives better frost resistance to set mortar but does not aid the set. The use of
accelerating admixtures and other admixtures should not:
z be relied on as an anti-freeze precaution z contain calcium chloride.
6.1
Ensure the setting times of additives are checked and adhered to in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Cold weather retarders increase setting times.
In cold weather:
z brickwork and blockwork should not be built when the air z covers should be provided to form a still air space to
temperature is below 3°C and falling insulate the wall
z work can resume when the temperature is 1°C and rising z walling damaged by frost will not regain strength and should
with the expectation the temperature will exceed 3°C be taken down and rebuilt when conditions improve.
z walls should be protected from frost until the mortar has set
sufficiently to resist frost damage
Note Thin joint mortars that can be shown to have been successfully tested for use down to 0°C are acceptable when the temperature is 0°C and rising. The mortar
should be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and Chapter 3.2 ‘Cold weather working’.
Hot weather working

In very hot weather above 30°C the main concern is the rate water is removed from the mortar either by suction of the warm
masonry or evaporation, the mortar will also tend to lose its plasticity at a faster rate due to the evaporation of the water from
the mix.
Mortar mixed at high temperatures may have a higher water content, a lower air content and a shorter board life. The quality of
the bond between the mortar and the brick or block is dependent on having the correct amount of water and so this bond may
be affected.
Chapter 6.1
To reduce the impact of higher temperatures:

z store bricks and blocks in the shade to help control z where ready-to-use mortar is being stored on site it is
heat gain important to keep it well covered in the tub
z spraying with modest amounts of clean water can keep their z dry Silo Mortar - where the dry sand and cement mortar is
temperature down and to stop the suction but, do not stored on site in a hopper and mixed with water on demand,
soak them this offers the added advantage of being able to mix small
z mixing equipment can be shaded from direct sunlight prior batches which can be used up quickly.
to use
z mortar tubs and mortar boards should be rinsed with cool
water before coming into contact with the mortar
In dry hot weather absorbent clay masonry units may be wetted by lightly spraying to reduce suction. Care should be taken not
to over wet units. Low absorption units such as engineering bricks should not be wetted.
Newly built masonry should be protected with suitable material ie, hessian or sheeting, to insulate and prevent drying out too
quickly. Hessian should not be wetted and laid dry.
Excessive rain working

Do not lay bricks or blocks in excessive wet conditions.
Ensure new brickwork and blockwork is completely covered to protect it from the elements.
If brickwork and blockwork is exposed to water for a prolonged period of time, the risk of leaching, cement residues and
efflorescence will increase.
Protection of cavity walls during construction
Masonry cavity walls shall be protected whenever work stops eg for inclement weather or overnight. The tops of both leaves, as
well as the cavity and any insulation, should be covered with sacking or plastic sheet and appropriately secured in place.
Figure reference table

Figure reference table 6.1
6.1
Fig No Title/Description Clause Page
Figure 1 Lateral restraint by buttressing wall 6.1.3 3
Figure 2 Movement joint sealant 6.1.3 4
Figure 3 Lateral restraint and acoustics 6.1.5 6
Figure 4 Check reveal 6.1.6 7
Figure 5 Exposure zones 6.1.6 8
Figure 6 Frost exposure zones 6.1.6 9
Figure 7 Full fill insulation 6.1.7 11
Figure 8 Insulation to combined lintel ends 6.1.7 11
Figure 9 Cavity ties to rigid partial fill insulation 6.1.7 11
Figure 10 Internal to external wall bonded connection 6.1.11 17
Figure 11 Internal to external wall tied connection 6.1.11 17
Figure 12 Dissimilar masonry types 6.1.11 17
Figure 13 Masonry cavity wall plumb level 6.1.11 18
Figure 14 Striking of mortar 6.1.11 18
Figure 15 Rain penetration to mortar joints 6.1.11 18
Figure 16 Squareness of window openings 6.1.11 19
Figure 17 Masonry setting out at window openings 6.1.11 19
Figure 18 Corbelling 6.1.11 19
Figure 19 Masonry overhang to openings 6.1.12 21
Figure 20 Combined lintel 6.1.12 21
Figure 21 Separate lintels - reconstituted stone or concrete 6.1.12 22
Figure 22 Separate lintels - steel 6.1.12 22
Figure 23 Lintel end bearing 6.1.12 23
Figure 24 Masonry support 6.1.16 26
Chapter 6.1
Figure 25 Low level DPC 6.1.17 28

Figure 26 Cavity tray to air brick/meter box 6.1.17 28
Figure 27 DPC to stone cill 6.1.17 28
Figure 28 Cavity tray to openings 6.1.17 29
Figure 29 Cavity tray stop ends and weepholes 6.1.17 29
Figure 30 Weepholes to inset gas meter box 6.1.17 29
Figure 31 Concrete cavity fill 6.1.17 30
Figure 32 Stepped horizontal DPC 6.1.17 30
Figure 33 DPC to flashing interface 6.1.17 31
Figure 34 Stepped cavity trays 6.1.17 31
Figure 35 Parapet walls 6.1.17 32
Figure 36 Copings/cappings to parapet walls 6.1.17 32
Figure 37 Parapet to external wall junction - DPC/cavity tray arrangement 6.1.17 32
Figure 38 Wall tie locations 6.1.18 34
Figure 39 Wall tie embedment 6.1.18 34
Figure 40 Wall tie to partial fill insulation 6.1.18 34
6.1
Chapter
6.2
External timber
framed walls
Requirements for external walls of timber framed
homes up to seven storeys high, substantially timber
framed homes and timber wall panels.
6.2.1 Compliance 01
6.2.3 Design checking and certification 01
6.2.4 Load-bearing walls 02
6.2.5 Fixing the frame 04
6.2.6 Nails and staples 05
6.2.7 Sheathing 05
6.2.8 Differential movement 06
6.2.10 Protection from moisture 12
6.2.11 Timber preservation 14
6.2.12 Air and vapour control layers 14
6.2.13 Breather membranes 15
6.2.14 Wall ties and fixings 15
6.2.15 Insulation 16
1 External timber framed walls I 2024
Chapter 6.2
External timber framed walls shall comply with the Technical Requirements.
External timber framed walls that comply with the guidance in this chapter will generally be acceptable. For guidance on internal
walls and floors within timber frame buildings, see Chapters 6.3 and 6.4.
Where the components of the timber frame cannot be inspected on site (eg closed panels or fully fitted out volumetric units)
the system should be subject to review by NHBC. Please refer to the NHBC Accepts website at www.nhbc.co.uk/builders/
products-and-services/techzone/accepts.

information and be distributed to all appropriate personnel.
Clear and fully detailed drawings should be available on site to enable work to be carried out in accordance with the design.
Design and specification information should be issued to site supervisors, relevant specialist subcontractors and suppliers,
and includes the following:
z a full set of drawings z fixing schedules
z materials specification z manufacturer’s recommendations relating to
z the position and materials for cavity barriers in accordance proprietary items.
with relevant Building Regulations
The fixing schedule should detail every connection which is to be made on site, including those for structural connections,
framing, wall ties, breather membranes, sheathing and vapour control layers, and should show as appropriate:
z number and spacing of fixings z method of fixing, eg skew nailing.
z size and type of fixing, including material and
corrosion protection
Further guidance on the contribution of plasterboard to racking resistance can be found in Clause 6.2.7. Where wall design relies
on plasterboard to take racking forces, the design should:
6.2
z clearly define those walls z include the type and spacing of fixings required.
6.2.3 Design checking and certification Contact Us: technical@nhbc.co.uk
Design of the superstructure shall be adequately checked.

Homes with a timber frame superstructure require certification confirming that the design has been checked by an NHBC
approved timber frame certifier.
The timber frame certifier should:
z be listed on NHBC’s list of timber frame certifiers z complete and sign a certificate confirming assessment of
z be a suitably qualified civil or structural engineer with a structural adequacy for each specific project
minimum of three years’ experience in timber z provide the registered builder with the completed and
frame construction signed certificate.
z not be the designer of the timber frame nor be from the
same practice
The registered builder should ensure that the completed timber frame certificate is available on site for inspection by NHBC.
Contact NHBC Standards, Innovation and Research via technicalsupport@nhbc.co.uk
z if you require contact details of frame certifiers, or z to apply to become a timber frame certifier.
Alternatively, timber frame superstructures from Gold level members of the Structural Timber Association’s Assure scheme, who
have engaged Silver/Gold level structural designers and engineers, are acceptable without additional certification.
The registered builder should ensure that a letter from the manufacturer is available on site for inspection by NHBC.
Designs should be submitted to NHBC when proposed buildings are four storeys or more and the floor joists are solid timber.
2024 I External timber framed walls 2
Chapter 6.2
Also see: Chapter 6.3, Structural Timber Association Advice Note 4

6.2.4 Load-bearing walls Tolerances (www.structuraltimber.co.uk)
Load-bearing timber framed walls shall be constructed to support and transfer loads to foundations safely
and without undue movement. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) timber elements e) fixing panels
b) joints between panels and other elements f) timber frame erection tolerances
c) positioning of sole plates g) support of prefabricated chimneys.
d) packing under sole plates
Timber elements
Load-bearing timber framed walls should be in accordance with BS EN 1995-1-1, and take into account:
z wind loads z floor loads
z roof loads z cladding loads.
Structural timber components should be of a suitable strength class as specified by the designer to BS EN 338. Solid structural
timber should be:
z machine graded to BS EN 14081, or visually graded to BS z dry graded
4978 for softwoods or BS 5756 for hardwoods z marked in accordance with BS EN 14081.
z assigned a strength class based on BS EN 1912 when
visually graded
Further guidance on strength classes for certain timber species can be found in PD 6693.
Engineered wood products such as I-section or metal-web studs should be assessed in accordance with Technical
Requirement R3.
Individual timber studs should have:
z a minimum width of 38mm z a maximum spacing of 600mm, unless other adequate
support is provided for wall boards and fixings.
Narrow or inaccessible gaps between studs which are difficult to insulate should be avoided.
6.2
Lintels and cripple studs should be provided at openings in Figure 1: Timber frame wall panel
load-bearing panels except where:
z the opening does not affect the stud spacing, or
lintel
z supported loads are carried by a ring beam or header joist.
Sheathing and associated fixings should be structurally load-bearing lintel

supported by
adequate, and resist racking due to wind and other forces. cripple studs
Where masonry cladding is used, additional studs may be

required at openings and vertical movement joints to fix wall ties.
Where cavity barriers do not align with structural framing members,
additional studs and full-depth noggings should be provided.
Multiple studs should be included to support multiple joists and
other point loads, unless otherwise specified by the designer.
Where head binders are not provided, joists and roof trusses,
including girder trusses and other similar loads, should bear
directly over studs.
Joints between panels and other elements
Wall panels should be:
z securely fixed together, and securely fixed to the floor and z constructed to prevent buckling.
roof framing
At joints between wall panels, sole plates and head binders should be provided to bind panels together. Joints in sole plates and
head binders should:
z occur over a stud z not coincide with joints between panels.
Chapter 6.2
Positioning of sole plates

When setting out:
z the substructure should be correctly set out to receive the z the load from the frame should be supported as intended in
timber frame the design
z the timber frame should be checked to ensure that it is z protection should be provided where foundation ledges form
erected accurately, both horizontally and vertically moisture traps.
Figure 2: Sole plate foundation overhang Figure 3: Sole plate foundation set back
12mm 12mm
frame set back

12mm max. from
12mm max. edge of supporting
overhang over structure
supporting structure (20mm for 140mm
(20mm for 140mm wide studs)
wide studs)
ledge protected
by membrane
Packing under sole plates

Where packing is required to ensure the timber frame or sole plate is level:
z permanent packing should be used for gaps less than 5mm z temporary spacers can remain in place provided they are
z grout and mortar should not be used for gaps less than 5mm durable and non-degradable.
z hollow plastic packing with reduced bearing surfaces should
not be used
Permanent packing should be:
z designed and approved by the timber frame designer to suit z at least the same plan area as the load points,
6.2
the horizontal and vertical loads on the sole plate eg studs or posts.
Packing exceeding 20mm should be agreed between the timber frame manufacturer’s engineer and NHBC. The following
methods are generally acceptable to NHBC for packing up to 20mm.
Permanent structural packing under sole plate Figure 4: Permanent structural packing under each stud
The sole plate should be levelled on temporary spacers.
bottom member
of wall panel
When the first lift construction (including wall panels, first floor
structure, or roof structure in a single storey building) has been
erected, permanent packing should be placed under the sole
plate, which can be: permanent packing
under each stud
z free-flowing non-shrinkable grout for the full length and width sole plate
of the sole plate, or

z individual packers placed under each load point,
eg stud or post.
Where grout is used as permanent structural packing,
installation should be checked to ensure full bearing is achieved.
Chapter 6.2
Bedding of the sole plate Figure 5: Bedding of sole plate on mortar

The sole plate should be laid and levelled on a continuous bed
of mortar prior to the erection of the wall panels.
bottom member
of wall panel
The bedding should extend the full width of the sole plate.
Care is needed to ensure that the bedding is not disturbed
during the fixing of the sole plate. mortar bed
sole plate
Double sole plate ‘sandwich’ Figure 6: Double sole plate sandwich

The lower sole plate should be fixed to follow the contours of the bottom member
supporting structure. of wall panel
temporary
The upper sole plate should then be fixed on top and levelled spacer
with temporary spacers inserted between the sole plates.

permanent packing
When the first lift construction has been erected, under each stud
sole plate
permanent packing should be inserted under each load
point, eg stud or post.
Fixing panels
The wall panels should be adequately fixed to the sole plate so that the frame can resist both lateral and vertical forces.
When fixing panels:
z fixings, including nailed joints and sheathing, should be as z sole plates and head binders should be provided to bind the
scheduled in the design panels together.
z they should be securely fixed together, to the floor and to
the roof framing
6.2
Timber frame erection tolerances
Timber frame erection tolerances based on guidance from the Structural Timber Association will generally be acceptable.
Support of prefabricated chimneys

Prefabricated chimneys should be supported by either the:
z masonry cladding, or z the timber frame, including any roof construction supported
by the timber frame.
6.2.5 Fixing the frame

The timber frame shall be suitably fixed to the substructure.
Shotfiring
Where shotfiring:
z into masonry, solid concrete blocks should be specified as z the blocks in beam and block floors should be grouted
BS EN 771 with a minimum crushing strength of 7.3N/mm2 z care should be taken not to spall edges of masonry
and positioned to receive fixings or slabs.
Anchoring
When anchoring the frame:
z the sole plate should be adequately anchored to the z care should be taken to avoid splitting timber plates or
substructure so that the frame can resist both lateral and damaging the substructure.
vertical forces
Chapter 6.2
Figure 7: Sole plate anchor brackets Figure 8: Hold down straps built into masonry cladding
DPC
Fixing to plate
Fixing to stud
Holding-down devices should be durable, as detailed in the design and manufactured from:
z austenitic stainless steel to BS EN 10088-1, z galvanised mild steel with zinc coating to BS EN ISO 1461,
minimum grade 1.4301 minimum coating 940 g/m2 on each side.
Sole plate anchors within the internal envelope should be galvanised mild steel, minimum coating Z275.
6.2.6 Nails and staples

Nails and staples shall be durable and of the correct type to provide adequate mechanical fixing.
Nails for fixing sheathing or timber should be either:
z austenitic stainless steel, or z sherardised.
z galvanised, or
Staples for fixing breather membranes should be:

6.2
z austenitic stainless steel, or z other material of similar strength and corrosion resistance.
6.2.7 Sheathing
Sheathing shall be durable and capable of providing structural resistance to racking.
The following materials are acceptable:
Plywood BS EN 636-2S or BS EN 636-3S
Oriented strand board BS EN 300 type OSB/3 or OSB/4
Moisture-resistant chipboard BS EN 312 type P5 or P7
Medium board BS EN 622-3 type MBH.HLS1 or MBH.HLS2
Impregnated soft board BS EN 622-4 type SB.HLS
Proprietary sheathing materials Technical Requirement R3 and used in accordance with the assessment
Plasterboard may contribute to racking resistance when used in accordance with PD 6693-1. Limitations or exclusions apply to
walls that are not separating walls comprising two or more built-up layers of plasterboard having a minimum thickness of 30mm,
and walls where plasterboard is combined with a wood-based sheathing on the same wall diaphragm.
Chapter 6.2
Also see: Institution of Gas Engineers and Managers (www.igem.org.uk) and

6.2.8 Differential movement ‘Differential Movement in Platform Timber Frame’ (www.structuraltimber.co.uk)
Timber structures shall account for differential movement between the timber frame wall and other
building elements.
As the timber frame dries out, it will shrink and the overall height will reduce. The extent of the differential movement
increases with the number of storeys, and will typically occur between the timber frame and other parts of the
construction, including:
z door and window openings with masonry cladding z staircases and lift shaft enclosures (where they are not
z eaves and verges with masonry cladding timber framed)
z openings for drive-throughs with masonry cladding z the interface of the timber frame with any other
z balconies (including Juliet balconies) construction at each floor level where cladding is fixed
z service entries
to the timber frame.
Where lightweight cladding is fixed to the timber frame, movement across floor zones should be allowed for in the cladding
system and its supporting structure.
Movement joints should be provided to accommodate the expected movement. Joints should be detailed to:
z accommodate the expected amount of shrinkage z provide a weather resistant and durable joint
or expansion safely z be protected by a cover strip where the movement gap/joint
z provide an additional allowance for the residual is expected to be more than 35mm.
thickness of any compressible filler materials after
movement has occurred
Where compressible filler materials are specified, they should be specified based on the anticipated residual gap size after
movement has occurred.
In the absence of project-specific calculations, gaps in accordance with Table 1 should be provided.
Table 1: Gap sizes with masonry cladding to accommodate differential movement

Gap location Opening and closing gaps (mm)
Floor joists
6.2
Solid timber (mm) Engineered I-joist (mm)
Eaves/verge Add 5mm to gap dimension at level below
Sixth floor Specialist calculations to be submitted to NHBC(2) 61
Fifth floor 53
Fourth floor 45
Third floor 45 35
Second floor 35 25
First floor 20 15
Ground floor (1)
5 5
Notes
1 Ground floor or lowest level of timber frame.
2 Calculations, where required, are to be based on BS EN 1995-1-1.
Chapter 6.2
Table 1 is based on the following: Figure 9: Platform timber frame floor zone
z the table allows for a 2mm thickness of compressible stud
material in closing gaps. Check the manufacturer’s bottom rail of panel
product details
sole plate
z timber components are not saturated and have normal
structural decking
moisture contents at the time of construction, eg less than
20% and tight-jointed construction
z the ground floor is concrete. For ground floors of timber
joist
joists, add 15mm for solid timber and 10mm for
engineered timber joists
z timber joist and ring beam/header joist have a maximum
depth of 240mm headbinder
z timber frame floor cross-section is as shown below, with
top rail of panel
maximum 45mm deep timber plates/binders
stud
z single head binder at the eaves. Maximum double
Timber frame construction on which Table 1 is based
sole plates
z outer leaf brickwork with expansion rates no greater than
Figure 10: Window head and sill with masonry cladding
2.5mm per storey
z brickwork up to five storeys, with lightweight cladding
above five storeys
z lightweight cladding – floor level joints must be 15mm for
solid timber joists and 10mm for engineered timber joists. opening
gap
Differential movement should be accommodated by the services

where they:
z are within the timber frame construction/envelope and pass
across floor zones closing
gap
z pass through the external envelope.
Common details
The following sketches consider downward movement of the
6.2
timber frame and upward brick expansion, taken as 2.5mm

per storey of clay masonry. Cavity trays, cavity barriers, open
as built after movement
perpend vents etc are omitted for clarity.
Figure 11: Movement allowance at window sill with Figure 12: Movement allowance at window head with Figure 13: Movement allowance at window head with
masonry cladding masonry cladding masonry cladding
allow for
movement
sill not built
into masonry
allow for
movement
allow for
movement allow for
movement
Chapter 6.2
Figure 14: Lightweight cladding window head Figure 15: Lightweight cladding window sill
no differential movement
no differential movement
Figure 16: Movement allowance at roof to vertical abutment – before movement Figure 17: Movement allowance at roof to vertical abutment – after movement
allow for
movement
75mm min.
timber frame
movement
Figure 18: Timber frame interface with concrete or masonry communal areas – Figure 19: Timber frame interface with concrete or masonry communal areas –
6.2
before movement after movement
transition piece timber frame

movement
(transition piece
removed)
after movement
Eaves and verges

Where a movement gap provided between the top of an exterior cladding of masonry and the eaves or verge soffit exceeds
10mm and is not protected by a purposely designed overhang, the gap should be protected with a compressible filler material or
mesh to prevent the entry of birds, etc. The filler material or mesh should be flexible so as not to inhibit the differential movement
between the exterior cladding of masonry and timber frame. Where a flexible filler is used, it should be sized based on the
anticipated residual gap after movement has occurred.
Chapter 6.2
Figure 20: Movement allowance at roof eaves Figure 21: Movement allowance at roof verge
allow for
movement
allow for
movement
Services Drive through

Figure 22: Movement allowance at service penetrations through masonry cladding Figure 23: Drive through section details
A
service passing B
through wall
allow for
movement A
6.2
Drive through
Figure 24: Drive through Section A-A Figure 25: Drive through Section B-B
timber frame
movement
timber floor
construction
allow for
movement
ceiling
lintel/beam ceiling
drive
Section A-A through
Section B-B
Chapter 6.2
Figure 26: Floor zone movement gap with lightweight cladding
15mm*
movement across
15mm* floor zone
15mm*
vertical batten
Lightweight cladding and masonry plinth

Figure 27: Movement gaps at the junction of lightweight Figure 28: Balcony abutment – Figure 29: Balcony abutment – lightweight cladding
and masonry cladding lightweight cladding
allow for
movement
allow for
allow for movement
movement decking
balcony structure
independent of
timber frame
opening gap
gap
6.2
Figure 30: Balcony abutment – Figure 31: Balcony abutment – masonry cladding Figure 32: Slotted holes in balcony support
masonry cladding brackets
allow for
slotted holes movement
slotted hole joint
Figure 33: Sliding movement joint in Figure 34: Juliette balcony support fixed Figure 35: Flat roof to masonry
balcony support bracket to masonry cladding abutment movement detail
allow for movement

and maintain
min. 75mm cover
after
movement
fix to masonry
cladding subject
to engineer’s
design
sliding joint
Chapter 6.2
6.2.9 Fire resistance

Timber walls and panels shall control and resist the spread of fire and smoke. Issues to be taken into
account include:
a) cavity barriers and fire-stopping c) fire resistance of the wall or panel.
b) services
All building elements should have adequate fire resistance. Materials in accordance with Building Regulations are acceptable;
other materials should be assessed in accordance with Technical Requirement R3.
For guidance on the prevention of fire during construction refer to ‘Fire Prevention on Construction Sites’ jointly published by
the Construction Federation and the Fire Protection Association (www.thefpa.co.uk), and guidance from the Structural Timber
Association (www.structuraltimber.co.uk) under the ‘Site Safety Strategy’, including the ‘16 Steps to Fire Safety’ and the
‘Design Guide to Separating Distances’.
Cavity barriers and fire-stopping

The installation, position and materials for cavity barriers and fire-stopping should be in accordance with the relevant Building
Regulations and the design.
Horizontal and vertical cavity barriers should be protected by DPCs arranged to shed moisture away from the sheathing.
Horizontal cavity barriers in masonry cladding, except under eaves, should be protected with:
z DPC tray with a 100mm minimum upstand, or z a polyethylene-encased cavity barrier with a 100mm
minimum upstand.
Horizontal cavity barriers in lightweight cladding should be protected by cavity trays, DPCs or flashings as appropriate.
Figure 36: Fire-stopping and compartmentation at compartment Figure 37: Horizontal cavity barrier protected Figure 38: Vertical cavity barrier protected
wall/roof junction with DPC with DPC
breather membrane
lapped over
fire-stopping DPC tray
between batten
and above underlay
6.2
fire-stopping
below underlay
DPC
cavity closed
at eaves
DPC
fire-stopping within boxed eaves
Services
Only the services shown in the design should be installed in separating walls and:
z service outlets should not impair the fire resistance of floors z service mains should not pass through separating
and walls wall cavities.
Notching or drilling of structural timber members should be carried out as detailed in the design. If these details are not available,
the designer should be consulted before such operations are begun.
In Scotland, services are not permitted within a timber framed separating wall.
Fire resistance of the wall or panel

Timber frame walls should have adequate fire resistance in accordance with the relevant Building Regulations.
Timber frame systems should be supported with representative test evidence to appropriate standards such as BS 476:21, or BS
EN 1365-1 for load-bearing walls and BS EN 1365-2 for floors. Supporting evidence should be relevant to the materials, systems
and details proposed.
Chapter 6.2
6.2.10 Protection from moisture Also see: Chapter 6.1 and 6.9
Timber structures and panels shall be adequately protected from the effects of moisture. Issues to be taken
in to account include:
a) cavity construction c) DPCs and cavity trays.
b) drainage and ventilation
Cavity construction
A drained and vented cavity should be provided to reduce the risk of rain penetrating the frame. Cavity widths, measured
between the cladding and sheathing, should be in accordance with Table 2.
Table 2: Cavity widths

Cladding Minimum cavity width
Masonry 50mm nominal
Render on backed lathing 25mm nominal
Vertical tile hanging (1) where a breather membrane Dependant on batten support layout and spacing(1)
is provided and fixed to the sheathing
Other cladding(1) 15mm
Notes
1 See Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and cladding’.
In areas of very severe exposure to wind driven rain, wall construction should include a 50mm cavity between the sheathing and
the cladding and:
z a high performance breather membrane (see Clause z masonry cladding which is rendered or clad with an
6.2.13), or impervious material.
Cavities should be:

z vented to allow some limited, but not necessarily through, z kept clean, free of obstructions and capable of
movement of air draining freely.
Masonry cladding should be constructed in accordance with Chapter 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’. Lightweight render cladding
6.2
should be constructed in accordance with Chapter 6.11 ‘Render’. Vertical tile hanging and slating should be constructed
in accordance with Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and cladding’. Proprietary cladding should be fixed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations and Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and cladding’.
External wall cavities should not contain electricity cables other than meter tails.
Drainage and Ventilation

Drainage and ventilation should be provided to the cavity between the timber frame wall and external cladding.
Cavities between masonry cladding (including brickwork, rendered blockwork and stone) and timber frame walls should be
vented. Cavity vents should be:
z equivalent to open brick perpend joints every 1.2m z located to drain moisture from the cavity.
z located to prevent the ingress of rain
Proprietary perpend ventilators should be used. Perpend ventilators should be installed to the base of external wall cavities
below the lowest timber sole plate and above finished ground level; if continuous cavity trays are installed at sole plate level,
perpend ventilators should be installed above and below the tray to provide drainage and ventilation to all areas of the timber
frame. Where wall areas are divided by horizontal cavity barriers and/or cavity trays, each individual cavity should be vented.
Weepholes should be provided at cavity trays over openings.
Cavities between lightweight external cladding and timber frame walls should be vented or ventilated depending on cladding
type. Cavity vents should be:
z installed to promote through ventilation where required z located to drain moisture from the cavity.
z protected to prevent the ingress of rain, insects, birds,
and vermin
Drainage and ventilation openings should be provided to the base of external lightweight cladding at/near ground level, above
horizontal cavity barriers and flashings, and above openings (such as windows and doors).
Horizontal battens used to support lightweight external cladding should be spaced off the frame using vertical counter battens to
provide a path for drainage and ventilation. Battens or carrier rail systems supporting lightweight cladding should be located over
and fixed to studs. Vertical battens and carrier rail systems should have joints at floor zones to accommodate differential movement.
Chapter 6.2
DPCs and Cavity Trays

DPCs should be:
z fitted at openings to prevent rain penetration z installed over horizontal timber cavity barriers
z installed below the sole plates of ground floor walls and (except under eaves and verge) and lapped behind
internal partitions the breather membrane by at least 100mm.
z lapped with the DPM and AVCL to enhance air tightness at
sole plate level
Cavity trays should:

z be installed over openings, at abutments, and where z be lapped behind the breather membrane by at least
specified at sole plate level 100mm to deflect moisture away from the sheathing
z have weepholes to deflect moisture out of the cavity z be marked to BS EN 14909 and have satisfactory
over openings, or perpend ventilators where cavity trays assessment by an appropriate independent technical
are continuous approvals authority accepted by NHBC.
Clause 6.1.17 contains further guidance on the installation of cavity trays in masonry cladding.
In Northern Ireland, Scotland and the Isle of Man, and in areas of severe or very severe exposure to driving rain, masonry should
form a rebate at the reveals of openings to avoid a straight through joint where the frame abuts the masonry.
Figure 39: Window head detail with cavity tray and weepholes Figure 40: Rebate at window reveal in areas of severe
or very severe exposure
rain
sealant
DPC
weepholes drain DPC

6.2
any moisture
sealant to resist
driving rain
Cavities should:
z extend below DPC to allow drainage z be suitably drained to prevent water build-up.
z be kept clear and be vented
The lowest timber should be a minimum of 150mm above finished ground level. This may be reduced to 75mm in situations
where the site is not subject to a high water table or where the cavity will not have standing water.
Figure 41: Lowest timber at least 150mm above external Figure 42: Lowest timber at least 75mm above external ground level
ground level
perpend vents
DPC turned up
to lap with VCL
lowest
timber seal between
150mm min. wall and floor lowest timber
above barriers or 75mm min.
ground between skirting above ground level 225
level board and floor mm
drainage holes min.
perpend vents
drainage next to This detail is only acceptable in
masonry cladding situations where the site is not subject
to a high water table or where the
cavity will not have standing water
Chapter 6.2
6.2.11 Timber preservation

Timber and timber products shall either have adequate natural durability or be treated with preservative to
provide resistance against fungal decay and insect attack.
The following should have adequate natural durability or be preservative treated in accordance with Chapter 3.3 ‘Timber
preservation (natural solid timber)’:
z timber framing members including studs, rails, z external timber cladding
sole plates, etc z engineered timber I-section or metal-web studs.
6.2.12 Air and vapour control layers

Air and vapour control layers shall be installed correctly and restrict the passage of air and water vapour
from within the home into the timber frame.
A high resistance air and vapour control layer should be provided, unless a condensation risk analysis shows that it is not
necessary and the air and vapour control function is being provided by another solution compliant with NHBC Technical
Requirements. An analysis in accordance with BS EN ISO 13788 (Glaser method), using the following boundary conditions will
generally be acceptable:
z >60% internal relative humidity z -2°C external air temperature.
z 21°C internal air temperature
Air and vapour control layers should be:

z installed once framing timbers have a moisture content of z placed to completely cover the external framed wall area,
less than 20% including rails, studs, lintels, and sills
z installed once the building is weathertight z lapped with the DPC/DPM and at junctions to improve
z minimum 500 gauge (125 micron) polyethylene sheet, air tightness
vapour control plasterboard or a product assessed in z lapped into reveals and sealed to window and door frames
accordance with Technical Requirement R3 z sealed around service penetrations
z adequately fixed to the warm side of the insulation z made good where damage has occurred.
and frame
6.2
z fixed at 250mm centres to the top and bottom of the
frame and at laps and around openings, vapour control
plasterboard should be fixed in accordance with
Clause 9.2.4
Joints in the air and vapour control layer:

z should have 100mm minimum laps z may be sealed with adhesive tape for enhanced air
z should be located on studs, rails, or noggings and be tightness (but joints should still occur over studs, rails, or
mechanically fixed noggings and be mechanically fixed).
Where vapour control plasterboard is used, joints should be:

z positioned on studs, rails or noggings z cut with care to avoid displacing the vapour control material.
z filled, taped and finished
Where floor zone air tightness membranes are specified for enhanced air tightness, they should be of a breathable material with
a vapour resistance less than 0.6MNs/g (0.12 Sd) when tested in accordance with BS EN ISO 12572 using the set of conditions
C and using five test specimens.
Chapter 6.2
6.2.13 Breather membranes

Breather membranes shall be correctly installed to protect the sheathing and frame from moisture, and
allow water vapour from within the frame to pass into the cavity.
Breather membranes should be:
z vapour resistant to less than 0.6MNs/g (0.12 Sd) when z self extinguishing
tested in accordance with BS EN ISO 12572 using the set z fixed so that vertical joints are staggered where possible,
of conditions C and using five test specimens and at regular intervals, to prevent damage by wind
z at least Class W2 to BS EN 13859-2 with no water leakage z lapped so that each joint is protected and moisture drains
during testing. In areas of very severe exposure (see outwards and downwards
Clause 6.1.6 for classification of exposure zones) or where z lapped so that upper layers are over lower layers to ensure
liquid water penetration of the cladding is anticipated, rain runs away from the sheathing
for example open-jointed cladding, Class W1 should z lapped so that water is shed away from the lowest timber
be used. When open-jointed claddings are used or the
z lapped with a minimum 100mm overlap on horizontal joints
membrane is likely to be left exposed during construction
and 150mm on vertical joints
for a duration longer than normally to be expected (also
z fixed at a maximum spacing of 600mm horizontally and
see the membrane manufacturers recommendations on
300mm vertically
exposure times), performance should be based on artificial
aged behaviour in accordance with BS EN 13859-2. Where z fixed at a maximum spacing of 150mm around openings
a vented and ventilated cavity with full rainscreen and no z marked with stud positions for wall tie or cladding fixing
gaps, for example masonry or rendered board claddings z applied using fixings that are in accordance with
are used, performance should be based on artificial aged this chapter
behaviour in accordance with BS EN 13111 z repaired or replaced before proceeding with the cladding,
z capable of resisting water penetration if damaged.
z durable and adequately strong when wet to resist
site damage
Figure 43: Breather membrane laps Figure 44: Breather membrane lapped over sole plate
150mm
6.2
100mm
membrane detailed
to protect the sole plate
staggered joints
membrane
protects lowest
timber
6.2.14 Wall ties and fixings

Wall ties and fixings shall adequately connect the cladding to the timber frame.
Wall ties and their fixings should be:
z compliant with BS 845-1 z spaced at a maximum of 600mm horizontally
z in accordance with the design and 450mm vertically
z capable of accommodating the anticipated z spaced at jambs of openings and at movement joints at
differential movement a maximum of 300mm vertically and within 225mm of the
z of the type specified in the design masonry reveal or movement joint; additional studs may
z of austenitic stainless steel
be needed
z spaced within 225mm of the top of the wall, including
z fixed to the studs and not the sheathing using the fixings
supplied by the wall tie manufacturer at gables
z inclined away from the sheathing so that the slope is
z kept clean and free from mortar droppings
maintained following differential movement.
Chapter 6.2
6.2.15 Insulation Also see: BRE Report ‘Thermal insulation: avoiding risks’
Insulation shall be correctly installed and provide suitable performance.

Insulation should be: Figure 45: Insulation between external wall studs
z breathable, eg mineral wool (rock or glass), or

z assessed in accordance with Technical Requirement R3 for
use in timber frame wall panels.
Insulation should generally be placed within the stud void and

cover the whole wall area between studs. No gaps should
be left:
z at corners
z at junctions with partitions
z against studs, rails or noggings
z behind services and pattresss panels.
Water and heating services within walls should be on the warm side of the insulation.
Where insulation is to be installed to the external/cavity face of the frame:
z it should be assessed in accordance with Technical z wall ties should transfer loads directly to the timber frame
Requirement R3 as an integral part of the wall system studs and not via the insulation
z a clear cavity should be provided, based on the dimensions z the installation of lightweight cladding systems should be
set out in Table 2 in Clause 6.2.10, between the outer face designed by a structural engineer to ensure adequate load
of the insulation and the external cladding transfer to the structural frame
z a breather membrane should be installed to protect the z cavity barriers should be installed to fully close the
timber frame wall and sheathing. A secondary breather cavity, ensuring their performance is unlikely to be made
membrane to protect the external insulation may be ineffective by failure of the insulation.
necessary depending on insulation manufacturer’s
installation instructions and independent technical approval
6.2
z stud locator marks should be transferred onto the outer
face of insulation/external breather membrane (dependant
on wall tie type and order of works)
Where insulation, either in the form of insulated plasterboard or a separate continuous layer, is to be installed to the inside face
of the frame, the fire resistance of the wall should be in accordance with Clause 6.2.9 with appropriate supporting evidence.

Figure 1 Timber frame wall panel 6.2.4 2
Figure 2 Sole plate foundation overhang 6.2.4 3
Figure 3 Sole plate foundation set back 6.2.4 3
Figure 4 Permanent structural packing under each stud 6.2.4 3
Figure 5 Bedding of sole plate on mortar 6.2.4 4
Figure 6 Double sole plate sandwich 6.2.4 4
Figure 7 Sole plate anchor brackets 6.2.5 5
Figure 8 Hold down straps built into masonry cladding 6.2.5 5
Figure 9 Platform timber frame floor zone 6.2.8 7
Figure 10 Window head and sill with masonry cladding 6.2.8 7
Figure 11 Movement allowance at window sill with masonry cladding 6.2.8 7
Figure 12 Movement allowance at window head with masonry cladding 6.2.8 7
Figure 13 Movement allowance at window head with masonry cladding 6.2.8 7
Figure 14 Lightweight cladding window head 6.2.8 8
Figure 15 Lightweight cladding window sill 6.2.8 8
Chapter 6.2
Figure 16 Movement allowance at roof to vertical abutment – before movement 6.2.8 8

Figure 17 Movement allowance at roof to vertical abutment – after movement 6.2.8 8
Figure 18 Timber frame interface with concrete or masonry communal areas – before movement 6.2.8 8
Figure 19 Timber frame interface with concrete or masonry communal areas –after movement 6.2.8 8
Figure 20 Movement allowance at roof eaves 6.2.8 9
Figure 21 Movement allowance at roof verge 6.2.8 9
Figure 22 Movement allowance at service penetrations through masonry cladding 6.2.8 9
Figure 23 Drive through section details 6.2.8 9
Figure 24 Drive through Section A-A 6.2.8 9
Figure 25 Drive through Section B-B 6.2.8 9
Figure 26 Floor zone movement gap with lightweight cladding 6.2.8 10
Figure 27 Movement gaps at the junction of lightweight and masonry cladding 6.2.8 10
Figure 28 Balcony abutment – lightweight cladding 6.2.8 10
Figure 29 Balcony abutment – lightweight cladding 6.2.8 10
Figure 30 Balcony abutment – masonry cladding 6.2.8 10
Figure 31 Balcony abutment – masonry cladding 6.2.8 10
Figure 32 Slotted holes in balcony support brackets 6.2.8 10
Figure 33 Sliding movement joint in balcony support bracket 6.2.8 10
Figure 34 Juliette balcony support fixed to masonry cladding 6.2.8 10
Figure 35 Flat roof to masonry abutment movement detail 6.2.8 10
Figure 36 Fire-stopping and compartmentation at compartment wall/roof junction 6.2.9 11
Figure 37 Horizontal cavity barrier protected with DPC 6.2.9 11
Figure 38 Vertical cavity barrier protected with DPC 6.2.9 11
Figure 39 Window head detail with cavity tray and weepholes 6.2.10 13
Figure 40 Rebate at window reveal in areas of severe or very severe exposure 6.2.10 13
Figure 41 Lowest timber at least 150mm above external ground level 6.2.10 13
6.2
Figure 42 Lowest timber at least 75mm above external ground level 6.2.10 13
Figure 43 Breather membrane laps 6.2.13 15
Figure 44 Breather membrane lapped over sole plate 6.2.13 15
Figure 45 Insulation between external wall studs 6.2.15 16
Chapter
6.3
Internal walls
This chapter gives guidance on meeting the
Technical Requirements for internal walls, including:
z separating and compartment walls
z internal partition walls.
6.3.1 Compliance 01
6.3.3 Supporting load-bearing
internal walls 01
6.3.4 Masonry walls 01
6.3.5 Load-bearing timber walls 04
6.3.7 Sound insulation 06
6.3.8 Partitions: internal non load-bearing 08
6.3.9 Construction of timber partitions 08
6.3.10 Construction of steel
framed partitions 09
6.3.11 Construction of proprietary systems 10
6.3.12 Plasterboard 10
6.3.13 Damp proof courses 10
6.3.14 Components 11
1 Internal walls I 2024
Chapter 6.3
Internal walls shall comply with the Technical Requirements.

Internal walls, including separating, compartment and partition walls, which comply with the guidance in this chapter will
generally be acceptable.

and include the following information:
z wall layout, with all dimensions shown z details of junctions between a separating or compartment
z position and size of openings and lintels wall and a pitched or flat roof
z details of junctions, indicating fire-stopping where applicable z details of pipes and cables where they penetrate walls,
z details of wall constructions and materials, including fire-resisting walls
ties and restraints z manufacturer’s recommendations for assembly and fixing of
propriety components.
6.3.3 Supporting load-bearing internal walls

Loadbearing internal walls shall be adequately supported by foundations.
Load-bearing internal walls should have:
z a foundation, or z a means of support that transfers loads safely to a foundation.
Foundations should be in accordance with Part 4 of these Standards, including, where applicable, Chapter 4.3 ‘Strip and trench
fill foundations’ and Chapter 4.4 ‘Raft, pile, beam and pier foundations’.
6.3.4 Masonry walls Also see: Chapters 6.1, 6.4, 6.8 and 9.2
6.3
Internal masonry walls shall be designed to support and transfer loads to foundations safely and without
undue movement. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) structural elements e) lateral restraint
b) mortar mix and jointing f) masonry separating walls
c) workmanship g) lintels and beams.
d) bonding and tying
Structural elements
Structural design of masonry walls should be in accordance with BS EN 1996-1-1.
Bricks and blocks should be selected in accordance with their intended use and as recommended in Table 1.
Table 1: Bricks and blocks in buildings up to three storeys high
Height of wall(1) Unit Minimum compressive strength(2)
One or two storey Blocks 2.9 N/mm2
Bricks 9.0 N/mm2
Lowest storey of a three storey wall, or Blocks 7.3 N/mm2
where individual storeys exceed 2.7m Bricks 13.0 N/mm2
Upper storeys of a three storey wall Blocks 2.9 N/mm2
Bricks 9.0 N/mm2
Notes
1. The compressive strengths shown are applicable where the floor to ceiling distance is not greater than 2.7m.
2. The compressive strengths shown are applicable where the roof is of timber construction.
Where buildings are more than three storeys high, masonry should be designed in accordance with Technical Requirement R5
and the block strength specified in the design.
2024 I Internal walls 2
Chapter 6.3
Precast concrete blocks

Concrete blocks should comply with BS EN 771. The maximum load-bearing capacity of the wall should not exceed the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
Flue blocks should be in accordance with Chapter 6.8 ‘Fireplaces, chimneys and flues’.
Bricks
Bricks should comply with the relevant British Standards:
Clay bricks BS EN 771-1
Calcium silicate bricks BS EN 771-2
Concrete bricks BS EN 771-3
When used in a separating wall, masonry should:

z be used in accordance with the design z meet the structural, fire and acoustic requirements of the
Building Regulations.
Mortar mix and jointing

Mortar should:
z be the correct mix and used within two hours, unless it is z not be re-tempered if it has started to set
retarded mortar z include sulfate-resisting cement where required.
Admixtures, retarded mortars and premixed mortars should be:

z compatible with masonry and other components z used in accordance with Clause 6.1.14 ‘Mortar’ and the
Air-entraining agents:
z can help reduce frost damage but cannot be used z should be used in accordance with Clause 6.1.14 ‘Mortar’
as anti-freeze and the manufacturer’s recommendations.
z should be carefully measured for each batch
Bricks and blocks should be laid on a full bed of mortar, with perpend joints solidly filled.
6.3
Where walls are to be finished with wet plaster, joints should be raked out to a shallow depth to provide a key, unless the units
have suitable texture or metal lathing is used, to ensure adequate bond strength is achieved. For dry lining, mortar joints should
be struck off flush. For further guidance see Clause 9.2.3 ‘Plastering’.
Workmanship
Internal masonry walls and associated works should be: Figure 1: Square and plumb walls
z constructed in lifts/stages to prevent the distortion of wall

panels during construction
z accurately set out
z reasonably plane and true
z plumb, with courses level.
Bonding and tying

Internal masonry walls should:
z maintain a regular bonding pattern z be fully bonded or tied, either with a tooth at alternate
z not include bricks or blocks of different types in the courses, or an expanded metal strip or wall tie at a
same wall, to avoid cracking maximum vertical spacing of 300mm.
Joist filling should be brick or blockwork, without excessive mortar joints.

Chapter 6.3
Figure 2: Bonded connection Figure 3: Tied connection Figure 4: Incorrect use of materials
bonded connection tied connection where blocks different masonry types
are of a different type used to adjust coursing
incorrect use of different

masonry types
Lateral restraint
Load-bearing masonry walls, including separating walls, should be provided with lateral restraint at:
z each floor level z ceiling level below a roof.
Restraint straps should be provided to separating walls on each level, at a maximum of 2m centres, when the floor:
z is not on, or near, the same level z does not provide adequate restraint.
Lateral restraint should be provided in accordance with Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete upper floors’.
Timber floors
Adequate restraint can be provided by timber floors where joists have a minimum 90mm bearing. Alternatively, restraint should
be provided by:
z restraint straps with a minimum 30mm x 5mm z restraint type joist hangers to BS EN 845-1 with a
cross-section, or performance equivalent to restraint straps, or
z proprietary straps in accordance with Chapter 6.4.
Concrete floors Figure 5: Restraint straps to concrete floors
Adequate restraint can be provided by concrete floors that
6.3
have a minimum 90mm bearing on to the wall. Alternatively, 450mm min.
restraint should be provided by: restraint straps

at 2m centres
z restraint straps that are a minimum of 450mm long with to each floor
the end turned down between a joint in the concrete floor 450mm min.
or suitably fixed with screws.
Masonry separating walls

Both leaves of a masonry cavity separating wall should be tied together to provide structural stability. The type of tie and spacing
should limit the sound transmission across the cavity in accordance with Building Regulations.
Lintels and beams

Lintels and beams should be specified according to loads and spans:
z in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, and Figure 6: Lintel positioning
z designed by an engineer in accordance with reinforced concrete

lintel right way up
Technical Requirement R5.
For masonry construction:

lintel bearing on
z concrete and steel lintels are suitable full masonry unit
z timber lintels should not be used

z lintels should extend beyond the end of each opening
in accordance with Table 2.
Chapter 6.3
Table 2: Lintel bearings

Span (m) Minimum length of bearing (mm)
Up to 1.2 100(1)
Over 1.2 150
Note
1. Minimum bearing lengths should be in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
Lintels and beams should:

z have padstones where required z not have soft or non-durable packing
z be the correct way up z have appropriate fire resistance in accordance with
z bear on a full masonry unit and be level and bedded on a Building Regulations.
solid bed of suitable mortar
6.3.5 Load-bearing timber walls Also see: Chapter 2.1, 6.2 and 9.2
Internal load-bearing timber walls shall be designed to support and transfer loads to foundations safely and
without undue movement. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) structural elements c) timber quality.
b) timber separating walls
Structural elements
Structural design of load-bearing timber walls should be in accordance with BS EN 1995-1-1.
When constructing structural elements: Figure 7: Load-bearing timber wall
continuous
z the underside of the lowest sole plate should be positioned at head binder
or above internal finished floor level, see Figure 8
z individual studs, rails and head binders should be
38mm x 75mm minimum, although larger sizes may be
required to achieve an adequate level of fire resistance cripple studs
support
z studs should be spaced at a maximum of 600mm centres
6.3
load-bearing lintels
z mid height noggings should be installed when required for
additional stiffness
z lintels and cripple studs should be provided to each opening,
DPC
except when the stud spacing is unaffected
z multiple studs should be included to support multiple joists,
beams, girder trusses and other point loads, unless otherwise
specified by the designer Figure 8: Ground floor - sole plate position
z where a head binder is not provided, joists, roof trusses and

other similar loads should bear directly over studs
z framing joints should be secured with a minimum of two nails
per joint
z where internal walls are made up from panels, structural
continuity should be maintained, eg by the use of a continuous
head binder.
Twin leaf timber separating walls

The type and spacing of wall straps should limit sound transmission across the cavity in accordance with Building Regulations.
Wall straps should:
z be specified in accordance with the system z be fixed below ceiling level
designer’s recommendations z be spaced a minimum of 1.2m horizontally.
z have a maximum cross-section of 40mm x 3mm
Chapter 6.3
Timber Quality
Timber should be of the appropriate grade, moisture content and size to support the imposed loads.
Structural timber components should be of a suitable strength class, as specified by the designer to BS EN 338. Solid structural
timber should be:
z machine graded to BS EN 14081, or visually graded to BS z dry graded
4978 for softwoods or BS 5756 for hardwoods z marked in accordance with BS EN 14081.
z assigned a strength class based on BS EN 1912 when
visually graded
Further guidance on strength classes for certain timber species can be found in PD 6693.
Engineered wood products such as I-section or metal-web studs should be assessed in accordance with Technical
Requirement R3.
Timber should have a maximum moisture content of 20% at the time of dry lining to minimise shrinkage.
6.3.6 Fire resistance Also see: Chapter 6.2, 8.0 and 9.2
Internal walls shall have adequate resistance to the spread of fire. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) fire resistance c) services
b) typical construction d) materials.
The guidance below does not apply to Scotland, and reference should be made to the Technical Handbooks.
Fire resistance
Internal walls should provide fire resistance in accordance with Building Regulations.
Typical construction
Internal walls of hollow or cavity construction (fire-resisting or otherwise) should have cavity barriers installed at:
z the perimeter z junctions with fire-resisting floors and walls.
6.3
Fire-resisting walls should be fire stopped or constructed to resist fire spread at:
z their perimeter z openings for doors and pipes, etc.
z junctions with other fire-resisting walls, floors and roofs
Where fire-resisting walls are of:

z masonry construction with a cavity, they should be closed z framed construction, they should have cavity barriers at
at the top junctions with floors and ceilings.
At junctions between a separating or compartment wall and a pitched roof or flat roof:
z adequate precautions should be provided to prevent z soft fire-stopping material should be installed above and
fire spread below the roofing underlay to allow for movement in roof
z the separating wall should stop approximately 25mm below timbers to prevent ‘hogging’ of the tiles.
the top of adjacent roof trusses
Fire-stopping should be provided within the boxed eaves Figure 9: Junction of compartment wall and roof
and be:
z carefully cut to shape to seal the boxed eaves fully fire-stopping
between batten
z fixed in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. and above underlay
The wall dividing an integral, or attached, garage and any fire-stopping

below underlay
floor above should be designed to act together to provide
adequate resistance to fire spread, in accordance with the
Building Regulations. Where the garage has either no ceiling cavity closed
at eaves
or there is no floor in the space above, vertical fire separation
may be required.
fire-stopping within boxed eaves
For timber constructions, fire-stopping material should be

compressible to accommodate timber shrinkage without
affecting fire-stopping.
Chapter 6.3
Services
Where services such as pipes, cables and ducting pass through fire-resisting walls, penetrations should be fire-stopped.
Fire-stopping should be:
z in accordance with Building Regulations and the z completed neatly.
design information
Materials
The selected fire-stopping material should be appropriate for the application. Suitable fire-stopping materials include:
z rock fibre quilt z intumescent mastic or preformed strip
z cement mortar z proprietary sealing systems assessed in accordance with
z gypsum plaster Technical Requirement R3.
6.3.7 Sound insulation Also see: BS 8000-8
Walls shall be insulated with materials of suitable thickness and density to provide adequate resistance to
the transmission of sound. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) sound-resisting construction b) rooms which contain a WC.
Sound-resisting construction
Masonry separating walls
In England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland, separating walls may be registered and built in accordance with Robust
Details ‘Resistance to the passage of sound’ as an alternative to pre-completion sound testing.
To maintain sound insulation:
z the correct blocks should be used z close the junction between separating and external cavity
z fully fill joints, mortar beds and perpends walls with flexible cavity stops
z use only approved wall ties z care should be taken when specifying dry lining, as the
z space wall ties 900mm minimum horizontally and 450mm thickness of plasterboard layers, and the methods of sealing
and fixing, can affect the transmission of sound
6.3
minimum vertically
z avoid any reduction in the thickness of masonry z holes, voids and hairline cracks should be avoided or made
z ensure spaces around joists are fully filled with masonry

good, as they can significantly reduce the effectiveness of a
and pointed with sealant around the joist sound-insulating wall.
In masonry separating cavity walls, wall ties should be type A Figure 10: Separating wall junction
in accordance with Building Regulations. separating wall taken through
and tied to inner leaf
Solid separating walls can be taken through the inner leaf of
an external cavity wall and tied or bonded in accordance with
either Building Regulations or Robust Details guidance.
Chases can reduce the sound insulation value of a wall
and should:
z be cut only where specified in the design
z not be cut using impact power tools where there is a risk
of damage dense block lightweight block
z not exceed 1/6 of the thickness of the single leaf separating wall inner leaf
where horizontal
z not exceed 1/3 the thickness of the single leaf Figure 11: Vertical and horizontal chases
where vertical
z not be chased where hollow blocks are used, unless
specifically permitted by the manufacturer
z be fully filled with mortar
horizontal chase
z be staggered on each side of the wall to avoid them being no deeper than
1/6 block thickness
back to back.
vertical chase
no deeper than
1/3 block thickness
Chapter 6.3
Separating walls of framed construction

Separating walls of framed construction should not have gaps in the:
z mineral wool quilt z fire-stopping.
z plasterboard layers
Flanking walls
The construction of the flanking wall and the position of openings should comply with Building Regulations.
Rooms containing a WC
The construction should comply with Building Regulations, including the recommended sound reduction between rooms that
include a WC and adjacent:
z living rooms z studies
z dining rooms z bedrooms, except where the WC is ensuite.
Studwork Figure 12: Acoustic partition

To achieve the required level of sound reduction, 75mm timber
studwork or 45mm steel framing should be constructed
with either:
z two layers of 12.5mm plasterboard (each sheet 10 kg/m2 one layer
of 12.5mm
min) on each side, with joints staggered and filled plasterboard
on each side
z one layer of 12.5mm plasterboard (each sheet 10Kg/ and 25mm
wool quilt
m2 min) on each side and 25mm unfaced mineral wool
(10Kg/m3 min) between the studs, with all joints
well sealed.
Other forms of studwork construction may be acceptable where in accordance with the guidance in supporting documents to the
Building Regulations or where independent evidence of performance is available.
6.3
Blockwork partitions
Masonry partitions provide adequate sound insulation where:
z blocks have a minimum density of 600kg/m3 and are z blocks are tied at every course to adjoining walls, with joints
finished on both sides with 13mm of plaster or 12.5mm fully filled.
plasterboard, and
Further guidance can be found in the relevant Building Regulations.
Proprietary partitions
Independent test evidence of the system’s performance is required in accordance with Technical Requirement R3. Criteria for
testing is not provided in R3.
Sound insulation of soil pipes in floor voids Figure 13: Vertical S&VP boxing
and SVPs
All sections of soil and vent pipes including those in bathrooms
or ground floor stub stacks, should be fully soundproofed. timber framing
Where soil and vent pipes run horizontally through a floor void,
line the enclosure and
above or below a habitable room they should be: wrap the pipe with 25mm
unfaced mineral wool
z wrapped in at least 25mm of unfaced mineral wool (min. density of 10kg/m3)
(10kg/m3 min)
z adequately supported to avoid contact with the floor the material of the enclosure
should have a mass of
decking or ceiling. 15kg/m2
Sound insulation should be provided to soil pipes passing
through homes by:
z an encased boxing, using material (15kg/m²) and
z wrapping the pipe with a minimum 25mm of unfaced
mineral wool (10kg/m³ min). The insulation should be
continued through the thickness of each
sound-insulating floor.
Chapter 6.3
Soil and vent pipes which hold a satisfactory assessment by an appropriate independent technical approvals authority
acceptable to NHBC, maybe acceptable where the requirements of the Building Regulations are achieved.
6.3.8 Partitions: internal non load-bearing

Non load-bearing partitions shall have adequate strength and support.
The following constructions are acceptable:
z masonry partitions z steel partitions using studs, and head and base rails, from a
z timber partitions using 63mm x 38mm studs, rails and head minimum section of 43mm x 32mm x 0.45mm
binders with compatible spacing and plasterboard thickness z proprietary partitions in accordance with
Walls and partitions should:
z be appropriately supported z be used in accordance with manufacturers guidance.
z not be supported by a floating floor which incorporates
a compressible layer, unless the material is specifically
manufactured for that purpose
Masonry partitions should be supported on:
z foundations z concrete floors
z other masonry partitions or walls z steel or concrete beams, which may require padstones.
Masonry partitions should not be supported by timber joists or beams.

Where stud partitions or proprietary plasterboard partitions are supported by a timber floor, extra noggings or joists should be
specified, unless it can be shown that the deck can transfer the load without undue movement.
6.3.9 Construction of timber partitions Also see: Chapter 9.2
Construction of timber stud internal walls shall ensure adequate stability, including:
6.3
a) setting out and workmanship c) fixing.
b) size of timber members
Setting out and workmanship

Timber partitions should be: Figure 14: Setting out square and plumb
z placed so the lowest timber is positioned at or above the

internal finished floor level, see Figure 8
z correctly positioned, square and plumb
z have studwork spaced at centres to suit the
plasterboard thickness
z have extra studs at openings, as required.
Size of timber members

Timber partitions should be constructed in accordance with the design information. Unless designed otherwise, the minimum
specification for all partitions should be in accordance with Table 3.
Table 3: Timber sizes for partition walls

Component Size
Sole plate, rails, head binders 63mm x 38mm
Studs 63mm x 38mm at maximum 600mm centres
Blocking/nogging for support of plasterboard 43mm x 38mm
Blocking/nogging for other purposes 63mm x 38mm
Framing joints should be secured with two nails per joint.

Chapter 6.3
Fixing
Partitions should: Figure 15: Deflection head
z be firmly fixed to each other and to abutting walls;

noggings or extra studs should be used where necessary
z be fixed to the structure where possible
z be fixed to noggings when parallel to structural elements
z not be over wedged against floor joists or roof trusses.
Where partitions are non load-bearing, allowance should

be made for the floor joists, ceiling joists or roof trusses to
deflect as necessary, so that the partition does not become
load-bearing.
Figure 16: Partition abutment Figure 17: Wall head fixing to joist Figure 18: Wall head fixing to nogging
partition parallel to joist – fixing to nogging

partition at right angles to joist – fixing to joist
extra stud
Figure 19: Partition fixing to joist Figure 20: Partition fixing to nogging Figure 21: Additional nogging support
6.3
nogging
supports
radiator
partition parallel to joist – fixing to nogging

partition at right angles to joist – fixing to joist
Noggings should be provided to support fittings, such as radiators, wall mounted boilers, sanitary fittings and kitchen units, etc.
6.3.10 Construction of steel framed partitions

Non load-bearing steel framed walls shall be suitably constructed.
Noggings or straps should be provided as required to support fittings, such as radiators, wall-mounted boilers, sanitary fittings,
kitchen units, etc. Non load-bearing partitions should not be wedged against floor joists, ceiling joists or roof trusses.
Allowance should be made for the floor joists, ceiling joists or roof trusses to deflect so that the partition does not become
load-bearing. They should be:
z constructed in accordance with manufacturers requirements z fixed to the floor at the head, to each other and to
and the design abutting walls
z correctly positioned, square and plumb z provided with extra studs at openings where required
z supported on a structural floor, but not a floating floor that z finished in accordance with Chapter 9.2
incorporates a compressible layer, unless specifically ‘Wall and ceiling finishes’.
designed for that purpose
Chapter 6.3
Figure 22: Deflection head Figure 23: Partitioning abutment
channel fixed to
structure over
head rail should not be

connected to top rack extra stud to
support
partition
6.3.11 Construction of proprietary systems

Proprietary partition systems shall be suitable for their intended purpose and erected in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Proprietary partitions should be assessed in accordance with Technical Requirement R3, and:
z constructed and specified according to the manufacturer’s z correctly positioned, square and plumb.
recommendations, including construction sequence
Timber or other additional fixings should be provided for radiators, electrical outlets, switches etc.
6.3.12 Plasterboard Also see: Chapter 9.2
Plasterboard shall be of a suitable thickness for its intended use.

Dry lining should comply with BS 8000-8. Plasterboard should be to BS EN 520 or BS EN 15283, and be:
z 9.5mm for stud spacing up to 450mm z 12.5mm or thicker, for stud spacing up to 600mm.
6.3
Tapered edge boards should be used where the plasterboard is to be jointed before decoration.
For fire and sound-resisting walls (eg separating walls and walls to WCs), the correct thickness, number of layers and sealing
should be specified in the design information.
For guidance on the use of plasterboard in wet areas ie, bath and shower areas, please refer to Chapter 9.2 ‘Wall
and ceiling finishes’.
6.3.13 Damp proof courses Also see: Chapter 5.4
DPCs shall be installed where required to prevent moisture entering the building.
Load-bearing partition walls built on foundations should have a DPC. Where partitions which could be affected by residual damp
(eg timber or steel) are placed on concrete floors, a DPC should be provided directly below, even where there is a DPM beneath
the slab.
DPCs should be:
z at least the width of the wall or partition z continuous or lapped by a minimum of 100mm.
z linked with any adjoining DPM
Figure 24: DPC provision Figure 25: DPC provision
Chapter 6.3
Where steps are necessary in the ground floor slab, a DPC should be:
z incorporated as a continuous link between the upper and z protected from damage during construction.
lower DPM
Where steps are greater than 150mm, structural waterproofing should be provided in accordance with Chapter 5.4
‘Waterproofing of basements and other below ground structures’.
Materials acceptable for DPCs include:
Bitumen BS 6398, BS EN 14967
Polyethylene BS 6515, BS EN 14909
Proprietary materials Technical Requirement R3
6.3.14 Components
Walls ties and related items shall be of the appropriate type and strength and shall have adequate durability.
Joist hangers, restraint straps, bond ties, etc should be protected against corrosion. Ferrous metals with the following levels of
protection are acceptable:
z post-galvanizing to BS EN ISO 1461, or z pre-galvanizing to BS EN 10143.

Figure 1 Square and plumb walls 6.3.4 2
Figure 2 Bonded connection 6.3.4 3
Figure 3 Tied connection 6.3.4 3
Figure 4 Incorrect use of materials 6.3.4 3
Figure 5 Restraint straps to concrete floors 6.3.4 3
6.3
Figure 6 Lintel positioning 6.3.4 3

Figure 7 Load-bearing timber wall 6.3.5 4
Figure 8 Ground floor - sole plate position 6.3.5 4
Figure 9 Junction of compartment wall and roof 6.3.6 5
Figure 10 Separating wall junction 6.3.7 6
Figure 11 Vertical and horizontal chases 6.3.7 6
Figure 12 Acoustic partition 6.3.7 7
Figure 13 Vertical S&VP boxing 6.3.7 7
Figure 14 Setting out square and plumb 6.3.9 8
Figure 15 Deflection head 6.3.9 9
Figure 16 Partition abutment 6.3.9 9
Figure 17 Wall head fixing to joist 6.3.9 9
Figure 18 Wall head fixing to nogging 6.3.9 9
Figure 19 Partition fixing to joist 6.3.9 9
Figure 20 Partition fixing to nogging 6.3.9 9
Figure 21 Additional nogging support 6.3.9 9
Figure 22 Deflection head 6.3.10 10
Figure 23 Partitioning abutment 6.3.10 10
Figure 24 DPC provision 6.3.13 10
Figure 25 DPC provision 6.3.13 10
Chapter
6.4
Timber and concrete
upper floors
Requirements for timber and concrete upper floors.
6.4.1 Compliance 01
6.4.3 Upper floor design 01
6.4.4 Fire spread 02
6.4.5 Sound insulation 03
6.4.6 In-situ concrete floors
and concreting 03
6.4.7 Precast concrete 03
6.4.8 Timber joist spans 04
6.4.9 Timber joist performance 06
6.4.10 Construction of timber floors 06
6.4.11 Joists supported by
intermediate walls 08
6.4.12 Joists connected to steel 09
6.4.13 Joists into hangers 09
6.4.14 Timber joist and restraint straps 11
6.4.15 Strutting 13
6.4.16 Joists and openings 13
6.4.17 Multiple joists 14
6.4.18 Notching and drilling 15
6.4.19 Floor decking 16
6.4.20 Floating floors or floors
between homes 18
1 Timber and concrete upper floors I 2024
Chapter 6.4
Timber and concrete upper floors shall comply with the Technical Requirements.
Timber and concrete upper floors that comply with the guidance in this chapter will generally be acceptable.

information and be distributed to appropriate personnel.
z direction of floor span, and size and spacing of joists or z positions of large service penetrations,
concrete components eg chimneys, SVPs
z size of trimmers and trimming joists z position of insulation
z position of strutting z details of all junctions
z detailing of openings in the floor z manufacturers’ recommendations for assembly and fixing of
z supporting walls below proprietary components
z walls and partitions above z detailing for acoustic and fire separation where floor forms a
z positions of restraint straps compartmentation between dwellings.
6.4.3 Upper floor design Also see: Chapter 6.5
Upper floors shall support and transmit loads safely to the supporting structure without undue deflection or
deformation. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) loads and support to partitions c) support of external envelope and projections.
b) steelwork
Loads and support to partitions

6.4
Structural design of timber and concrete upper floors should be in accordance with BS EN 1991-1-1.
The design of upper floors should account for dead loads, including:
z floor structure, decking and finishes z walls and partitions supported by the floor
z ceilings and applied finishes z permanent fixtures such as boilers, watertanks etc.
Imposed loads should be calculated in accordance with the relevant British Standards, including BS EN 1991-1-1
which recommends:
z 1.5kN/m2 for self-contained homes z values for communal areas serving flats or maisonettes.
Bearers or additional joists should be used to support heavy loads.

Joists built into separating walls may provide lateral support, and should be detailed to ensure that sound insulation and fire
resistance requirements are met.
Masonry partitions
Where first floor masonry partitions cannot be built directly in line with ground floor masonry walls, steel or reinforced concrete
support should be specified. Masonry should not be supported on timber or engineered joists.
Lightweight partitions
Where multiple solid timber joists support lightweight non load-bearing partitions which are parallel to the joists, they should be
suitably fixed together. Where I-joists and metal web joists are used, they should:
z be positioned centrally below a non load-bearing z support the weight of the non load-bearing partition by
partition and, where necessary, additional joists noggings or bearers fixed to the joists on either side.
should be doubled or tripled in accordance with the Unless designed otherwise, noggings should be a minimum
designers and manufacturer’s recommendations 38mm x 90mm minimum at 600mm centres and fixed with
metal clips. The sole plate of the non load-bearing partition
should be fixed to the noggings, or
z be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
2024 I Timber and concrete upper floors 2
Chapter 6.4
non load-bearing partition

supported by noggings
metal
I-joist web joist
Steelwork
Steelwork supporting upper floor should be:
z designed by an engineer in accordance with Technical z sized to allow an adequate bearing of the floor system.
Requirement R5 and comply with Chapter 6.5 ‘Steelwork’
Structural continuity of the floor should be provided by the use of continuous decking fixed to joists on both sides of a transverse
steel joist.
Steel beams should be protected by a suitably durable paint coating as detailed in Chapter 6.5 ‘Steelwork’.
Support of external envelope and projections

Deflection of concrete upper floors should be adequately designed, monitored and controlled to ensure it does not adversely
affect its proper functioning or appearance.
Particular attention should be paid to edges of upper floors in flat slab constructions or floors without edge beams spanning over
5 meters.
Where upper floors are required to support balconies and or masonry support systems, and horizontal joints are to be provided
as part of the external envelope of a framed building, they should be suitably designed and detailed to cater for both thermal
6.4
and moisture movements of the envelope, in addition to any residual floor deflection that may be expected from the supporting
structure. The concrete floor together with any associated horizontal (eg masonry) movement joint it supports should be
appropriately designed taking into consideration the following:
z floor deflection behind the cladding/envelope/balcony z building elevation and load paths
z cladding (eg masonry) support system deflections z elastic shorting of structural columns and walls
z cladding (eg masonry) joint details z building sway.
Further guidance on horizontal movement joints in masonry can be found in Chapter 6.1 - External masonry walls.
6.4.4 Fire spread

Adequate fire resistance and fire-stopping shall be provided by floors between homes and at penetrations.
Upper floors shall be constructed to ensure structural timber is located away from heat sources.
Floors and ceilings should:
z comply with the relevant Building Regulations and
Technical Requirement R3 40mm
40mm
z be in accordance with the design
min.
min.
z have adequate fire-stopping

z should be able to resist the passage of smoke when the
fire-stopping has been installed.
structural
timber
separated
from
chimney wall
Chapter 6.4
Timber
To counteract fire spread:
z combustible material should be kept away from z structural timber should be separated from sources of heat
heat sources in accordance with Chapter 6.8 ‘Fireplaces, chimneys
and flues’.
Ancillary product
Where ceilings of intermediate floors in houses or compartment floors in flats/apartments are perforated or penetrated by
services such as recessed light fittings (downlighters); ceiling-mounted air valves, vents and extractor fans and pipes, the floor
construction should still achieve the required period of fire resistance.
When installing such ancillary products and/or services including their fire-stopping elements and intumescent seals used to
maintain the fire resistance of the floor, one of the following should be met:
z a satisfactory fire test evidence and/or extended field of z a proprietary floor system with satisfactory assessment by
application reports that support the use of such product/ an appropriate independent technical approvals authority
systems in the particular type of floor being considered, or accepted by NHBC which includes the use of specific floor
z products and systems with a satisfactory assessment by type and ancillary products which has been demonstrated
an appropriate independent technical approvals authority to be satisfactory through testing and assessment, and are
accepted by NHBC covering the particular type of floor to be used within the limitations of the certification.
being considered, or
6.4.5 Sound insulation

Upper floors shall be constructed to ensure that sound transmission is adequately limited.
Timber upper floors should comply with Building Regulations and Chapter 9.3 ‘Floor finishes’.
6.4.6 In-situ concrete floors and concreting

In-situ concrete upper floors shall be adequately reinforced and of a mix which is suitable for the location
and intended use, and appropriately constructed.
Concrete floors should:
6.4
z comply with BS EN 1992-1-1 and z be reasonably level and smooth, especially at doorways
Chapter 3.1 ‘Concrete and its reinforcement’ and junctions
z comply with the design z be in accordance with Technical Requirement R3 where
proprietary elements are used.
6.4.7 Precast concrete

Precast concrete upper floors shall be erected in accordance with the design.
Precast concrete flooring systems should be in accordance infill blocks
used as spacers
with Technical Requirement R3, applicable product standards
and BS EN 1992-1-1.
For precast concrete beam and block systems:
z details of manufacturer’s assembly instructions and any
independent certification should be available on site
and followed
z beams, planks or infill blocks that are damaged should
not be used
z adequate support should be provided until design
strength is reached
z joints should be grouted in accordance with the
Chapter 6.4
Bearings should be:

z solid and level z 75mm minimum on steelwork.
z 90mm minimum on masonry (open frogs in brickwork
should be filled)
The setting out of beam and block floors should:

z ensure correct spacing between beams, using infill blocks z allow for additional beams where required to support
as spacers concentrated loads such as partitions.
z be in accordance with the design
Infill blocks should:

z be omitted or cut where necessary to allow for services z be cut carefully and neatly without damage
(not using a hammer and bolster).
Where floors rely on structural topping or in-situ make-up sections, propping may be needed until the in-situ concrete has
reached design strength.
Trimmed openings
3D min. 450mm
Where voids in precast concrete floors are to be trimmed:
z specifications and drawings should be followed straps at max.
2m centres
z steel trimmer shoes may be used.
Double beams, common around trimmed openings, should strap tight

to
be adequately supported until all voids have been solidly blockwork
concreted and the concrete has reached its design strength.
Restraint straps and ties precast
beam
Straps:
z should be shown in the design
z are generally required where beams run parallel with
the wall.
6.4
6.4.8 Timber joist spans
Timber floor joists shall be adequate for the spans and loads, and be correctly installed.
Solid timber joist sizes are provided in the BS 8103-3 span tables. Where the tables do not apply, or where there are
concentrated loads, floor joists should be designed by an engineer in accordance with Technical Requirement R5.
Span tables for solid timber joists
Tables 1 and 2 in this chapter are derived from the BM TRADA Technology Ltd. ‘Eurocode 5 span Tables for solid timber
members in floors, ceilings and roofs for dwellings (4th edition)’. Tables 1 and 2 give permissible clear spans of simply supported
domestic floor joists of solid timber for specified loadings, sizes and spacings calculated in accordance with EC5. The tables
make no allowance for concentrated or line loads applied by partitions, trimmers or other similar loads. The minimum bearing
length assumed for the tables is 40mm unless noted otherwise, and longer bearing lengths may be required for other practical
reasons. The section sizes are based on regularised ALS or CLS timber.
For timber floors between homes (compartment floors):
z to meet acoustic performance, the dead load of the z use the three right-hand columns from Tables 1 and 2.
construction of up to 1.25kN/m2 may be assumed
For upper floors with 22mm thick chipboard decking and a 12.5mm plasterboard ceiling:
z a dead load of up to 0.5kN/m2 may be assumed z use the centre three columns from Tables 1 and 2.
Where lightweight non load-bearing partitions weigh up to 1.0kN (101.9kg) per metre run and are parallel to the joists,
the following applies:
z partitions may be directly supported by one or two z where similar lightweight partitions run at right-angles to
additional joists the joists, the maximum spans in Tables 1 and 2 should be
z partitions should be fixed through the floor decking into the reduced by 10%
joist(s) beneath z for all other additional loads, joist sizes should be
designed by an engineer in accordance with
Chapter 6.4
Table 1: Permissible clear spans for domestic floor joists. Table 2: Permissible clear spans for domestic floor joists.
Strength class C16 Strength class C24
Imposed load not exceeding qk = 1.5 kN/m2 or Qk = 2.0kN. Imposed load not exceeding qk = 1.5 kN/m2 or Qk = 2.0 kN.
Service class 1 or 2. Service class 1 or 2.
Dead load gk (kN/m2) excluding self-weight of joist Dead load gk (kN/m2) excluding self-weight of joist
Size of joist gk not more gk not more gk not more Size of joist gk not more gk not more gk not more
than 0.25 than 0.50 than 1.25 than 0.25 than 0.50 than 1.25
Joist spacing (mm) Joist spacing (mm)
400 450 600 400 450 600 400 450 600 400 450 600 400 450 600 400 450 600
Breadth Depth Maximum clear span (m) Breadth Depth Maximum clear span (m)
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
38 95 1.71* 1.62 1.40 1.61 1.52 1.32 1.40 1.33 1.16 38 95 1.99* 1.89* 1.64 1.86* 1.76 1.54 1.61 1.53 1.34
38 120 2.37* 2.24* 1.95 2.19* 2.08* 1.82 1.87 1.78 1.56 38 120 2.64* 2.54* 2.27 2.49* 2.39* 2.11 2.14 2.03 1.80
38 145 2.86* 2.75* 2.49 2.69* 2.59* 2.33 2.35 2.23 1.97 38 145 3.18* 3.06* 2.78 3.00* 2.88* 2.61 2.62 2.52 2.26
38 170 3.34* 3.21* 2.91 3.15* 3.03* 2.74 2.75 2.64 2.39 38 170 3.72* 3.58* 3.25 3.51* 3.37* 3.06 3.07 2.95 2.67
38 195 3.83* 3.68* 3.34 3.61* 3.47* 3.14 3.15 3.03 2.73 38 195 4.26* 4.10* 3.72 4.02* 3.86* 3.51 3.52 3.38 3.06
38 220 4.31* 4.14* 3.76 4.06* 3.90* 3.54 3.55 3.41 3.08 38 220 4.79* 4.61* 4.19 4.52* 4.35* 3.95 3.96 3.81 3.45
44 95 1.84* 1.74 1.51 1.72 1.63 1.42 1.50 1.42 1.24 44 95 2.14* 2.02* 1.76 1.99* 1.89 1.65 1.71 1.63 1.44
44 120 2.49* 2.39* 2.09 2.33* 2.22* 1.95 1.99 1.89 1.67 44 120 2.77* 2.67* 2.42 2.61* 2.51* 2.25 2.27 2.16 1.92
44 145 3.00* 2.89* 2.62 2.83* 2.72* 2.46 2.47 2.37 2.10 44 145 3.34* 3.21* 2.92 3.15* 3.03* 2.75 2.76 2.65 2.40
44 170 3.51* 3.38* 3.06 3.31* 3.18* 2.88 2.89 2.78 2.51 44 170 3.90* 3.76* 3.42 3.69* 3.54* 3.22 3.23 3.10 2.81
44 195 4.02* 3.86* 3.51 3.79* 3.64* 3.30 3.32 3.18 2.88 44 195 4.47* 4.30* 3.91 4.22* 4.06* 3.68 3.70 3.55 3.22
44 220 4.52* 4.35* 3.95 4.26* 4.10* 3.72 3.73 3.59 3.25 44 220 5.02* 4.84* 4.40 4.75* 4.57* 4.15 4.16 4.00 3.63
47 95 1.90* 1.79 1.56 1.77 1.68 1.47 1.54 1.46 1.28 47 95 2.20* 2.08* 1.82 2.05* 1.94 1.70 1.76 1.68 1.48
47 120 2.55* 2.45* 2.16 2.40* 2.28* 2.01 2.05 1.95 1.72 47 120 2.83* 2.73* 2.48 2.67* 2.57* 2.32 2.33 2.22 1.97
47 145 3.07* 2.95* 2.68 2.89* 2.78* 2.52 2.53 2.43 2.16 47 145 3.41* 3.28* 2.98 3.22* 3.10* 2.81 2.82 2.71 2.45
47 170 3.59* 3.45* 3.13 3.38* 3.25* 2.95 2.96 2.84 2.57 47 170 3.99* 3.84* 3.49 3.77* 3.62* 3.29 3.30 3.17 2.87
47 195 4.10* 3.95* 3.59 3.87* 3.72* 3.38 3.39 3.26 2.95 47 195 4.56* 4.39* 4.00 4.31* 4.15* 3.77 3.78 3.63 3.29
47 220 4.62* 4.44* 4.04 4.36* 4.19* 3.81 3.82 3.67 3.32 47 220 5.13* 4.94* 4.50 4.85* 4.67* 4.24 4.26 4.09 3.71
6.4
63 95 2.17* 2.06* 1.80 2.02* 1.92 1.68 1.74 1.66 1.47 63 95 2.52* 2.43* 2.14 2.38* 2.26* 1.99 2.03 1.94 1.72
63 120 2.80* 2.70* 2.45 2.64* 2.54* 2.29 2.30 2.20 1.95 63 120 3.11* 2.99* 2.72 2.94* 2.83* 2.57 2.57 2.47 2.22
63 145 3.38* 3.25* 2.96 3.19* 3.07* 2.79 2.79 2.68 2.43 63 145 3.74* 3.60* 3.28 3.54* 3.40* 3.09 3.10 2.98 2.70
63 170 3.94* 3.80* 3.46 3.72* 3.58* 3.26 3.27 3.14 2.85 63 170 4.37* 4.21* 3.84 4.13* 3.98* 3.62 3.63 3.49 3.17
63 195 4.51* 4.34* 3.95 4.26* 4.10* 3.73 3.74 3.60 3.26 63 195 5.00* 4.81* 4.39 4.72* 4.55* 4.14 4.15 4.00 3.62
63 220 5.07* 4.88* 4.45 4.79* 4.61* 4.20 4.21 4.05 3.68 63 220 5.61* 5.41* 4.94 5.31* 5.12* 4.66 4.68 4.50 4.08
72 120 2.93* 2.82* 2.56 2.76* 2.66* 2.42 2.42 2.32 2.06 72 120 3.25* 3.13* 2.85 3.07* 2.96* 2.69 2.70 2.59 2.35
72 145 3.52* 3.39* 3.09 3.33* 3.20* 2.91 2.92 2.81 2.55 72 145 3.91* 3.77* 3.44 3.70* 3.56* 3.24 3.25 3.13 2.84
72 170 4.11* 3.96* 3.61 3.89* 3.74* 3.41 3.42 3.29 2.98 72 170 4.57* 4.40* 4.02 4.32* 4.16* 3.79 3.80 3.66 3.32
72 195 4.70* 4.53* 4.13 4.44* 4.28* 3.90 3.91 3.76 3.41 72 195 5.22* 5.03* 4.59 4.94* 4.76* 4.34 4.35 4.19 3.81
72 220 5.28* 5.09* 4.65 5.00* 4.82* 4.39 4.40 4.23 3.85 72 220 5.86* 5.65* 5.17 5.55* 5.35* 4.88 4.90 4.71 4.29
ALS/CLS ALS/CLS
38 89 1.56 1.47 1.27 1.47 1.39 1.21 1.29 1.22 1.07 38 89 1.82* 1.72 1.50 1.71 1.62 1.41 1.49 1.41 1.24
38 114 2.21* 2.09* 1.82 2.05* 1.94 1.70 1.76 1.67 1.47 38 114 2.51* 2.41* 2.12 2.36* 2.24* 1.97 2.01 1.91 1.69
38 140 2.76* 2.65* 2.40 2.60* 2.50* 2.23 2.25 2.14 1.89 38 140 3.07* 2.96* 2.68 2.90* 2.79* 2.53 2.53 2.43 2.17
38 184 3.61* 3.47* 3.15 3.41* 3.27* 2.97 2.98 2.86 2.58 38 184 4.02* 3.87* 3.52 3.79* 3.65* 3.31 3.32 3.19 2.89
38 235 4.60* 4.42* 4.01 4.33* 4.17* 3.78 3.79 3.64 3.29 38 235 5.11* 4.92* 4.47 4.83* 4.64* 4.22 4.23 4.06 3.68
89 184 4.74* 4.57* 4.18 4.49* 4.33* 3.95 3.96 3.81 3.46 89 184 5.26* 5.08* 4.64 4.98* 4.81* 4.39 4.40 4.24 3.86
89 235 6.00* 5.79* 5.30 5.69* 5.49* 5.01 5.03 4.84 4.41 89 235 6.65* 6.42* 5.88 6.31* 6.09* 5.57 5.58 5.38 4.90
* Two additional joists required * Two additional joists required

Bold text = normal bearing increased to 50mm Bold text = normal bearing increased to 50mm
Chapter 6.4
6.4.9 Timber joist performance Also see: Chapter 3.3
Floor joists shall be of an appropriate size and quality, and be suitably durable.
I-joists and metal web joists should not be used in situations where any part of the joist is exposed to external conditions, and be:
z in accordance with Technical Requirement R3 z stored clear of the ground and stacked vertically
z used in accordance with the z not used where damaged
manufacturer’s recommendations z designed in accordance with BS EN 1995-1-1 and its UK
z protected from adverse weather conditions during transport National Annex.
and storage
Instantaneous deflection of floor joists should be:

z no more than 0.003 x the span for the combined bending
and shear based on the total dead and imposed loads, with a
maximum deflection of 14mm where strutting is provided, or
12mm where strutting is not provided.
Floors formed by the bottom chords of attic trusses are required to meet the above guidance.
Structural solid timber joists should be specified according to the strength classes in BS EN 338, eg C16 or C24 and
marked with:
z the strength class, or evidence of species and grade made z the identification of the company responsible for the grading
available so as to determine the strength class (when graded to BS 4978 or BS EN 14081).
When graded to BS 4978:
z the species should be included in accordance with z BS EN 338 can be used to determine strength class.
BS EN 1912 or the class strength specified
Regularised timber should be used for solid timber joists, and be:
z dry graded to BS 4978 or BS EN 14081 z marked ‘DRY’ or ‘KD’.
Materials should be checked on delivery for conformity with the design.

Joists should be stored on bearers or in racks and
6.4
be protected.
Timber should not be used where:
z it is excessively bowed, twisted or cambered
z it has large edge knots or shakes
z it has a waney edge more than half the thickness
z it is damaged or has any sign of rot.
store timbers off the ground on bearers
6.4.10 Construction of timber floors Also see: Chapter 3.3
Upper floors shall be constructed in a workmanlike manner and provide satisfactory performance.
Issues to be taken into account include:
a) levelling c) support.
b) joist spacing and clearance
Levelling
Bearings for joists should be level. The floor should staircase
trimmer
be levelled:
z from the staircase trimmer and trimming joist
z in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
z using hard packing; loose or soft packing should not
be used.
joists levelled from staircase trimmer or trimming joist

Chapter 6.4
Joist spacing and clearance

Joist spacing should:
z be in accordance with the design and not increased z have a clearance of 25mm – 75mm between the first joist
z account for the decking material to be used and the wall face to aid the installation of services and the
z be a maximum of 600mm fixing of floor decking.
Support
The floor should have an adequate bearing on the supporting structure.
Timber joists should normally have a minimum bearing as shown in Table 3.
Table 3: Support of joists

Type of timber joist Minimum bearing (mm)
End support Intermediate support
Solid joist on masonry walls 90 (75) 90 (75)
Solid joist on timber wall plate 75 75
I-joist 90 (45) 90
Metal web joist 90 (45) 90
The figures in brackets should only be used when the joist is not providing restraint to the wall.
Joists may be:
z supported on joist hangers or on internal load-bearing walls z built into the inner leaf of an external cavity wall, with care
taken to ensure air-tightness.
Where joists are built into separating walls, fire-and sound-resisting performance, in accordance with Building Regulations,
should be taken into account.
I-joists and metal web joists

Where engineered joists are built into the inner leaf of a cavity
wall, only proprietary products should be used to seal the gap
6.4
between the sides of the joists and the masonry. Expanding

foam fill should not be used or relied upon for this purpose. I-joist
I-joists and metal web joists should not be built into solid
external walls.
The support reaction, due to dead and imposed loads on the
floor, should not exceed the recommended value specified by
the manufacturer. metal web
Where there are concentrated loads:

z web stiffeners should be used for I-joists
z uprights between the flanges, held in place by punched
metal plate fasteners or bottom chord (flange) support,
should be used for metal web joists
z the manufacturer’s recommendations should be followed.
Chapter 6.4
uprights at uprights at
intermediate bearing end bearing
intermediate bearing end bearing
Where joists are supported on walls, noggings may be required at the top flange along the wall to support the floor decking,
and at the bottom flange to support the plasterboard ceiling. Where joists are not built into brickwork or blockwork, blocking
should be provided at the joist bearing. The blocking may be used for fixing plasterboard and floor decking.
top flange restraint perimeter nogging
6.4.11 Joists supported by intermediate walls

Joists shall be properly fixed at intermediate load-bearing walls.
6.4
Solid timber joists
Solid timber joists bearing onto intermediate load-bearing walls should:
z be nailed together where they overlap z not project more than 100mm.
I-joists
I-joists bearing onto intermediate load-bearing walls should have:
z blocking used to brace the butt joint z short sections of joist used to provide lateral support.
Metal web joists

Metal web joists bearing onto intermediate load-bearing walls should:
z have a minimum 90mm bearing z be overlapped.
overlapping joists intermediate intermediate support

nailed together support for I-joist for metal web joist
100mm max.
overhang
Chapter 6.4
6.4.12 Joists connected to steel

Joists shall be suitably connected to steelwork.
Solid timber joists min. 12mm projection
Where connected to steel beams, solid timber joists should:

z be deep enough to be notched
z have 12mm top and 2mm bottom projections to allow for
timber shrinkage
z be provided with strutting to prevent rotation.
min. 2mm projection
I-joists
Where connected to steel beams, I-joists should not be notched at the flange, and should:
z bear directly into the steel beam where the bearing is more z have blocking fixed to the steel beam to enable the I-joists
than 45mm. Strutting, (noggings 38mm x thickness of to be face fixed using joist hangers. Strutting is not required
flange) should be provided at the top and bottom flanges, or when hangers the full depth of the joist are used to face fix
joists to the blocking.
Metal web joists

Where connected to steel beams, metal web joists should not be notched at the flange, and should:
z bear directly into the bottom flange of the steel beam where z where the bearing is less than 75mm, the joist can be
the bearing is more than 75mm. There should be timber supported on the top flange with the bottom flange fixed to
uprights between the flanges and 38mm x 97mm noggings timber blocking supported inside the steel beam.
between the uprights
solid strutting timber blocking to support

metal web joists
6.4
timber blocking behind

joist hanger
6.4.13 Joists into hangers

Joist hangers shall provide a suitable bearing on the supporting structure and be of an adequate size,
strength and durability.
Masonry supporting joist hangers should be checked for level and height. The top flange loading on the joist hanger should
not be greater than the strength of the supporting masonry. Where joist hangers are supported on lightweight blockwork, the
suitability of the hanger should be checked. Joist hangers which meet BS EN 845-1 have a stamp indicating the minimum
compressive strength of block for which they are suitable.
Chapter 6.4
Hangers should:
z be detailed in the design, including the type of support to
be used for joists, trimmers and trimming joists
z have a 75mm minimum bearing on masonry
z comply with BS EN 845-1 or another acceptable clause
described in Technical Requirement R3
z have performance equivalent to restraint straps at 2m
timber to timber to heavy duty
centres where required to provide restraint timber hanger masonry hanger hanger
z be the correct size for the joist or trimmer
z be nailed through each circular hole in the vertical sides gap between joist and
hanger is 6mm max.
z bear on level beds and be tight to the wall
z not be cut into the walling.
Joists should be accurately cut to length. Where joists are not

built into brickwork or blockwork, blocking should be provided
at the joist bearing. The blocking may be used for fixing
plasterboard and floor decking.
Solid joists
Where connected to hangers, solid timber joists should:
z have a minimum bearing of 75mm onto the hanger
z be notched into the hanger to keep the ceiling line level notched to
z be the full depth of the hanger. keep ceiling
line level
I-joists
Where connected to hangers, I-joists should not be notched at the flange, and should have:
z a minimum bearing of 45mm onto the hanger z the tabs of the hanger bent and nailed to the bottom flange.
Hangers should be:

z the full depth of the joist and restrain the top flange, or z at least 0.6 x the depth of the joist and have stiffeners
6.4
(full depth) fixed to both sides of the web.
Metal web joists

Where connected to hangers, metal web joists should not be notched at the flange, and should have:
z a minimum bearing of 75mm onto the hanger z timber uprights fixed between the flanges.
Hangers should be to the full depth of the joist and restrain the top flange, or another suitable means of restraining the top flange
should be provided.
solid blocking where joists

are not built into blockwork
joist hanger
tabs bent over
and nailed to flange
top flange restraint

Chapter 6.4
6.4.14 Timber joist and restraint straps Also see: Chapter 6.1 and BS 8103-1
Upper floors shall provide adequate lateral restraint.

Restraint straps and joist hangers suitable for taking tensile forces may be required to tie walls and upper floors together or when
the external wall is stabilised by a connection to the floor. Straps should:
z be detailed in the design, including the size, position z bear on the centre of bricks or blocks and not on
and fixings mortar joints
z be galvanised steel with a 30mm x 5mm cross-section or be z be fixed on the side, top or bottom, as appropriate to the
in accordance with Technical Requirement R3 joist type.
z have adequate packing between the wall and the first joist
restraint strap held tight top fixed strap strap centered on block
against blockwork and tight to wall
side fixed
strap
Restraint straps should be provided along the direction of the joists and spaced at a maximum of 2m centres. They are not
generally required at the ends of joists in buildings up to, and including, two storeys where:
z restraint type joist hangers in accordance with z joists are built into a wall and bear at least 90mm on
Technical Requirement R3 are used, or the wall.
6.4
Where joists run parallel to the wall, straps should be fitted along the joists with a maximum spacing of 2m, and:
z be supported on noggings and extend over at least z have noggings provided to receive two additional nails
three joists (for solid joists, two 4.76mm diameter x 50mm long wood
z be fixed with two screws or nails into each joist screws (No.10) or 4mm diameter x 75mm round nails
(8 SWG) can be used in each joist).
I-joist with
restraint strap max. 2m centres nogging
packing
Chapter 6.4
Solid timber joists

Solid timber joists should, have noggings provided at:
z a minimum of 0.5 x the depth of the member when straps z the full depth of the member where straps are located
are located on top of the joist, or beneath the joist.
I-joists
I-joists should not be notched and have:
z solid timber noggings no less than 0.5 x the depth of the z noggings made from short lengths of I-joist, or solid timber
member and a maximum of 150mm fixed between the webs the full depth of the I-joists, or
and located beneath the top flange, with the straps installed z noggings half the depth of the member x depth of the flange
through small slots neatly cut through the top of the web of laid on their side between the flanges.
the joists
When nailing into laminated veneer lumber flanges:
z care should be taken to prevent splitting z nails should be driven in at an angle (not horizontally) and
should not protrude from the flanges.
noggings for small slots neatly
I-joists cut through the top
of the webs
Metal web joists
6.4
Metal web joists should not be notched and should have:
z 35mm x 97mm solid timber noggings beneath the top flange z noggings nailed twice to each joist.
of the metal web joists, and
noggings for metal

web joists
Chapter 6.4
6.4.15 Strutting
Strutting shall be provided where required to distribute loads and ensure adequate rigidity of the
floor structure.
Strutting should: herringbone strutting blocking
z not project beyond the top and bottom edges of joists

z be firmly blocked to the wall at the end of each run
z be provided before the deck is laid.
Proprietary metal strutting should comply with

Solid timber joists
Strutting to solid timber joists should be:
z provided in accordance Table 4 z be herringbone (38mm x 38mm timber) or solid
(minimum 38mm thick and 0.75 x the depth of the joist).
Table 4: Strutting for solid timber and I-joists
Joist span (m) Rows of strutting
Under 2.5 None needed
2.5-4.5 1 (at centre of span)
Over 4.5 2 (at equal spacing)
I-joists
bracing
Strutting to I-joists should be: strongback
z provided in accordance with the Table 4, where required.
Metal web joists

Strutting to metal web joists should be:
z provided in accordance with Table 5
z solid timber ‘strongback’ bracing.
6.4
Table 5: Strutting for metal web joists

Joist span (m) Rows of strutting
4-8 1 (at centre of span)
over 8 2 (at equal spacing)
6.4.16 Joists and openings Also see: Chapter 6.6
Upper floors shall have adequately sized and properly supported trimmer joists around openings.
Trimmer, trimmed and trimming joists should be:
z detailed in the design z designed in accordance with Technical Requirement R5.
Connections between joists should be made with suitable ‘timber-to-timber’ hangers, and:
z where face fixing I-joists to another I-joist, be provided with z where metal web joists are used as a trimming joist to
backer blocks on both sides of the web of the trimmer support another metal web joist, have timber uprights
between the flanges of the trimmer.
void trimmer trimmed joists single or double trimmer in
accordance with the design
backer
blocks
supporting wall trimming joist timber upright

Chapter 6.4
Deflection
The following should be considered in the design and detailing around openings in floors:
z deflection of trimming joists to be similar and no worse than z where partition walls are built off trimmers and trimming
the adjacent floor joists joists, particularly fire compartment walls, additional care
z compound deflection of the floor including trimming and should be taken to ensure that the overall deflection of such
trimmed joists should be limited to the overall floor deflection, joists would not result in residual gaps at the heads of the
to ensure there is no differential movement or noticeable step walls or in distorted walls or openings within the walls.
in the floor level adjacent to the trimming joists
There should be no notching or drilling of trimmers or trimming joists unless proven by design calculations.
6.4.17 Multiple joists

Multiple joists shall be securely fixed together.
Joists can be doubled or tripled up to provide additional support, eg for lightweight partitions or to form trimmers. The design
should specify how the joists are fixed together and be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
As a minimum the fixing centres for double member trimmer and trimming joists should be at centres of no more than twice the
adjacent joist spacing.
When securing solid joists:
z fixings should be in accordance with the engineer’s z washers or single-faced connectors should be used
specification and should be checked before the ceiling is with bolts
fixed, including the tightness of bolts z ensure that timber is not damaged by over-tightening.
z toothed plate, split ring and shear plate connectors should
be provided where required
Coach bolts can be used to fix multiple solid joists together. They could be located at centreline or staggered depending on the
loading and design. Where located on centreline, the spacing of between S (joist centres) and 1.0m can be used. Where more
than two joists are secured together or a heavy concentrated load is to be supported, then the fixing arrangement with staggered
6.4
spacing shown in the table below may be used.
Fixing on centreline
S S
S
S 2S
S = spacing
Fixing type Minimum dimension (mm)

a b c
b
Bolt Maximum of 7d or 80mm 4d 4d
d – diameter of bolt
Engineered joists should be secured together in accordance with the manufacturers recommendation.
Chapter 6.4
timber filler block
6.4.18 Notching and drilling

Notching and drilling shall be carried out within recognised limits.
Solid timber joists
Notching and drilling should be designed by an engineer where:
z the joist is deeper than 250mm z it is close to heavy loads, such as those from partitions,
z it does not meet the guidelines in this chapter, or cisterns, cylinders and stair trimming.
Notching and drilling should:

z have a minimum horizontal separation of 100mm z be in accordance with Table 6.
Table 6: Notching and drilling solid timber joists

Location Maximum size
Notching joists up to 250mm depth Top edge 0.1-0.2 x span 0.15 x depth of joist
Drilling joists up to 250mm depth Centre line 0.25-0.4 x span 0.25 x depth of joist
6.4
holes located on the centre line in a 100mm min.

zone (0.25-0.4 x span) from the end between notches
and max. notch depth = 0.25 x joist depth and holes
notches located in a zone

(0.1-0.2 x span) from the end and
max. notch depth = 0.15 x joist depth
I-joists services passing

through joists
Preformed holes should be provided in the web and:
z holes or notches should not be cut without the approval of
the manufacturer
z restraint straps can be slotted into webs immediately
below the top flange.
Metal web joists

In metal web joists:
z service conduits should run in the gaps between the
metal webs
z maximum duct sizes should be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations
z large service ducts may have to be inserted before fixing
the joists, as it may not be possible after the joists have
been fixed.
Chapter 6.4
6.4.19 Floor decking

Floor decking shall be suitable for the intended use and be of adequate strength and moisture resistance.
a) type, thickness and fixing b) protection against damage.
Type, thickness and fixing

Where decking contributes to the sound insulation of a floor, the thicknesses listed in this chapter should be checked.
Floor decking should:
z be appropriate to the joist spacing z be in accordance with Table 7 (which applies to normal
domestic loads, ie, an imposed load of 1.5kN/m2), or comply
with another acceptable clause described in Technical
Requirement R3.
Table 7: Floor decking requirements

Floor decking 400mm joist centres 450mm joist centres 600mm joist centres Standard
Softwood boarding 16 16 19 BS EN 13353
Moisture resistant chipboard 18 18 22 BS EN 312 – type P5
Plywood 15 15 18/19 BS EN 636
Oriented strand board 15 15 18/19 BS EN 300 – type OSB3
When installing decking:

z fixings and support should be in accordance with the z where nails are used, they should be 2.5 x the thickness of
manufacturer’s recommendations the decking material
z checks should be made, prior to fixing, to ensure that z where gluing is required, boards should be glued to the
noggings, blocking and strutting are in the correct position joists and at joints, using a suitable polyvinyl acetate
and secure (PVAc) adhesive
z butt joints should be staggered and supported on z temporary wedges and packing should be removed once
noggings or joists the floor decking is complete.
6.4
z adjacent boards should be square
Square edged boards and boards with loose tongues

When fixing boards with square edges or loose tongues, they should be supported on all sides by joists or noggings.
Tongued and grooved boards
When fixing boards with tongued and grooved edges:
z boards should be laid with long edges at right angles z boards should be glued to the joists and the sheets glued to
to joists each other with polyvinyl acetate (PVAc) adhesive
z short edges should be supported on joists or noggings or (not softwood boarding)
cut back to form a butt joint over a joist z long edges at room perimeters should be fully supported on
joists or noggings.
Chipboard flooring
Chipboard flooring should be supported and fixed in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations using either:
z flat-headed ring shank nails, 2.5 x the thickness of the z screws to BS 1210, minimum 2 x the thickness of the board
board and minimum 3mm diameter, or and no less than size No. 8.
Chapter 6.4
min. 10mm
expansion gap
nogging
joist or nogging
When fixing:
z fixings should have a maximum spacing of 300mm along z where boards abut a rigid upstand, a minimum 10mm
continuously supported edges and intermediate supports expansion gap should be provided; for large areas of
boarded floor, a wider expansion gap may be required at
upstands and intermediate expansion gaps of 2mm per
linear metre of floor should be provided.
Oriented strand board flooring
When fixing oriented strand board flooring:
z boards should be laid over supports in the direction z where boards abut a rigid upstand, a minimum 10mm
indicated on the board, with the stronger axis at right angles expansion gap should be provided; for large areas of
to the supporting joists boarded floor, a wider expansion gap may be required at
z boards should be long enough to span two joists upstands and intermediate expansion gaps of 2mm per
z nails should be flat headed, annular grooved nails, linear metre of floor should be provided.
3mm in diameter
Plywood flooring
When fixing plywood flooring:
z boards should be laid with the face grain at right angles to z fixings should have a maximum spacing of 150mm around
6.4
the supports the perimeter and a maximum spacing of 300mm on

z end joints should occur over joists or noggings intermediate supports
z an expansion gap of at least 1.5mm-2mm should be
allowed between each panel.
Nails for fixing plywood should be in accordance with Table 8.
Table 8: Fixings for plywood floors

Plain wire nails (mm) Annular ring shank nails (mm)
Minimum diameter 3.35 3
Minimum length 65 50
Minimum penetration 40 32
Proprietary flooring
Proprietary flooring should be:
z certified in accordance with Technical Requirement R3 z installed in accordance with certification requirements.
Protection against damage

Floor decking should be stored:
z on a hard base z indoors where possible.
z under cover
Chapter 6.4
Floor decking that are built in as the work proceeds and left exposed to the weather will be subjected to deterioration and
adverse effect of the weather, particularly when exposed to prolonged periods of rainfall. Such floor decking when used in
conjunction with engineered and traditional joists should:
z have a third-party approval certificate from a UKAS z be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
accredited body which covers weather resistance for the instruction and details.
period of time the boards are to be left exposed on site
Any floor decking that are left exposed beyond the period stated on the third-party approval certificate should be replaced.
Non-proprietary floor decking without third party certification should not be used on structural floors exposed to the weather for
any period of time under any circumstances.
Floors should not be overloaded, especially with materials during construction, and be protected against damp, plaster splashes
and other damage.
6.4.20 Floating floors or floors between homes

Floating floors shall be separated from the main structure and surrounding walls by a resilient layer.
The structural component of floors between homes may be concrete, steel, timber or a combination of these materials.
The floor finish should be isolated from walls and skirtings.
Where board materials are laid loose, joints in tongued and grooved boards should be glued.
Proprietary floating floor materials and systems should be fixed in accordance with:
z Building Regulations z relevant certification requirements.
z manufacturer’s recommendations
6.4
Chapter
6.5
Steelwork
Requirements for:
z steelwork which supports masonry partitions and
timber floors, including trimmed openings
z the protection of steelwork.
6.5.1 Compliance 01
6.5.2 Design guidance 01
6.5.3 Steel grade and coatings 03
6.5.4 Installation and support 05
6.5.5 Padstones 05
6.5.6 Connections 06
6.5.7 Examples 07
1 Steelwork I 2024
Chapter 6.5
Steelwork shall comply with the Technical Requirements.

Steelwork (including trimming to floor voids) for supporting masonry partitions or timber floors which comply with the guidance in
this chapter will generally be acceptable.
The information provided in this chapter is in accordance with BS EN 1993-1-1 using grade S275 steel; however, more
economical or smaller beams may be designed by an engineer.
Steelwork, including its support and any connections, should be:
z designed by an engineer in accordance with z detailed in accordance with this chapter.
Technical Requirement R5, or
6.5.2 Design guidance Also see: Chapters 6.1, 6.3 and 6.4
Steelwork shall be designed to support and transmit loads to the supporting structure without undue
movement or deflection. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) support of masonry partitions b) support of timber floors, including trimmed openings.
Support of masonry partitions

Masonry partitions may be supported by steelwork selected in accordance with this chapter. Care should be taken to avoid
masonry supported by steelwork being partially supported or out of true.
Conditions for Tables 1 and 2
Steel beams in accordance with Tables 1 and 2 of this chapter will generally be acceptable for the support of masonry partitions
where the following conditions are met:
z the partition is of one of the types detailed in Table 1 z brickwork or blockwork (workface size 440mm x 215mm)
z the partition is built centrally on the steelwork beam and is supporting the steel beam has a minimum strength of
less than 2.7m in height 2.8N/mm2 and the beam supports do not occur over a
z the span of the steel beam is less than 4m door or window opening
z steel beams only support the weight of the partition z padstones are provided where required, in accordance
6.5
and self-weight with Table 6.
Where any of the conditions are not met, steelwork should be designed in accordance with Technical Requirement R5.
Method of applying tables:
z ensure that all conditions apply. z check the span of the beam(s)
z identify the masonry partition construction and thickness z use Table 2 to determine a suitable steel section size
z use Table 1 to establish the load per metre run z use Table 6 to determine if padstones are required.
An example is provided at the end of this chapter.

Table 1: Load of partition to be supported
Type of masonry for supported partition Maximum masonry Structural thickness (mm)
(not more than 2.7m high density (kg/m3) 100 90 75
and plastered both sides)
Load (kN/m run)
Dense masonry 2000 6.8 6.2 5.4
Medium masonry 1400 5.1 4.8 4.2
Lightweight masonry 800 3.5 3.3 2.9
2024 I Steelwork 2
Chapter 6.5
Table 2: Size of steel beam supporting partition

Partition load (from Table 1) Clear span of beam (m) Smallest suitable universal beam size
(kN/m run) (mm x mm x kg/m)
Less than 3 Up to 4 127 x 76 x 13
Over 4 (2)
3 to 5 Up to 3 127 x 76 x 13
3 to 3.5 152 x 89 x 16
3.5 to 4 178 x 102 x 19
Over 4 (2)
5 to 7 Up to 2.5 127 x 76 x 13
2.5 to 3 152 x 89 x 16
3 to 4 178 x 102 x 19
Over 4 (2)
Notes
1
For spans up to 4m, universal column 152mm x 152mm x 23kg/m (smallest size available) may be used.
2 For spans over 4m, beams should be designed by an engineer in accordance with Technical Requirement R5.
Support of timber floors, including trimmed openings

Timber floors may be supported by steelwork selected in Figure 1: Allowing for shrinkage of timber joists
accordance with this chapter and should include full allowance min. 12mm projection
for the shrinkage of timber joists.
min. 2mm projection

Conditions for Tables 3 and 7
Steel beams in accordance with Tables 3 and 7 will be acceptable to NHBC for the support of floors, where the following
conditions are met:
z the floor construction is of decking (softwood boarding, z any lightweight partition, such as plasterboard on timber
6.5
chipboard, oriented strand board or plywood) on timber studwork or proprietary product, is non load-bearing
joists and the ceiling is plasterboard with a plaster skim coat z padstones are provided where required in accordance
or a plastic finish (Artex or similar) with Table 6
z allowance has been made of 0.5kN/m2 for self-weight z clear span of beam does not exceed 4.4m
(floor and ceiling load) z connections between steelwork beams are in accordance
z the floor does not support masonry partitions with Clause 6.5.6, or are designed by an engineer
z the floor support is one of the methods shown in Figure 1.
Where any of the conditions are not met, steelwork should be designed by an engineer in accordance with Technical Requirement R5.
Method of applying tables:
z use Figure 1 to determine the area supported by z use Table 7 to determine if padstones are required
the beam(s) z where steel beam-to-steel connections are required,
z check the span of the beam(s) refer to the connections in Clause 6.5.6.
z use Table 3 to determine a suitable steel section size
Ensure that all conditions apply.
Figure 2: Effective areas supported by steel beams
A A
wall wall
under B under A A
A A B
void
B
Beam Effective area Beam Effective area Beam Effective area

AA AA AA
BB BB
3 Steelwork I 2024
Chapter 6.5
B C B C
A A
B A A A A
void void void
B B C B C
Beam Effective area Beam Effective area Beam Effective area

AA AA AA
BB BB BB
CC CC
Where any area shown as ‘void’ contains a staircase, add 2m2 to the effective area supported by any beam which fully or partially
supports that staircase.
Table 3: Size of steel beam supporting timber floor
Effective area Effective trimmer span Smallest suitable steel section size (mm x mm x kg/m)
supported (m2) = clear span + 100mm (m) Universal beam Universal column
0 to 20 0 to 2.0 127 x 76 x 13 152 x 152 x 23
0 to 20 2 to 2.5 127 x 76 x 13 152 x 152 x 23
20 to 30 152 x 89 x 16 152 x 152 x 23
0 to 10 2.5 to 3 127 x 76 x 13 152 x 152 x 23
10 to 20 152 x 89 x 16 152 x 152 x 23
20 to 30 178 x 102 x 19 152 x 152 x 23
0 to 10 3 to 3.5 127 x 76 x 13 152 x 152 x 23
10 to 30 178 x 102 x 19 152 x 152 x 23
30 to 40 203 x 133 x 25 152 x 152 x 30
0 to 10 3.5 to 4 152 x 89 x 16 152 x 152 x 23
10 to 20 178 x 102 x 19 152 x 152 x 23
20 to 30 203 x 102 x 23 152 x 152 x 23
6.5
30 to 40 203 x 102 x 30 152 x 152 x 30

40 to 50 * 152 x 152 x 37
0 to 10 4 to 4.5 203 x 102 x 23 152 x 152 x 23
10 to 20 203 x 133 x 25 152 x 152 x 23
20 to 30 203 x 133 x 30 152 x 152 x 30
30 to 40 * 152 x 152 x 37
40 to 50 * 203 x 203 x 46
*Beams should be designed by an engineer in accordance with Technical Requirement R5.
6.5.3 Steel grade and coatings

Steelwork shall be specified to provide sufficient strength, durability, and fire resistance.
The design should detail the method of fixing or connecting structural steelwork. The guidance given in this chapter applies to
steelwork which is to be bolted (using black bolts) or not connected.
Steelwork should be in accordance with the guidance in this chapter and:
z BS EN 10365 ‘Hot rolled steel channels, I and H sections. z BS EN 10056 ‘Structural steel equal and unequal
Dimensions and masses.’ or leg angles’.
To ensure adequate durability in the environment it will be exposed to steelwork should:
z have a protective coating system applied before being z comply with the level of fire resistance required by
delivered to site Building Regulations.
Where welding is to be carried out, the protective coating system specified by the designer should be used.
Further guidance on the protection of structural steel is given in BS EN ISO 12944 ‘Paints and varnishes. Corrosion protection
of steel structures by protective paint systems’ and BS EN ISO 14713 ‘Zinc coatings. Guidelines and recommendations for the
protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures’.
Decorative finishes should be compatible with the protective coat specification. The designer should determine compatibility
in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Chapter 9.5 ‘Painting and decorating’ contains further guidance for
decorative paint finishes to steelwork.
2024 I Steelwork 4
Chapter 6.5
Table 4: Environment categories for component groups in different locations and exposure conditions
Component group Location Description of exposure condition Environment categories
External Outside a home Above splash zone C4 or C5(1)
At ground level within splash zone C5(2)
(up to 150mm above ground)
Outside or basement Below ground level C5(2)
Internal Sub-floor void (3)
Unventilated C3
Ventilated C2
Internal Kitchen/bathroom, etc Moist humid conditions – protected against condensation C2
Kitchen/bathroom, etc Moist humid conditions – exposed to condensation C2
Rooms other than Warm dry C2
kitchen/bathroom, etc
In roof void Unheated dry C2
Internal/external Façade Embedded or partially embedded in building envelope C5(4)
Notes
1
For construction located within 500m of coastal shoreline.
2 Alternatively, steelwork may be encased in concrete.
3
For steelwork not in contact with the ground.
4 For steelwork in contact with, or embedded in an external masonry wall, for at the contact / embedment length.
Alternatively, guidance on suitable atmospheric corrosivity categories (C1 – C5) and appropriate protective coatings for domestic
construction may be based on the recommendations given on the website www.steelconstruction.info. A site specific
assessment is required in order to determine an appropriate classification level for the steelwork. A suitable protective coating
specification is to be determined by the designer in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s recommendations.
Table 5: Protective coatings for hot rolled structural steelwork for atmospheric corrosivity category (recommended for housing
applications only)
Atmospheric Surface Protective coating(1, 2, 3) Site or Making good of
corrosivity preparation(4) factory damaged areas of
Material Minimum coating thickness Number
and risk applied protective coating
(d.f.t.) / weight
(5) (6)
of coats
C1 N/A None required N/A N/A N/A N/A
6.5
Very low
C2 Thoroughly clean High build zinc 80 µm(8) 1 or 2 Factory Thoroughly wire brush
Low surface prior to phosphate epoxy damaged areas and
abrasive blast primer(7) build up coats using
cleaning to Sa 2½ the same materials
and to the same d.f.t.
C3 Thoroughly clean High build zinc 80 µm(8) 1 or 2 Factory Thoroughly wire brush
Medium surface prior to phosphate epoxy damaged areas and
abrasive blast (7)
primer, followed build up coats using
cleaning to by high build 120 µm 1 the same materials
Sa 2½ recoatable epoxy and to the same d.f.t.
micaceous iron
oxide (MIO) (200 µm in total)
C4 Hot dip 460 gms/m² 1 Factory To be determined
High galvanize to by the designer in
BS EN ISO 1461(9) accordance with
the manufacturer’s
recommendations
C5 Hot dip 710 gms/m² 1 Factory To be determined
Very high galvanize to by the designer in
BS EN ISO 1461(9) accordance with
the manufacturer’s
recommendations
Notes
here steelwork is to be given a decorative finish, the protective coat is to be compatible with the decorative finish.
1 W
Manufacturers’ recommendations should be followed.
2
Where steelwork is to be protected by intumescent paint for fire purposes, manufacturers’ recommendations should be followed.
3
All fixings and fittings to the structural steel elements are to be protected against corrosion in a manner that is both commensurate and compatible with the
protective coatings.
4
Surface preparation to BS EN ISO 12944-4.
5
Coating thicknesses given represent nominal dry film thickness (d.f.t.).
6
Thicknesses and weights shown represent the coating to be applied to each face of a steel section.
7
Epoxy primers have a limited time for over-coating. Manufacturers’ recommendations should be followed.
8
80 µm can be in one coat or as 20 µm pre-fabrication primer plus 60 µm post-fabrication primer.
9
Alternatively, use products manufactured from austenitic stainless steel in accordance with the recommendations of BS EN 1993-1-4:2006.
5 Steelwork I 2024
Chapter 6.5
Where shop-applied protective coatings have been damaged, the coatings should be made good on site prior to being built into
the works, as indicated in Table 5 ‘Making good of damaged areas’.
Where steelwork is to be welded, the protective coating system specified by the designer should be used.
Where steelwork is to be protected by intumescent paint for fire purposes, this should be in accordance with the
6.5.4 Installation and support

Steelwork shall be installed to achieve the required structural performance. Issues to be taken into
account include:
a) section size and grade detailed in the design b) steelwork support.
Section size and grade detailed in the design

When materials are delivered to site, they should be checked to ensure conformity with:
z engineer’s design, or z steelwork sizes in this chapter.
Steelwork support
Beam supports should not occur above window or door openings. Bearings for steelwork supported on masonry should be:
z 100mm minimum z clean, dry and level.
6.5.5 Padstones
Steelwork shall be supported by padstones where required to distribute point loads safely to the supporting
structure without undue movement or deflection.
Where a steel beam is supported by masonry, a padstone may be required to spread the load over a larger area to
prevent overstressing. Padstones should be in accordance with:
z the engineer’s design, or z the guidance given in this chapter.
Where the inner leaf of the cavity wall contributes to the overall thermal performance of the wall, padstones should:
6.5
z have similar thermal properties to the masonry used for the z not create a cold bridge.
rest of the inner leaf, or
Table 6: Size of padstones (for steel supporting partition walls)

Type of masonry for supported Thickness of wall supporting beam (mm) Minimum depth of padstone
partition (not more than 2.7m high 100 125 140 150 190 215 (mm)
and plastered both sides)
Minimum length of padstone (mm)
Dense masonry 215 190 185 180 165 155 150
Medium masonry 155 140 135 130 120 110 150
Lightweight masonry 95 85 80 75 70 70 150
Notes
1
Padstones are not necessary where the flange dimension of the beam exceeds the length of the padstone given in this table.
2 When steelwork is in line with the wall supporting it, ie, when acting as a lintel over an opening:
– the flange dimension of the beam should not be more than 50mm greater than the thickness of the supporting wall
– the minimum length of padstone should be 200mm
– the padstone depth should match the coursing of adjacent masonry
– the web of the beam should be over the centre of the wall.
3 The minimum length of steel bearing onto padstone should be 100mm.

2024 I Steelwork 6
Chapter 6.5
Table 7: Size of padstones (for steel supporting floors)

Effective area supported Minimum padstone size (mm)
(as used in Table 3) (m2) Thickness of wall supporting steel beam (mm)
Up to 105 105 to 155 156 to 216
Length Depth Length Depth Length Depth
Up to 10 95 150 80 150 70 150
10 to 20 185 150 160 150 140 150
20 to 30 275 150 240 150 210 150
30 to 40 365 215 320 150 280 150
40 to 50 455 300 400 215 345 215
Notes
1
Padstones are not necessary where the flange dimension of the beam exceeds the length of the padstone given in this table.
2 When steelwork is in line with the wall supporting it, ie, when acting as a lintel over an opening:
– the flange dimension of the beam should not be more than 50mm greater than the thickness of the supporting wall
– the minimum length of padstone should be 200mm
– the padstone depth should match the coursing of adjacent masonry, and
– the web of the beam should be over the centre of the wall.
Padstones should be formed in one unit with a minimum compressive strength of 10 N/mm2 from:
z in-situ concrete z clay bricks, or
z precast concrete z engineering bricks (when less than 215mm x 100mm).
z concrete blocks
6.5.6 Connections
Connections shall be chosen and installed to achieve the required structural performance.
Steelwork connections should:
z be in accordance with the guidance in this chapter, or z where other forms of connection (eg high strength friction
grip bolts) are required, be designed by an engineer in
6.5
accordance with Technical Requirement R5.
Only weld, cut or drill steelwork where it is required by the design.
Bolts for connections should comply with the design information and relevant British Standards, including:
BS 4190 ‘Specification for ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts’
BS EN 1011 ‘Welding. Recommendations for welding of metallic materials’
BS EN 14399 ‘High-strength structural bolting assemblies for preloading’
BS EN 1993-1-8 ‘Eurocode 3. Design of steel structures. Design of joints’
The connection methods detailed in this chapter are suitable for connecting steel beams used to support floor loads only, using
black bolts or welding.
Figure 3: Joints between beams of similar size Figure 4: Joints between beams of similar size
(beams 170mm to 230mm deep) (neither beam deeper than 170mm)
25mm 25mm
cleats from 70x70x6mm

cleats from 70x70x6mm rolled steel angle
35mm rolled steel angle =
80mm one on each side
one on each side 170mm
min. max.
170mm = cleats joined to beams
50mm cleats joined to beams to with 3No. M20 bolt with
with 6No. M20 bolt with 230mm washers or 6mm fillet
washers or 6mm fillet weld all round
35mm weld all round
10mm max.
10mm max.
Conditions for the use of this method are:

z beams should only support timber floors in accordance with z both beams have been chosen from Table 3
this chapter z beams do not differ in depth by more than 40mm.
Connections between steel sections should be designed by an engineer in accordance with Technical Requirement R5,
where the above conditions are not met.
7 Steelwork I 2024
Chapter 6.5
6.5.7 Examples
1 Using information about the supported wall and Table 1: Figure 5: Example Wall supported by steel beam:
■ 75mm thick
z load per metre run = 4.2kN/m. ■ medium density (1200kg/m3)
■ plastered both sides
2 U
sing the load per metre run, the span of the beam ■ 2.6m high.
and Table 2:
z suitable section size = 178 x 102 x 19 UB.
52 x 152 x 23 UC is not suitable as it is too wide for the

1
inner padstone/wall.
3 U
sing information about the wall supporting the beam
(100mm thick), the walls supported by the beam outer
padstone
(medium density block) and Table 6: 100mm
inner
Steel beam: padstone
■ opening 3.8m 100mm
■ min 100mm bearing at each end.
Results from example calculation:

Minimum padstone size 155mm long
150 mm deep
Outer padstone (beam at right angles to wall)
Minimum length 155mm long(1)
Minimum depth 150mm
Thickness 100mm, to match blockwork(2)
Inner padstone (beam in line with the wall)
Minimum length 200mm (see note 2 to Table 6)
Minimum depth 150 mm
Thickness 100mm, to match blockwork
Notes
1
This is greater than the flange dimension of the steel section obtained in 2 above – 102mm – therefore a padstone is required to distribute the load.
2
The actual length and depth of a padstone could be greater to suit masonry coursing.
6.5

Figure 1 Allowing for shrinkage of timber joists 6.5.2 2
Figure 2 Effective areas supported by steel beams 6.5.2 2
Figure 3 Joints between beams of similar size 6.5.6 6
(beams 170mm to 230mm deep)
Figure 4 Joints between beams of similar size 6.5.6 6
(neither beam deeper than 170mm)
Figure 5 Example 6.5.7 7
Chapter
6.6
Staircases
Requirements for staircases.
6.6.1 Compliance 01
6.6.3 Fire precautions 01
6.6.4 Lighting 02
6.6.5 Glazing 02
6.6.6 Structural design 02
6.6.7 Headroom and width 02
6.6.8 Design of steps 03
6.6.9 Landings 04
6.6.10 Guarding 04
6.6.11 Handrails 05
6.6.12 Staircases made from timber and
wood-based products 07
6.6.13 Concrete staircases 08
6.6.14 Steel staircases 08
6.6.15 Proprietary staircase units 08
6.6.16 Protection 08
1 Staircases I 2024
Chapter 6.6

Balustrading The collective name for the complete assembly of handrails, baserails, newels, spindles
and caps
Common (communal) stair A staircase serving more than one property
Continuous handrail Using lengths of connected handrail, the handrail flows over the tops of newel turnings,
creating a continuous run of handrail
Going The depth from the front to the back of the tread, less any overlap with the next tread above
Guarding A barrier that denies pedestrians or vehicle access to another area, eg the floor below
General access stair A stair intended for all users of a building on a day-to-day basis, as a normal route
between levels
Newel post A post at the head or foot of a flight of stairs, supporting a handrail
Nosing The edge of the tread projecting beyond the face of the riser
Pitch The angle between the pitch line and the horizontal
Pitch line A notional line connecting the nosings of all treads in a flight of stairs
Private stair A staircase wholly within one dwelling
Rise The vertical distance between the floors or landings connected by a flight. The individual rise is
the vertical measurement from the top of a tread to the top of the next tread
Riser The board that forms the face of the step
Spindle A vertical member, plain or decorative, that acts as the infill between the handrail and baserail
Staircase The entire structure relating to a stair, comprising steps, treads, risers, strings, balustrading,
landings, etc
Stairway The space/void provided for the stairs
Step The tread and riser combined
Tread The top or horizontal surface of a step
Utility stair A staircase used for escape, access for maintenance, or purposes other than moving between
levels on a day-to-day basis
Winders Radiating steps, narrower at one end, that are used to change the direction of stairs through 90°
or 180°
6.6
Staircases shall comply with the Technical Requirements.
Staircases which comply with the guidance in this chapter and relevant Building Regulations will generally be acceptable.
Further guidance can be found in BS 5395-1.

Staircase design and specification information should be issued to site supervisors, relevant specialist subcontractors and
suppliers, and include the following information:
z layout of stairs, landings and position of handrails z the type, size and length of fixings, their location and
z dimensions covering width, rise and going, number, and the type of wall and joists/trimmers the stair is
handrail height, etc being secured to
z landing design and structural support arrangement.
6.6.3 Fire precautions

Where required for fire escape, staircases shall be suitably designed.
Staircases should be designed to meet relevant Building Regulations, taking into account the fire resistance of components and
smoke ventilation. Further guidance can be found in BS 9991 and BS 9999.
2024 I Staircases 2
Chapter 6.6
6.6.4 Lighting Also see: Part 8
Staircases shall be adequately lit.
Artificial light sources should be provided to all staircases and landings within homes and common areas, and be controlled by
two-way switching. Alternatively automatic light-sensitive controls may be used.
6.6.5 Glazing Also see: GGF Safety and Security Glazing Good Practice Guide
Glazing near staircases (where contact could be made by someone using the stairs) shall be suitable for its
location.
Where staircases are located close to glazing, any glass below the minimum guarding height or within a zone where a user may
make impact, the glass should either not break or be designed to break safely. The glazing should be at least one of the following:
z protected by a balustrade or railing (balustrade spacing z toughened or laminated glass
should be a maximum of 75mm) z constructed using glass blocks.
6.6.6 Structural design

Staircases shall be properly supported and transmit loads to the supporting structure without undue
movement, deflection or deformation.
Staircases should be designed and comply with relevant Building Regulations and Table 1.
Table 1: Standards for stair construction

Type of staircase Relevant standard Additional guidance
Timber staircases BS 585: Part 1 or 2 The stair and landing support method and fixings should be
(straight flights, ¼ or ½ landings) specified
See also Chapter 3.3 ‘Timber preservation
(natural solid timber)’
Reinforced concrete staircases BS EN 1992-1-1 Should be designed by an engineer in accordance with
Technical Requirement R5
6.6
See also Chapter 3.1 ‘Concrete and its reinforcement’
Steel staircases BS EN 1993-1-1 See also Chapter 6.5 ‘Steelwork’
Proprietary staircases Proprietary staircases should meet Technical
Requirement R3
Timber stud walls may require additional noggings to provide appropriate fixing locations, and block walls should be sufficiently
robust to support the required loads and to receive appropriate fixings. It should be noted that stairs generally are unable to be
secured to metal stud walls.
Differential movement
When considering differential movement in relation to setting out, levels and finishes, allowances should be made for:
z casting/fabrication tolerances z creep and thermal movement
z deflection under load z storey height.
z foundation settlement
6.6.7 Headroom and width

Staircase openings shall be adequately sized.
Stairs should have a minimum of 2m clear head room (H) over the entire length and width of the stairway and landing, as
measured vertically from the pitch line or landing.
Staircases should have the minimum width as required by the relevant Building Regulations.
The overall floor opening should be checked off plan and on site prior to the stairs being installed:
z for size to accept the stairs, with sufficient clearance to z to allow for sufficient headroom.
enable installation
3 Staircases I 2024
Chapter 6.6
Where staircases form part of a means of escape, reference should be made to the relevant Building Regulations.
Figure 1: Minimum headroom
H
landing
pitch line
6.6.8 Design of steps Also see: BS 5395

Steps shall be constructed to allow the safe use of the staircase. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) pitch c) tapered treads and winders.
b) steps
Pitch
The maximum angle of pitch of a stairway should not exceed: Figure 2: Pitch line
z 42° for private stairs.

pitch line
The dimensions for maximum rise and minimum going should meet relevant
Private stairs should have a maximum rise 220mm and minimum going 220mm
6.6
(225mm minimum going in Scotland). angle of pitch
Stairs should be dimensioned so that the rise (R) and the going (G) is between
550mm and 700mm when using the equation:
2R + G.
Staircases should be accurately located and fixed with the string at the correct angle to ensure all treads are level.
Steps
In each flight:
z treads should be level z the treads should overlap by a minimum of 16mm (15mm in
z the rise and going of steps should be equal Scotland), where the riser is open
z account should be taken of the thicknesses of screeds. Floor z open risers should not permit a 100mm sphere to pass
finishes that reduce the bottom rise by a maximum of 12mm through and are not permitted for common stairs.
are acceptable
Figure 3: Equal risers Figure 4: Open risers

2024 I Staircases 4
Chapter 6.6
Where stairs are open to the weather, designers should consider that grip may be affected by inclement weather, and one of the
following should be specified:
z a non-slip finish z a non-slip insert to each tread.
Tapered treads and winders

The rise of tapered treads should be consistent throughout the Figure 5: Measuring tapered treads (staircase less than 1m wide only)
staircase. The going should be:
z uniform and no less than the going of the associated equal
straight flight spacing
centre line
z a minimum of 50mm at the narrowest point
z measured in accordance with the relevant
6.6.9 Landings centre line
Landings shall allow safe use of the staircase.
Landings should be: Landings should typically be:

z constructed in accordance with the design z provided at the top and bottom of every flight
z properly supported and transmit loads to the supporting z level and at least the same depth and width as the width of
structure without undue movement, deflection or deformation the stair.
z framed to provide full support and solid fixings for the tops of
Figure 6: Landings next to doors (bottom of stairs only)
flights, nosings, newels, apron linings, etc
bottom landing
Door swings should not obstruct landings. A door may open
across the bottom landing of private stairs where the swing is a
minimum of 400mm from the first tread.
6.6
400mm min.
Pivot windows should not obstruct the landing area or stair

flight when they are opened.
6.6.10 Guarding
Staircases shall have adequate guarding and be constructed to reduce the risk of being climbed or
falling through.
Guarding:
z is required where the drop is more than 600mm at any point z may be required where a stair abuts an opening window,
along the open sides of stairs and landings to comply with relevant Building Regulations.
Guarding should be:
z provided along the full length of the flight, including landings z a solid wall or balustrading
z capable of resisting forces, in accordance with Table 2 and z positioned at a height, in accordance with Table 3.
BS 6180
5 Staircases I 2024
Chapter 6.6
Table 2: Minimum horizontal imposed loads for parapets, barriers and balustrades for residential usages
Type of Example use Horizontal uniformly Uniformly distributed load A point load applied
occupancy distributed line load (kN/m) applied to the infill (kN/m2) to part of the infill (kN)
Domestic and All areas within or 0.36 0.5 0.25

residential serving exclusively
activities one single family
dwelling including
stairs, landings etc
but excluding external
balconies and edges of
roofs
Other residential ie, 0.74 1.0 0.5
houses of multiple
occupancy and
balconies, including
juliette balconies and
edges of roofs in single
family dwellings
Table 3: Guarding height

Type of stairs Flights – minimum guarding height (mm) Landings – minimum guarding height (mm)
Private stairs (England, Wales, 900 900
Northern Ireland and the Isle of Man)
Private stairs (Scotland) 840–1000 900
Common stairs 900 1100
Balustrading should:
Figure 7: Protective guarding
z be fixed securely
100mm diameter spheres cannot pass through
z not be climbed easily by children, eg have no horizontal foot
holds which would enable climbing
6.6
z not permit a 100mm diameter sphere to pass through

any opening. (In Scotland and Northern Ireland the space
between a rise in a stair and the lowest edge of the
protective barrier may be larger than 100 mm, provided the
lowest edge of the barrier is not more than 50 mm above,
and parallel to, the pitch line of the stair).
Where guardrails or balustrades are long, newel posts may not
be sufficient to transfer the horizontal forces to the structure,
100mm diameter spheres cannot pass
and intermediate posts may be required. The method of fixing through (exceptions apply in Scotland
newels should be specified, eg through-bolted to joists or and Northern Ireland)
alternative supports to an engineered design.
6.6.11 Handrails Also see: BS 5395-1
Handrails shall be correctly located and fixed to provide a firm handhold.
A handrail is required for flights of stairs that rise over 600mm. Figure 8: Minimum clearance gap
The handrail (throughout the full length) should:
z be securely fixed and located in accordance with the design
z be a vertical distance of 900mm–1000mm (or
840mm–1000mm in Scotland) above the pitch line
z have a 25mm minimum clearance from any surface
z ensure a firm handhold
z have rounded ends or be returned to the wall to reduce the 25mm
risk of clothing being caught min.
z be continuous, and unobstructed

z have a smooth finish and be free from rough or sharp edges,
including brackets or fixing heads.
2024 I Staircases 6
Chapter 6.6
For tapered treads/winders, where handrails to the outside of the stairs are provided, they should provide a safe handhold for the
full rise of any stairs with a total rise greater than 600mm.
In England, Wales and Scotland, where the staircase has between one and four tapered treads/winders, the newel post may be
used to provide a safe handhold. In Northern Ireland, a handrail should be fitted to the outside of all tapered stairs.
Figure 9: Handrail provision Figure 10: Handrail provision
handrail
handrail
additional handrail not needed additional handrail not needed
landing
additional handrail not needed where

a split newel provides a hand hold handrail
additional handrail needed handrail
6.6
In England, Wales and Scotland, a handrail is not required on the outside of the stairs if the newels provide a safe handhold.
There should be a minimum distance between newels of 100mm to provide a hand grip.
additional handrail not needed handrail additional handrail not needed handrail
7 Staircases I 2024
Chapter 6.6
Figure 15: Handrail provision

Where a handrail is needed, it should be continuous for the
whole rise to avoid the need to change hands. At corners, the
handrails do not need to join if they extend into the corner and where a double newel
provision is made for an easy transfer of a handhold from one is not full height but provides
a single newel for handhold
handrail to another. purposes, no additional
handrail on the outside
of the stairs is required;
in Northern Ireland,
a handrail should be
fitted to the outside of
all tapered stairs
Also see: Chapter 3.3, British

Woodworking Federation
Stair Scheme Installation
Guide Timber Stairs and
6.6.12 Staircases made from timber and wood-based products BS 585 Parts 1 and 2
Staircases made from timber products shall be suitable for their intended purpose and of suitable quality.
Timber staircases should be adequately fixed to the supporting structure.

Stair strings should be fixed to the wall in accordance with guidance supplied by the manufacturer or published by the British
Woodworking Federation ‘Stair Scheme Installation Guide Timber Stairs’.
Where light gauge steel framing (LSF) is intended to be used to support staircases, the stud manufacturer should be consulted to
ensure the framing can adequately support the staircase loads.
The wall string should be cut to sit over the floor joist to land evenly on the floor or landing.
6.6
The top nosing should be:

z level with the floor decking Figure 16: Staircase fixing
z screwed into the joist. nosing securely seated and
fixed level with floor decking
Newel posts should be plumb, and all components, including
strings, treads and risers, newel posts, balustrading and
handrails, fixed securely. Particular attention should be given to
fixing winders.
Strings should be glued to the newel posts and secured with
string securely
dowels or screws. fixed to wall
Staircase fixing requirements should not impede any fire or

acoustic requirements for the supporting structure.
Landings should be:
z constructed in accordance with the design z framed to provide full support and solid fixings for the tops of
z properly supported and transmit loads to the supporting flights, nosings, newels, apron linings, etc.
structure without undue movement, deflection or deformation
Timber external staircases, landings and any necessary support should be:
z preservative treated or have adequate natural durability in z constructed in accordance with guidance from the Timber
accordance with Chapter 3.3 Decking and Cladding Association ‘Code of Practice -
Raised timber deck structures on new homes’.
Finished joinery should be free from splits, knocks and other damage which would impair its structural performance or finish.
Nails should be punched below the surface of the wood and stopped. Further guidance can be found in BS 1186-2.
2024 I Staircases 8
Chapter 6.6
6.6.13 Concrete staircases Also see: Chapter 3.1 and 3.2

Staircases made from concrete shall be suitable for their intended purpose and be of suitable quality.
Concrete staircases should be designed and manufactured in accordance with BS EN 1992-1-1.

Precast construction
Precast staircases should comply with BS EN 14843, and account should be taken of:
z accurate location and levelling of units z load paths.
In-situ construction
Guidance for in-situ concrete can be found in Chapter 3.1 ‘Concrete and its reinforcement’.
Shuttering for concrete elements or connections should be constructed to ensure a consistent rise and going.
Chairs or spacing blocks should be used to provide cover to reinforcement in accordance with Chapter 3.1.
Formwork should be struck in accordance with the design information.
Design information on the spacing of bolt fixings for balustrades or handrails should be followed.
Balustrading for concrete staircases should be:
z grouted into the preformed holes or pockets z bolted to brackets cast into the concrete.
Care should be taken when using expanding fixings near the edges of concrete.
6.6.14 Steel staircases Also see: Chapter 6.5

Staircases made from steel shall be suitable for their intended purpose and of suitable quality.
Steel staircases should be designed in accordance with BS EN 1993-1-1.

For steel staircases:
z the manufacturer’s assembly and erection instructions should z protective coatings should be provided in accordance with
be available and followed Chapter 6.5 ‘Steelwork’.
6.6
z the supporting structure should be constructed within relevant
tolerance limits set for the steel staircase
6.6.15 Proprietary staircase units

Proprietary staircases shall be suitable for their intended purpose and of suitable quality.
Proprietary staircases and associated components should comply with the Technical Requirements.
6.6.16 Protection
Stairs shall be free from damage and unsightly marks.
Staircases should be protected to prevent damage and

Figure 17: Timber staircase protection
unsightly marking during construction.
When storing staircases, they should be:
z stacked on bearers
z suitably protected from the weather.
Timber staircases should be fixed in place only when the

building is weathertight.
Staircases, stair treads, nosings, balustrades and handrails may
be protected with timber strips, plywood or building paper.
Timber staircases may be also affected by residual moisture
contained within a concrete floor, an isolating DPC may be
provided directly below the staircase to offer protection.
9 Staircases I 2024
Chapter 6.6

Figure 1 Minimum headroom 6.6.7 3
Figure 2 Pitch line 6.6.8 3
Figure 3 Equal risers 6.6.8 3
Figure 4 Open risers 6.6.8 3
Figure 5 Measuring tapered treads 6.6.8 4
Figure 6 Landings next to doors 6.6.9 4
Figure 7 Protective guarding 6.6.10 5
Figure 8 Minimum clearance gap 6.6.11 5
Figure 9 Handrail provision 6.6.11 6
Figure 16 Staircase fixing 6.6.12 7
Figure 17 Timber staircase protection 6.6.16 8
6.6
Chapter
6.7
Doors, windows,
and glazing
Requirements for doors, windows, and glazing, including where
coupled door and window frame assemblies are contained within
a single storey. Coupled door and window frame assemblies
(including spandrel panels) which are:
z one storey or more in height, or
z not contained between a structural floor and ceiling
should be designed in accordance with Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain
walling and cladding’.
This chapter does not provide guidance on compliance with
Building Regulations. Work shall comply with all relevant
Building Regulations covering:
z weathertightness z safety from impact
z thermal performance z ventilation
z fire safety z security.
6.7.1 Compliance 01
6.7.3 In-service performance 02
6.7.4 Coupled door and window
frame assemblies 04
6.7.5 Glazing 06
6.7.6 Security 08
6.7.7 Timber doors and windows 09
6.7.8 Non-timber doors and windows 10
6.7.9 Ironmongery 11
6.7.10 Material storage and protection 11
6.7.11 Installation 12
6.7.12 Completed work 13
1 Doors, windows and glazing I 2024
Chapter 6.7
For the purposes of this chapter the following terms and definitions apply:
Air and vapour Continuous layer of material with a high resistance to water vapour to control the movement of air and
control layer water vapour
Air barrier An air barrier controls air leakage into and out of the building envelope. For framed walls, this is usually in
the form of a membrane
Breather membrane Continuous layer of material with a low resistance to water vapour to allow vapour movement but
impermeable to water
Building envelope External wall or roof construction that separates the habitable parts of a building from the
external environment
Coupled door and A glazed wall formed by combining pre-assembled doors and (or) windows. The window frames may
window frame be supported directly by brackets fixed to the primary structure or may be supported by horizontal and
assemblies vertical framing members
Doors A complete door assembly, assembled on site or delivered as a complete assembly, consisting of the door
frame, door leaf or leaves, essential hardware and any integral side panel or fanlight
Fixings Component that is used to secure separate parts of a window or door to each other, to secure an item of
hardware to a window or door part, or to secure a completed window or door into the structure of
a building
Frames Outer frame, mullion, and transom components of doors and windows
Glazing Glass component of a door or window
Glazing material A material which provides a bedding for the glass and forms a joint between the glass and frame. The
term includes glazing compounds, sealants, putties, glazing strips and tapes, and gaskets
Impregnated foam Impregnated foam weatherproofing strip flexible, elastic, preformed material that constitutes a linear seal
tapes when compressed
Insulating glass unit Assembly consisting of at least two panes of glass, separated by one or more spacers, hermetically
IGU sealed along the periphery, mechanically stable and durable
Sealant Wet applied compound applied in an unformed state to a joint which seals it by adhering to appropriate
surfaces within the joint
Structural opening Opening in an external wall or roof into which a window or door is to be installed
System Company who designs, manufactures, and supplies a system
manufacturer
6.7
Thermal bridging Occurs when part of a thermal element has significantly higher heat transfer than the materials
surrounding it
Weathertightness Performance in respect of air permeability, watertightness, and resistance to windload
Window Building component or multiple components for closing an opening in a wall or roof that may admit light and/
or provide ventilation
Doors, windows and glazing shall comply with the Technical Requirements.
Doors, windows and glazing which comply with the guidance in this chapter will generally be acceptable.

Design and specification information should be issued to site supervisors, relevant specialist subcontractors and suppliers.
2024 I Doors, windows and glazing 2
Chapter 6.7
6.7.3 In-service performance

Doors and windows shall be designed and specified to ensure adequate in-service performance. Issues to
be considered include:
a) weathertightness d) accommodating thermal movement
b) minimising thermal bridging e) operation and strength
c) continuity of the air barrier f) durability.
Weathertightness
The following documents should show weathertightness performance classifications of doors and windows:
z CE/UKCA marking in accordance with BS EN 14351-1 z appropriate third-party product certification.
The performance classification levels should be appropriate for the site exposure conditions.
For doors and windows into low rise housing, the suitability of weathertightness performance classification levels for the site
exposure conditions may be determined according to the procedure in BS 6375-1.
Higher levels of performance should be specified for doors and windows into medium and high-rise buildings as remedial works
in the event of water leakage are likely to be more difficult. Windows in high rise buildings may also be exposed to higher levels
of wind driven rain.
The satisfactory weathertightness performance of doors and windows also depends on appropriate detailing of interfaces with
the surrounding building envelope. The interface between any window or door and its surround should be a robust detail that is
easy to understand at the construction stage. It should be evident how it should be constructed and should be easy to inspect
and/or test.
The head of frames should be set back from the edge of the lintel/cavity tray, and sills should project at least 25mm beyond the
wall face.
Where doors and windows are incorporated into structural openings of timber framed walls, breather membranes should be used
to provide a secondary water barrier to prevent entrapping water vapour and causing interstitial condensation within the wall.
Where accessible thresholds are required, the door should be protected from precipitation by a canopy, a drainage slot or
channel adjacent to the cill provided and a platform with a slope of between 1:60 and 1:40 to ensure water run-off.
6.7
In Scotland, Northern Ireland, and areas of very severe exposure, ‘check reveals’ should be used. The frame should be set back
behind the masonry outer leaf with a minimum 12mm overlap to the frame.
Notes
1. Many manufacturers supply doors and windows which exceed the recommended classifications in BS 6375-1, commonly class 9A (600Pa) for watertightness and
class 4 (600Pa) for air permeability. The use of doors and windows with higher levels of performance will reduce the risk of leakage.
2. Experience suggests that testing for watertightness at 25% of the design windload gives satisfactory performance provided that the installation is carried
out correctly.
Figure 1: Water bar and weatherboard to external doors Figure 2: Throating to window cill – cavity masonry wall
throating clear
wall face sealant
water bar and weatherboard

provided for external doors
Chapter 6.7
Figure 3: Throating to window cill – stone cill Figure 4: Check reveal
DPC turned up
at back and
ends of sill Sealant
Minimising thermal bridging

The interface between any door/ window and its surround should be designed to minimise the effects of thermal bridging and risk
of condensation.
In cavity masonry construction, insulated cavity closures should be built into the structural opening and cavity wall insulation
tightly abutted to prevent gaps in the insulation.
Doors and windows should be positioned within the structural opening to maintain continuity of the insulation layer of the
building envelope.
In cavity masonry walls, doors and windows should be positioned with an overlap between the inner face of the frame and the
inner face of the outer leaf. The overlap should be between 30mm and 50mm for windows and 50mm for doors - so that the door
6.7
or window is contiguous with the insulation layer of the external wall.

Note
1. For doors, reinforced cavity closures may need to be used at thresholds.
Continuity of the air barrier

To ensure continuity of the air barrier, door and window frames should connect to the primary air barrier and be appropriately
sealed. For doors and windows incorporated into the structural openings of framed walls, the air barrier is likely to be formed
by the air and vapour control layer. The air and vapour control layer should be taped and sealed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Accommodating movement
Expansion and contraction of frames is to be expected due to temperature fluctuations. To prevent frames from distorting, a gap
around the perimeter of the frame and the structural opening should be provided.
The gap size depends on the frame material and the structural opening size and should be selected in accordance with Table 1.
Table 1: Recommended gaps between the frame and structural opening

Material Structural opening size and recommend gap size
Up to 1.5m From 1.5m to 3.0m From 3.0m to 4.5m
PVC-U - white 10 10 15
PVC-U - non-white 15 15 22
Timber 10 10 10
Steel 8 10 12
Aluminium 10 10 15
Dimensions in mm
Chapter 6.7
The perimeter gap should be sealed with a suitable sealant which is able to resist water penetration and prevent air leakage
whilst accommodating differential movement between the structural opening and the frame.
For doors and windows incorporated into the structural openings of timber frame walls, opening, and closing gaps should
be provided around the frames in accordance with chapter 6.2 to allow for the thermal movement of frames and structural
movement of the timber frame.
Silicone sealants should be applied to a closed cell polyethylene foam backing strip to control the depth of the joint, force
the sealant against the sides of the joint during application and aid tooling of the sealant. The depth of sealant should be
at least 5mm.
For checked reveals, the sealant should form a fillet with an overlap of 6mm to the frame and 10mm to the brick outer leaf.
When impregnated foam tapes are used for perimeter sealing, over sealing with a wet sealant is not usually required.
Manufacturer instructions and product certifications should be followed.
Note
Further guidance on sealants is provided in the following standards:
z BS 6093 Design of joints and jointing in building construction - Guide
z BS 6213 Guide to selection of construction sealants
z BS EN ISO 11600 Building construction – jointing products – classification and requirements for sealants.
Operation and strength

Doors, windows, and their fittings should be adequate to withstand operational loads. Characteristics and classes of performance
should be in line with the relevant class of window or doorset as defined in Annex A of BS 6375-2.
Durability
Subject to appropriate maintenance, doors and windows should have a minimum service life of 40 years. Component parts such
as operating handles, gaskets and locking mechanisms may need replacing within the service life.
6.7.4 Coupled door and window frame assemblies

Coupled door and window frame assemblies shall be designed and installed to provide adequate in-service
performance. Issues to be considered include:
6.7
a) system design d) movement accommodation
b) weathertightness e) thermal performance
c) structural integrity f) site testing for watertightness.
System design
Coupled door and window frame assemblies should be supplied as a standard system comprising only of components designed
and detailed by the system manufacturer.
Weathertightness
Jointing details should be designed on the principle of two lines of defence with flexible inner and outer seals. The cavity
between the seals should be drained to remove any water that bypasses the outer seals.
Weathertightness of coupling joints may be adversely affected by deflections under windload. Weathertightness of coupling joints
should be demonstrated by appropriate laboratory testing of an assembly.
Testing should be undertaken by a UKAS accredited test laboratory. During testing, there should be no leakage onto the internal
face of the system at any time.
On completion of the test there should be no standing water in locations intended to remain dry. Any remedial modifications to
the system that are made to pass the test should be reported and incorporated into the installed system.
To avoid difficulty in interpreting the results it is good practice to agree which materials and zones within the system may be
allowed to get wet.
Alternative jointing details should not be used unless they have been proven by testing. The interface between the assembly
and the surrounding building envelope should be a robust detail that is easy to understand at the construction stage. It should be
evident how the coupling and interface details are to be constructed and should be easy to inspect and/or test.
Chapter 6.7
Structural integrity
Coupled door and window frame assemblies should be designed as an engineered system to support their self-weight, resist and
safely transfer imposed loads back to the supporting structure.
Windows tested and classified to BS EN 14351-1 are subjected to wind load tests, however, as the perimeter of the window is
supported by the test box, the response of the perimeter frame to wind load will not have been fully assessed.
The perimeter frame of the window used in an assembly needs to be able to resist the wind load in bending or the joining
component needs to provide support and contribute to the overall stiffness of the system in resisting deflection arising from wind
pressure and other loadings including accidental impact.
For window assemblies, it is recommended that the main structural members of the assembly satisfy class B for which the
allowable deflection is span/200 under the design wind load in both positive and negative directions. This is the limit which
applies for curtain wall mullions in BS EN 13830.
Movement accommodation
As window assemblies are larger than individual windows, the amount of movement to be accommodated is also likely to greater.
Coupling joints and interfaces with the surrounding construction should be designed to accommodate thermal expansion/
contraction of the frames and movement of the structure, whilst remaining weathertight.
Thermal bridging
Coupling joints, brackets, and fixings may create additional heat flow paths resulting in low surface temperatures, increasing the
risk of surface condensation.
Coupling joints and interfaces with the supporting structure should be designed to minimise the effects of thermal bridging and
risk of condensation including the appropriate use of thermal breaks.
The thermal assessments of linear coupling joints and interfaces with the supporting structure should be checked to assess the
risk of surface condensation.
The assessments should confirm that, under normal operating conditions, condensation does not form on the visible interior
surfaces of any framing members or glazing.
6.7
Site testing for watertightness

To check the workmanship of the installation has not compromised the performance of the system in any way, on site
watertightness testing of coupling joints should be carried out by a UKAS accredited test laboratory using the CWCT hose test
method for water penetration.
A minimum of five percent by length of all critical coupling joints should be tested. Where coupled assemblies of the same type
are to be installed across a development, a minimum of two installations should be tested.
For phased developments, the minimum testing applies to each phase.
Testing should be carried out on the first installation on any development or phase before progressing with further installations.
On-site testing may be increased in areas of the UK that are expected to be subjected to severe weather exposure.
If on site watertightness testing reveals problems with workmanship, then these problems should be addressed, and additional
testing carried out to confirm satisfactory watertightness performance is achieved before progressing further with the installation.
Chapter 6.7
6.7.5 Glazing
The method of glazing shall ensure adequate in-service performance. Issues to be considered include:
a) standards d) glazing systems
b) performance requirements e) condition before installation
c) insulating glass units f) site glazing.
Standards
Glazing and materials should conform to relevant British Standards as shown in Table 2.
Table 2: Relevant British Standards for glazing

Standard/ Specification Number Standard/ Specification Name
BS EN 1279-5 Glass in buildings - Insulating glass units - Part 5: Product standard
BS EN 572-9 Glass in buildings – Basic soda lime silicate glass products – Part 9: Product standard
BS EN 14449 Glass in building – Laminated glass and laminated safety glass – Product standard
BS EN 12150-2 Glass in building – Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass – Part 2: Evaluation
of conformity/ Product standard
BS EN 1096-4 Glass in building – Coated glass – Part 4: Evaluation of conformity/ Product standard
Performance requirements
Glazing should be selected to meet applicable design and performance requirements in accordance with BS 6262-1.
The type, thickness and size of glass should be selected to provide an appropriate degree of safety, considering the intended use.
Safety glass for use in critical locations (including glazed shower/bath screens) should be marked as follows:
z manufacturers trademark or name z the impact performance classification eg 1,2,3 to

z the standard number for the type of glass eg BS EN 12600.
BS EN 14449 laminated glass
6.7
Note
Further guidance on safety marking of glass is provided in technical guidance note TGN 6.7/17.
The design loads acting upon the glazed area should be determined in accordance with BS EN 1991-1-1, BS EN 1991-1-3 and
BS EN 1991-1-4. The type, thickness and size of glass should be specified to suit the design wind loads.
To improve thermal performance and minimise condensation formation around the perimeter zone of glass, glazed units with
spacer bars of low thermal conductivity should be specified.
Insulating glass units

Insulating glass units should:
z be CE/UKCA marked in accordance with BS EN 1279 z have a dual seal or a single seal of hot melt butyl and
z hold appropriate third-party certification eg BSI Kitemark desiccant in at least one long and one short section of the
z be checked to ensure they comply with the design, including spacer bar.
glass type, gas filling, edge seal type and dimensions
Note
Further guidance on third-party certification schemes and marking of insulating glass units is provided in technical guidance note 6.7/ 16.
Chapter 6.7
Glazing systems
Drained and vented systems
Drained and vented systems should be used for site fixed insulating glass units (IGUs) and where units greater than 1m2 are
used. These systems allow moisture that enters the glazing channel between the frame and the edge seal of the insulating glass
unit to drain away and prevent long-term moisture contact with the edge seal.
To achieve the optimum service life of IGUs, the following basic principles should be adopted in the design of drained
and vented systems:
z Removal of moisture: Frames should have adequate drainage and ventilation through holes, slots, or channels for the rapid
removal of any water that may enter the glazing rebate
z Clearance: A minimum 5mm edge clearance should be provided between the glass edge and frame to prevent frame-to-
glass contact, ensure drainage, and allow for differential thermal expansion of the IGU and frame. For very well drained and
ventilated frames, the clearance can be reduced for the side and top rebates, to a minimum of 3mm in the case of glass
lengths up to 2m
z Edge cover: A minimum edge cover of 12mm should be provided to keep the spacer below the sight line and to protect the
edge seal from sunlight
z Rebates: The rebate height should allow for tolerances in both the frame size and IGU size to ensure the minimum edge
clearance and minimum edge cover requirements are met. The width of the rebate platform should provide the required
front, back clearances, and ensure sufficient contact of the glazing beads onto the platform. The width of the rebate platform
should be equal to the sum of the front and back clearances, the nominal thickness of the IGU, the width of the bead, and an
allowance for the tolerances on IGU and bead thicknesses
z Beads: Beads should have an installed height equal to the rebate height. Timber beads for timber frames should have a width
in contact with the rebate platform greater than the height, to enable firm fixing of the bead to be achieved. The bottom bead
should project slightly past the rebate edge. Screw fixings for timber beads should be located a minimum of 75mm from each
corner and spaced at no more than 200mm centres. If pins are used, they should be twice the height of the beads and located
a minimum of 50mm from each corner and spaced at no more than 150mm centres. Beads for metal and plastic frames
should be fixed in accordance with manufacturers recommendations to securely retain the IGU and the glazing seals
z Compatibility: Glazing material should be compatible with frame finishes and glazing unit seals in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations. Linseed oil-based putty should not be used in the installation of laminated glass or
insulating glass units.
6.7
Fully bedded systems

Fully bedded systems are acceptable for factory glazing only where the insulated unit is less than 1m2, and should:
z comply with the relevant parts of BS 8000, BS 6262 and z not have gaps around the perimeter of the insulating
BRE Digest 453 glass unit.
Condition before installation

When insulating glass units are stored prior to being installed they should be:
z protected from direct sunlight to avoid thermal stress z provided with adequate support to prevent distortion
z stored in dry conditions or bowing.
A visual inspection of glass and insulating glass units should be undertaken for signs of defects which could lead to premature
failure. Signs of defects include.
z water accumulation between sheets z edge damage or scratching.
Chapter 6.7
Site glazing
Site glazing should be in accordance with the frame design and undertaken by installers who are appropriately trained and
conversant with good glazing practice.
The following features should be checked before glazing:
z drainage and ventilation holes or slots are present, are z a minimum 5mm edge clearance is provided around the
of a suitable size, and are free from obstructions such as permitter of the insulating glass unit to prevent glass to
fabrication swarf, etc frame contact, to ensure drainage and allow for differential
z ventilation and the free flow of water to holes and slots are thermal expansion
not impeded by setting and location blocks, external bead z gaskets or strip materials supplied cut to size are the correct
retention lips, or glazing materials length to ensure that there are no gaps at the corners.
z as water can be present in the glazing rebate, screw fixing
holes and frame joints are adequately sealed against
water ingress
Note
Further guidance on system design and glazing considerations for insulating glass units is provided by the Glass and Glazing Federation.
6.7.6 Security
Doors, door frames, windows and locks shall be designed and specified to improve their resistance to
unauthorised entry. Issues to be considered include:
a) locking functionality of main entrance doors e) glazing
b) locking functionality of secondary access doors f) framed wall constructions
c) opening limitation device g) door and frame connections
d) view outside h) windows.
Locking functionality – main entrance doors

All homes
Entrance doors of individual homes should be fitted with securely fixed locks or a multi-point locking system, which:
6.7
z has at least one thousand differs z has a hardened steel bolt, or inserts, to prevent sawing
z if burst open, would not pull out without breaking the door or z has a latch and deadlocking facility.
its frame
Locking devices fitted to main entrance doors should permit emergency egress without the use of a key when the home
is occupied.
Homes with an alternative means of escape via a door

z the door should be held closed on a latch z enhanced security can be achieved by providing the facility
z deadlocking should be operated by a key externally and to deadlock the internal thumb turn when leaving the home
a handle or thumb turn internally (BS 8621 locks and PAS unoccupied (BS 10621 locks and PAS 10621 multi point
8621 multi point locks meet these requirements) locks meet these requirements).
Homes opening directly to the outside without an alternative means of escape via a door
z the door should be held closed on a latch z deadlocking should be operated by a key externally and
a handle or thumb turn internally (BS 8621 locks and PAS
8621 multi point locks meet these requirements).
Homes without an alternative means of escape opening onto a communal access

z the door should be held closed with a roller bolt or a latch z deadlocking should be operated by a key externally and
operated by a handle internally and externally a handle or thumb turn internally (BS 8621 locks and PAS
8621 multi point locks meet these requirements).
Chapter 6.7
Locking functionality – secondary access

Side hung doors should:
z be held closed on a latch operated by a handle both z have bolts securely fixed at both the top and bottom of the
internally and externally door on the internal opening edge (where multi point locking
z have a deadlocking facility which can be operated by a key systems are used, bolts may be omitted).
both internally and externally; alternatively, a thumb turn
may be used internally (BS 3621 or BS 8621 (thumb turn)
locks and PAS 3621 or PAS 8621 (thumb turn) multi point
locks meet these requirements)
Sliding doors should:

z be secured by way of a multi-point locking system with a z have an anti-lift device fitted so that doors cannot be lifted
minimum of three locking points, incorporating mushroom- from their frame from the outside.
headed bolts, hook bolts or shoot bolts that engage into the
jamb or head, and sill of the door frame
Opening limitation device

The main entrance door of individual homes should be fitted with a securely fixed opening limitation device.
In sheltered accommodation, opening limitation devices should not inhibit emergency access. Alternative methods for residents
to identify and communicate with visitors without opening their door should be considered.
View outside
There should be a means of giving a wide-angle view of the area immediately outside the main entrance door of individual
homes. Acceptable methods include:
z a through-door viewer z closed-circuit camera and displays (not connected to a TV).
z clear glazing either to part of the door or a
convenient window
6.7
Glazing
Any glazing which, if broken, would permit release of the internal handle or thumb turn by hand or arm entry should be laminated.
Framed wall construction

Lightweight timber or steel framed walls next to doors fitted with locks operated internally with a handle or thumb turn should
incorporate either timber sheathing (minimum 9mm thick) or expanded metal, 600mm wide and the full height of the door.
Door and frame connections

Connections between door and/or frame components which can be easily released from the outside should not be used. This
includes accessible screw connections.
Windows
Opening lights on ground floor windows and others which are readily accessible from the outside may be fitted with lockable
devices which cannot be released without a key.
6.7.7 Timber doors and windows Also see: Chapter 3.3 and 9.5
Timber and wood-based materials shall be of suitable quality and be naturally durable or suitably treated.
a) quality assurance c) drying shrinkage
b) classification and use d) preparation and finish.
Quality assurance
Manufacturers of timber doors and windows should hold appropriate third-party certification to assure the fitness for purpose and
quality of their products.
Chapter 6.7
Classification and use

Timber windows should:
z conform to BS 644 z have a minimum 15mm rebate where double glazed units
are to be installed.
Timber and wood-based materials should conform with the relevant requirements of BS EN 942 as shown in Table 3.
Table 3: Relevant requirements of BS EN 942

Component Requirement
Glazing beads European Redwood
Casements and sash windows J classes
All other elements Table 1 of BS EN 942
In England, Wales, Northern Ireland, and the Isle of Man, planted stops are not permitted on frames to external doors.
External doors should be 42.5mm minimum (44mm nominal) in thickness.
Drying shrinkage
To minimise drying shrinkage, the moisture content of joinery, when fixed, should not exceed the value given in Table 4.
Table 4: Moisture content of joinery

Joinery items Moisture content (%)
Windows and frames 17
Internal joinery:
Intermittent heating 15
Continuous heating 12
Near to a heat source 9
Note
On delivery, the moisture content should be within +/-2% of the values specified.
6.7
Preparation and finish
The following elements of timber doors and windows should be of naturally durable timber or timber pre-treated against fungal decay:
z external door frames z timber surrounds to metal windows
z windows z external doors, other than flush doors.
Where material is:
z to be painted, it should be primed before fixing z to be stained, it should have the first coat applied before
delivery to site.
Compatibility between preservative treatment or primer, with glazing compounds, sealants, and finishes, should be checked with
the relevant manufacturers.
Prefabricated items should conform with the relevant parts of BS 1186: Part 2, including:
z the fit and construction of joints and moving parts z gluing and laminating
z the construction of finger joints z surface finishes.
6.7.8 Non-timber doors and windows

Doors and windows of materials other than timber shall be of suitable quality. Issues to be
considered include:
a) quality assurance b) standards.
Quality assurance
Manufacturers of non-timber doors and windows should hold appropriate third-party certification to assure the fitness for purpose
and quality of their products.
Chapter 6.7
Standards
Non-timber doors and windows should conform to relevant standards as shown in Table 5.
Table 5: Relevant standards for non-timber doors and windows

BS 4873 Aluminium alloy windows and doorsets. Specification
BS 6510 Steel-framed windows and glazed doors. Specification
BS 7412 Specification for windows and doorsets made from unplasticized polyvinyl chloride
(PVC-U) extruded hollow profiles
BS EN 12608-1 Unplasticized polyvinylchloride PVC-U profiles for the fabrication of windows and doors.
Classification, requirements, and test methods - Non-coated PVC-U profiles with light
coloured surfaces
BS 7414 Specification for white PVC-U extruded hollow profiles with heat welded corner joints for
plastics windows: materials type B
BS 8529 Composite doorsets. Domestic external doorsets. Specification
6.7.9 Ironmongery
Ironmongery shall be suitable for the intended use.
Ironmongery should be provided in accordance with the design. Materials used for critical functions should comply with the
appropriate standards given in Table 6:
Table 6: Relevant British standards for ironmongery
BS EN 1935 Building hardware. Single-axis hinges. Requirements and test methods
BS 3621 Multipoint locking assemblies Keyed egress
BS 8621 Multipoint locking assemblies’ Keyless egress
BS 10621 Multipoint locking assemblies’ Dual mode egress
BS EN 1906 Building hardware. Lever handles and knob furniture. Requirements and test methods
6.7
BS EN 12209 Building hardware. Locks and latches. Mechanically operated locks, latches and locking
plates. Requirements and test methods
BS EN 1154 Building hardware. Controlled door closing devices. Requirements and test methods
Ironmongery for windows should be supplied as follows:

z hinges and fastenings of opening lights of windows should z where the windows are required by Building Regulations
be of a type which prevents them from being opened from to have background ventilation, they may be fitted with
the outside when in the closed position trickle vents or some other means of providing ventilation
which is controllable and located to avoid undue draughts.
Windows with ‘night vent’ positions are not accepted as
meeting this requirement.
Where doors to rooms containing a bath or WC have a securing device, it should be of a type capable of being opened from the
outside in an emergency.
In sheltered accommodation, additional special provisions may be needed for all door locks, limiters, and other fasteners, to
enable wardens to gain access when necessary.
6.7.10 Material storage and protection

Joinery, door and window components shall be adequately protected against damp and decay. Issues to be
considered include:
a) storage b) cut ends.
Storage
Where joinery is stored on site, precautions should include:
z avoiding wetting during unloading z storing internal joinery in a weather protected condition.
z stacking external joinery on bearers off the ground and
covering with waterproof material
Chapter 6.7
Cut ends
Where pre-treated joinery is cut or adjusted on site, Figure 5: Treatment of cut ends
the affected surfaces should be retreated with
appropriate preservative in accordance with the
6.7.11 Installation
Doors and windows shall be correctly located and securely fixed. Issues to be considered include:
a) construction tolerances e) door hinges
b) workmanship and fixing f) window boards
c) hanging doors and opening lights g) bay windows.
d) general ironmongery
Construction tolerances
Construction tolerances for structural openings, doors, and windows should be in accordance with chapter 9.1 A consistent
approach to finishes.
Workmanship and fixing

Doors and windows should be installed plumb and square within the structural opening in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. The completed installation should be without twist, racking or distortion of any member so that they operate correctly.
Wherever practical all four sides of the frame should be secured as follows:
6.7
z corner fixings should be between 150mm and 250mm from z there should be a minimum of two fixings on each jamb and
the external corner sill, with intermediate fixings at centres no greater than
z fixings should be a minimum of 150 mm from the centre line 600 mm.
of a mullion or transom
Notes
1. The number and spacing of fixings at the head depend upon the frame width and frame material.
2. The manufacturer’s instructions should be followed.
Internal door frames and linings should:

z match the thickness of the wall, partitions and finishes z be securely fixed, to prevent curling.
z be blocked off walls wherever possible, to allow for
full architraves
Timber trim should be:

z sufficiently wide to mask joints z fixed to minimise movement and shrinkage.
Architraves should be:

z parallel to frames and linings z fixed with an equal margin to each frame member
z accurately mitred, or scribed, to fit neatly and tightly z fixed securely.
When fixing components:

z nails should be punched below the surface of the timber z damage should be avoided.
with holes stopped
Hanging doors and opening lights

Opening lights and door leaves should:
z hang square within the frame or lining z fit neatly with minimum gaps.
Where a standard flush door is reduced in height, the bottom rail should be replaced where necessary.
Chapter 6.7
General ironmongery
Hinges and other ironmongery should be:
z housed neatly and flush with the surface z supplied with a full set of matching screws.
Locks should:
z turn easily z have keyholes which are properly aligned.
z not be fitted in mortises too tightly
Door hinges
To reduce twisting, doors should be hung on hinges in accordance with Table 7.
Table 7: Summary of appropriate hinges for different door types

Type of door Hinges
External 1½ pairs x 100mm
Internal door 1 pair x 75mm
Fire door In accordance with the door manufacturer’s recommendations
Airing or cylinder cupboard 1½ pairs x 75mm
Window boards
Window boards should:
z have a flat and level top surface z be of a moisture resistant grade where MDF is used.
z be fixed close to the frame and adequately secured against
twisting and other movement, particularly any back slope
towards the frame
Bay windows
Bay windows should be:
6.7
z adequately supported and secured to the structure to z properly linked to DPCs at reveals.
prevent sagging or twisting
6.7.12 Completed work

Completed work shall be free from damage.
Work should be to an appropriate level of finish for other trades. Finishing trades should not be relied upon to correct
untidy work.
Completed work should be protected as follows:
z internal doors should be kept covered with polyethylene or z scaffolding and walkways should be kept away from frames
original wrapping z joinery should be protected from paint splashes and
z door frames and linings should be protected with timber other damage
strips or plywood by a minimum of 1m above skirting level z temporary coverings should be removed after all other work
z thresholds and windowsills should be covered has been completed and before handover.

Figure 1 Water bar and weatherboard to external doors 6.7.3 2
Figure 2 Throating to window cill – cavity masonry wall 6.7.3 2
Figure 3 Throating to window cill – stone cill 6.7.3 3
Figure 4 Check reveal 6.7.3 3
Figure 5 Treatment of cut ends 6.7.10 12
Chapter
6.8
Fireplaces, chimneys
and flues
Requirements for fireplaces, chimneys and flues.
6.8.1 Compliance 01
6.8.3 Solid fuel – fireplaces and hearths 02
6.8.4 Solid fuel – combustion air 03
6.8.5 Solid fuel – flue pipes 03
6.8.6 Solid fuel – chimneys 04
6.8.7 Solid fuel – outlets and terminals 05
6.8.8 Gas – fireplaces and hearths 06
6.8.9 Gas – combustion air 07
6.8.10 Gas – flue pipes 07
6.8.11 Gas – chimneys 08
6.8.12 Gas – outlets and terminals 10
6.8.13 Oil – fireplaces and hearths 11
6.8.14 Oil – combustion air 12
6.8.15 Oil – flue pipes 12
6.8.16 Oil – chimneys 12
6.8.17 Oil – outlets and terminals 13
6.8.18 All – fireplaces and hearths 14
6.8.19 All – fireplace surrounds 14
6.8.20 All – flue pipes 15
6.8.21 All – flue liners 15
6.8.22 All – flues 16
6.8.23 All – chimneys 17
6.8.24 Masonry 19
6.8.25 Mortar 19
6.8.26 DPC 19
6.8.27 Flashings 19
6.8.28 Terminals 20
6.8.29 Flue testing 21
6.8.30 Further information 21
1 Fireplaces, chimneys and flues I 2024
Chapter 6.8
Introduction
In this chapter, the following terms are used:
ridge terminal flue and chimney terminal flue and chimney terminal
flue pipe in roof space
separating wall flue
flue lining
roof space
roof space roof space

gas flue blocks
as part of the wall
masonry chimney masonry chimney

containing a flue containing a flue
first floor
first floor first floor
gas appliance
flue pipe
free standing
solid fuel open hearth
appliance
6.8
party wall
external wall external wall
Fireplaces, chimneys and flues shall comply with the Technical Requirements, working fireplaces shall
be designed to ensure efficient operation of the appliance, an adequate supply of combustion air and
protection for the building fabric. False chimneys ie, GRP shall comply with R3 and passed satisfactory
assessment by an appropriate independent technical approvals authority accepted by NHBC.
Fireplaces, chimneys and flues which comply with the guidance in this chapter will generally be acceptable.
Installations should be provided with an adequate supply of combustion air:
z as stipulated by statutory requirements and z where a fixed combustion appliance is provided, appropriate
building regulations provisions shall be made to detect and give warning to the
z to ensure satisfactory combustion of fuel and the efficient release of carbon monoxide.
working of flues and chimneys
Where a chimney or flue is provided:
z it should be continuous from the hearth or appliance to the z a notice plate containing safety information about any
outside air hearths and flues should be securely fixed in an unobtrusive
but obvious position within the home.
The design of homes which incorporate chimneys and flues should ensure that all details of the associated elements are
considered and appropriate provisions made. This should include the following:
z fire risk and separation z terminals and outlets
z hearths and the constructions adjacent to hearths z limitations on the appliance or open fire which can
and flues be installed, and fuel which can be used.
z chimneys and flues, including projections through
the building
2024 I Fireplaces, chimneys and flues 2
Chapter 6.8
Good workmanship and effective supervision during construction are essential to ensure that fireplaces, chimneys and flues
function correctly in use.
Fireplaces, chimneys and flues should be designed and installed to minimise the risk of the building catching fire. The design of
timber frame construction should ensure that combustible material is:
z suitably separated from heat sources, or z shielded, where permitted.

information and be distributed to the appropriate personnel.
Designs and specifications should be issued to site supervisors, relevant specialist subcontractors and suppliers, and include the
following information:
z position and size of hearths, fireplaces, chimneys z details of materials to be used
and flues z limitations of the type of appliance or open fire that can be
z position and proximity of combustible materials installed and fuel that can be used
z position and details of flue terminals or outlets z details of the tests required on chimneys and flues,
z position of DPCs and flashings including who is responsible for carrying them out.
z construction details of fireplace openings and
chimney connections
6.8.3 Solid fuel – fireplaces and hearths

Fireplaces and hearths shall safely accommodate the fire or appliance for which they are designed.
a) provision of hearths and recesses b) separation of hearths from walls.
Where appliances are not provided, it is important to construct fireplaces and hearths to suit the appliance most likely to be fitted.
Provision of hearths and recesses
6.8
Constructional hearths should be: 150mm min.
plan view
z provided for open fires or closed combustion appliances in
150mm
accordance with Building Regulations and the min.
z a minimum of 840mm in any direction for
freestanding appliances
z the adjacent diagram shows the minimum dimensions from
the appliance to the edge of the hearth.
225mm min.
300mm for closed
min.* appliances
*applies to open and closed appliances which

can be used when the appliance door is open
Recesses for open fires or closed combustion appliances:

z should be provided to comply with Building Regulations and z where the opening is less than 500mm x 550mm,
the manufacturer’s recommendations should have a 200mm diameter flue (or square section flue
z should be lined with a fire back or fire bricks of an equivalent area)
z where the opening is larger than 500mm x 550mm,
should have a flue equivalent to 15% of the recess opening.
Chapter 6.8
Separation of hearths from walls

Walls near appliances and their hearths should be:
z located to minimise the risk of fire z non-combustible, or the appliance should not be positioned
closer to the wall than as shown in the following diagram.
300mm
min.
1.2m
min
t
150mm 150mm
min. x
min.
hearth
appliance
75mm min. solid non-combustible material
t = thickness of solid non-combustible material as follows:
x less than 50mm = t (200mm min.)
x more than 50mm = t (75mm min.)
6.8.4 Solid fuel – combustion air

Installations shall be provided with an adequate supply of combustion air.
Solid fuel appliances should have an air supply from external air, either directly or indirectly, to comply with statutory
requirements and the manufacturer’s recommendations. Full details of ventilation requirements for all types of appliances are
contained in relevant Building Regulations.
Table 1: Combustion air to solid fuel appliances
Solid fuel up to 50kW output
Open Closed appliance
6.8
England, Wales and the Isle of 50% of throat area(1) If design air permeability is less than 5.0m3/h,
Man then 300mm2/kW for first 5kW of appliance is the
rated output and 850mm2/kW for the balance of
appliance rated output.
If design air permeability is greater than 5.0m3/h
then 850mm2/kW of appliance is the rated output
Scotland For fireplaces up to 450mm wide Above 5kW rating, 550mm2/kW
(measured between fire bricks), 1500mm2.
For fireplaces wider than 450mm,
manufacturer’s details should be followed
Northern Ireland 50% of throat area(1) Up to 6kW rating, 550mm2.
Over 6kW, add 550mm2 for each kW above 6kW
Notes
1 Where the fire has a canopy, the open air vents should be 50% of the flue area.
6.8.5 Solid fuel – flue pipes

Flue pipes shall be correctly designed to connect an appliance to a flue safely. Issues to be taken into
account include:
a) size, direction and jointing b) separation from combustible materials.
Size, direction and jointing

Flue pipes should have a cross-section which is equal to the outlet of the appliance they serve and should not be inclined more
than 45° from vertical. A horizontal section no longer than 150mm may be used to connect a back outlet appliance to a flue.
Socket joints should be fitted socket up.
Chapter 6.8
Separation from combustible materials

Flue pipes should be separated from combustible materials in accordance with Building Regulations, and:
z by a minimum 200mm of non-combustible material z be shielded by a non-combustible shield at least 4xD
z by an air space which is a minimum of 4xD, or in width, and extended at least 1.5xD either side of the
flue pipe; the shield should be at least 12mm from the
combustible material, and the flue pipe at least 1.5xD from
the combustible material.
plan view plan view
12mm min.
1.5xD
3xD
non-combustible
shield
non-combustible
1.5xD shield
D
min.
D 4xD
1.5xD
flue pipe
flue pipe
requirement in Northern Ireland
requirement elsewhere
(D = external diameter of the flue pipe)
6.8.6 Solid fuel - Chimneys

Chimneys shall incorporate flues capable of safely conducting products of combustion to the external air.
The structure shall be capable of supporting the flue lining and shall provide adequate protection to the
adjacent structure. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) separation from adjacent spaces and materials c) resistance to frost attack
6.8
b) flue liners d) resistance to weather.
Flues for solid fuel appliances should:

z not serve more than one appliance z where possible, be vertical (where this cannot be achieved
z be of a sufficient cross-section to remove all combustion there should not be more than two bends; bends should not
gases from the open fire or appliance they serve be more than 45° from vertical)
z be a minimum of 4.5m high (measured above the
fireplace opening).
Where a chimney is not directly over an appliance or opening, an accessible soot box should be formed.
Factory-made insulated chimneys should:
z be designed in accordance with BS EN 1856 and z be installed in accordance with BS EN 15287 or be
BS EN 1859 assessed in accordance with Technical Requirement R3.
z have a minimum operating life of 30 years
Separation from adjacent spaces and materials

Combustible materials close to any brickwork or blockwork chimney (not applicable to floorboards, skirting, dado or picture rails,
mantelshelves or architraves) should be:
z a minimum of 200mm from the inside surface of the flue, or z in all areas except Scotland, 40mm from the face of
the chimney.
Where the home is of timber frame construction, full details of the separation proposal should be included in the design.
Materials used for chimneys should be capable of resisting fluctuating temperatures up to 1100°C.
Flues should be formed within masonry walls. The walls should be:
z a minimum of 100mm thick, or z a minimum of 200mm thick where separating the flue from
another compartment of the same building, another building
or another home.
Where there is more than one flue in a chimney, the flues should be separated by a minimum of 100mm of masonry.
Chapter 6.8
Flue liners
Flue liners should:
z have rebated or socketed joints installed with the socket or z be reasonably smooth on the inside
internal rebate facing uppermost z be correctly jointed with mortar (the space between the
z be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s liners and the brickwork should be filled with weak insulating
recommendations concrete unless the manufacturer recommends
z be non-combustible an alternative)
z be properly jointed at their junctions with the starter block, z have any changes in direction formed using purpose-made
or lintel, and the outlet terminal bends (cut pipes are not acceptable).
Resistance to frost attack

Where clay brick chimneys are above roof level and are not protected by a capping with an adequate overhang and drip (see
Clause 6.8.7c), the chimney should be constructed using F2,S1 or F2,S2 bricks to BS EN 771. They should be bedded in mortar,
either:
z 1:½:4 to 4½, cement:lime:sand, or z 1:3 or 4, cement:sand with plasticiser.
Where external chimneys built with clay bricks of F2,S1 designation are rendered, sulfate-resistant cement should be used.
In Scotland, external facing brickwork should be constructed using frost-resistant bricks.
Resistance to weather
In areas of severe or very severe exposure, cavities should be continuous up to roof level. This applies to:
z cavities below roof level where the stack forms part of an z the complete chimney structure, including the
external cavity wall fireplace recess.
In areas of severe or very severe exposure, and where the chimney breast is gathered in, the lower projecting masonry should
be protected against damp penetration with a suitable capping and cavity trays (see Clause 6.8.28b).
Above the roof:
z chimney DPCs should link with flashings; where the roof is z face brickwork should not have recessed joints
steeply pitched (where the difference in level between the z where lead trays are in contact with mortar, they should be
6.8
lower and higher intersection of the chimney with the roof protected with a thick coat of bitumen or bitumen paint
will be more than 450mm) two DPCs should be used at z where chimneys are to be rendered, render should be in
suitable levels accordance with Chapter 6.11 ‘Render’.
z plastic DPCs are not suitable
6.8.7 Solid fuel – outlets and terminals

Outlets and terminals shall be adequately separated from combustible material and other parts of the home,
enable the satisfactory discharge of flue gases and prevent the ingress of damp. Issues to be taken into
account include:
a) outlet position c) chimney cappings.
b) terminals
Outlet position
The flue will generally function more effectively where the A B C D
outlet is in a low pressure zone, taking account of
prevailing winds.
A low pressure zone generally occurs:
z on the lee side and at the ridge of a pitched roof
z close to the windward side of a flat roof.
Where the efficiency of the flue may be affected by adjacent

trees or buildings in the ‘low pressure’ zone, the design
should account for their effects.
Where down draughts occur, eg on hillsides or near tall trees
and buildings, the height of the flue outlet may have to be
increased or a fan-assisted flue installed.
Chapter 6.8
Table 2: Positions of outlets for solid fuel appliances(4)

Point where flue passes through weather surface(1 & 2) Minimum clearance from the flue outlet
A Up to 600mm from ridge Over 600mm above the ridge
B Elsewhere on a roof (whether pitched or flat) A minimum of 2.3m horizontally from the nearest point on the
weather surface and:
z a minimum of 1m above the highest point of intersection of
the chimney and the weather surface, or
z as high as the ridge
C Below (on a pitched roof) or within 2.3m horizontally from A minimum of 1m from the top of the opening
an openable rooflight, dormer window or other opening(3)
D Within 2.3m to adjoining or adjacent building, whether or A minimum of 600mm above the adjacent building
not beyond the boundary(3)
Notes
1 The weather surface is the building’s external surface, such as its roof, tiles or external walls.
2 A flat roof has a pitch less than 10°.
3 The clearance given for A or B, as appropriate, will also apply.
4 Flue outlet positions for solid fuel appliances to easily ignited roof coverings need to comply with ADL diagram 18.
Terminals
Terminals should be:
z purpose-made components z sealed to the flue liner.
z built into the top of the masonry to a minimum of 125mm or
0.25x the length of the terminal, whichever is the greater
An acceptable terminal can be achieved where the top flue liner projects a minimum of 20mm above the chimney capping.
Chimney cappings
Chimney cappings should:
z be weathered, monolithic slabs
z be designed to protect the masonry below purpose-made
chimney
z project a minimum of 50mm, and have a drip 30mm from cappings
6.8
the face to shed water clear of the masonry. min.
50mm
min.
30mm
Cappings may be designed as a cover slab supported on

piers (to reduce rain penetration into the top of the flue). The
height of the supporting piers should be sufficient to allow a
free opening equivalent to a minimum of 2x the area of the flue lining acting as flue terminal
flue outlet.
Brick chimneys which do not have this type of capping should
be constructed using frost-resistant masonry.
6.8.8 Gas – fireplaces and hearths

Fireplaces and hearths shall safely accommodate the fire or appliance for which they are designed. Issues
to be taken into account include:
a) separation from combustible materials b) provision of hearths and recesses.
Gas appliances should be:

z fitted by a Gas Safe Register (GSR) installer, and z comply with the Gas Safety (Installation and Use)
Regulations 1998.

Appliances should not be closer than 75mm to combustible material. This applies to:
z the back, sides and top of the appliance z draught-diverters.
It does not apply:

z where a 25mm thick non-combustible shield is used, or z to gas-fired appliances with UKCA (CE, UKNI), installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions,
which clearly indicate such separation is not necessary.
Chapter 6.8
Provision of hearths and recesses

Solid fuel effect appliances
Hearths and recesses for solid fuel effect appliances should be:
z in accordance with BS 5871 z where the appliance has been tested by an approved
z in accordance with the requirements for solid fuel authority, in accordance with the
appliances (see Clause 6.8.3), or manufacturer’s instructions.
Back boilers
Hearths for back boilers should be constructed of solid non-combustible materials, a minimum of:
z 125mm thick, or z 25mm thick and placed on non-combustible supports which
are a minimum of 25mm high.
Other gas appliances plan view 150mm min.
Hearths for other types of appliance should be constructed of
non-combustible materials which: 150mm
min
z are a minimum of 12mm thick
z comply with the plan dimensions for back boilers.
appliance
In some cases, the provision of a hearth is not required,
eg where the flame or incandescent material is at least 225mm
above the floor.
For all forms of gas appliances the hearths should be marked
front of 225mm min.
at the edges to: appliance from front
of appliance
z provide a warning to the home owner
hearth for back boiler
z discourage combustible floor finishes, such as carpet,
from being laid too close to the appliance (this can be
achieved by introducing a change in level).
6.8.9 Gas – combustion air

6.8

Table 3: Combustion air to gas appliances
Gas(1) up to 70kW net input
England, Wales and the Isle of Man If design air permeability is less than 5.0m3/h/m2, then 500mm2/kW of the appliance is the
rated (net) input.
If design air is permeability greater than 5.0m3/h/m2), then 500mm2/kW of the appliance is
the rated input (net) over 7kW
Scotland As BS 5440-2 (as England and Wales)
Northern Ireland Up to 8kW rating, 450mm2.
Over 8kw, add 450mm2 for each kW above 8kW
Notes
1 Decorative fuel effect gas appliances should have a provision for combustion air complying with the relevant part of BS 5871 and relevant Building Regulations.
(Generally, a minimum of 10,000mm2 of purpose-provided ventilation is required. Air vents should be direct to the external air or to an adjacent room or internal
space, which has an air vent or vents to the external air of at least the same free area. Air vents should have an aperture dimension no smaller than 5mm).
6.8.10 Gas – flue pipes

Flue pipes shall safely connect an appliance to a chimney, or a flue to a terminal. Issues to be taken into
account include:
a) size, direction and jointing b) separation from combustible materials.
Size, direction and jointing

Gas flue pipes should:
z not have adjustable draught control z be fixed in accordance with the
z have a free area which is at least the same size as the manufacturer’s recommendations
outlet of the appliance z be fixed socket up and correctly aligned
z not be horizontal (does not apply to balanced flues) z where the pipes are long, have support directly below each
z be vertical where possible (where this is not possible, socket, with a maximum spacing of 1.8m.
pipes should not be more than 45° from vertical)
Chapter 6.8
When connecting flue pipes to flue blocks and ridge terminals,

purpose-made connections should be used.
support beneath each socket
1.8m max.
support beneath each socket
flue pipe serving a gas appliance

Single wall flue pipes should be separated from combustible materials by:
z a minimum of 25mm z a non-combustible sleeve with a minimum 25mm air space
z a non-combustible casing material with at least half the fire around the pipe, where it passes through a wall, floor or roof.
resistance of the separating wall or floor, where they pass
through a compartment wall or compartment floor, or
Where double-walled pipes are used, the 25mm separation distance may be measured from the outside of the inner pipe.
6.8.11 Gas – chimneys

Chimneys shall incorporate flues capable of safely conducting products of combustion from an appliance
to the external air. The structure shall be capable of supporting the flue and providing adequate protection
to adjacent materials. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) flues and flue liners b) chimneys.
6.8
Flues and flue liners
Flue blocks for use with gas appliances should comply with BS EN 1858 (Concrete) or BS EN 1806 (Clay).
Table 4: Gas flue sizes
Serving Minimum flue size
Non fan-assisted Gas fire Either:
individually flued gas z a circular flue with a minimum 12000mm2 cross-sectional area
burning appliances up (125mm diameter), or
to 70kW input, excluding z a rectangular flue with a minimum 16,500mm2 cross-sectional
balanced flue area and a minimum dimension of 90mm.
Any other z at least the cross-sectional area of the outlet from
the appliance.
Inset live or decorative Open fire within a fireplace z either a circular or rectangular flue with a minimum dimension
gas fuel effect appliances opening up to 500mm x 550mm of 175mm.
Rigid flue liners should comply with BS EN 1856 or be as described in Clause 6.8.6. Flexible flue liners are not acceptable in a
new build.
Chimneys
Chimneys for gas appliances must not incorporate an adjustable draught control.
Masonry chimneys
Flues within masonry chimneys should be in accordance with the requirements relevant to flues for solid fuel appliances
(see Clause 6.8.6b).
Brickwork or blockwork chimneys for gas appliances should, at minimum, have the same level of fire resistance as each
compartment wall or floor which it forms part of, or passes through. The compartment wall may form the chimney wall where it is
a masonry material.
Chapter 6.8
Terminals to masonry chimneys should: ridge terminal

z where proprietary, comply with BS EN 1856, BS EN 1858 and
the appliance manufacturer’s recommendations alternative outlet
position
z where proprietary products are not used, have a free opening twin wall flue pipe
with support at
area a minimum of 2x the area of the flue; there should be 1.8m centres
openings (6-25mm in diameter) distributed uniformly around 45° max.
the terminal or on two opposite faces.
roof space offset transfer block
Flue block chimneys
Flue block chimneys can only be used for certain types of gas
appliances and should be:
z compliant with BS EN 1858 or BS EN 1806 with a minimum
performance class of FB4 N2
z constructed using units suitable for the appliance plain block
z constructed, jointed and weatherproofed in accordance with

the design and the manufacturer’s instructions first floor
z correctly bonded to the flanking masonry

45° max.
z clean and sealed lateral offset
block
z checked for suitability, before connecting any appliance.
Connections between flue blocks and ridge terminals should

be made:
lintel block
z in accordance with the design
may be one-
z using the correct fittings and supports as specified by the or two-piece set
starter block
manufacturers of the flue blocks, flue pipe and ridge terminal. ground floor
Gas flue blocks are at least 140mm wide. Where this is wider
than the wall leaf: ridge tile adaptor
6.8
line of ridge tiles

z the extra thickness should be incorporated by increasing the
overall width of the cavity support brackets at
max.1.8m centres
z the flue block should be installed flush with the inside of the flue pipe
cavity and project into the room as a false chimney breast, or
offset transfer block
z where the cavity is reduced, the flue block should be
protected by a vertical DPM supported by a layer of
non-combustible insulation, in accordance with the
vertical DPM
non-combustible insulation plasterboard on dabs full or partial fill false breast

(not polystyrene) non-combustible insulation
(not polystyrene)
cavity wall with insulation and vertical DPM
Flue blocks should not be:

z built into separating walls unless it can be shown that the z plastered; a plasterboard lining with an air space or
wall has adequate sound resistance non-combustible insulation behind it should be provided
(insulated dry lining may be unsuitable in this situation
unless separated from the flue block).
Chapter 6.8
Factory-made insulated chimneys

z be assembled, erected, anchored and protected in z comply with BS EN 1856 and be installed in accordance
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions with BS 6461, BS EN 15287-1 or BS 5440.
6.8.12 Gas – outlets and terminals

Outlets and terminals shall be adequately separated from combustible material and other parts of the home,
and prevent the ingress of damp.
Relevant standards for gas appliances, chimneys, and flue terminals
BS 5440 pt1 Flues.
AD J Combustion appliances and fuel storage.
IGE/UP/7 Gas installation in timber framed and light steel framed buildings.
Table 5: Minimum separation distances for gas outlets (mm)

Location Balanced flue Open flue
Natural draught Fanned draught Natural draught Fanned
draught
A Below an opening(1) Appliance rated 300 (3)
300
heat input (net)
0-7kW 300
>7-14kW 600
>14-32kW 1500
>32-70kW 2000
B Above an opening(1) 0-32kW 300 300 (3)
300
>32-70kW 600
C Horizontally to an opening(1) 0-7kW 300 300 (3)
300
>7-14kW 400
>14-70kW 600
6.8
D Below gutters, soil pipes or drain pipes 300 75 (3)
75
E Below eaves 300 200 (3)
200
F Below a balcony or car port roof 600 200 (3)
200
G From a vertical drainpipe or soil pipe 300 150 (4) (3)
150
H From an internal or external corner, or to a 600 300 (3)
200
boundary alongside the terminal(2)
I Above ground, roof or balcony level 300 300 (3)
300
J From a surface or a boundary facing the 600 600 (3)
600
terminal(2)
K From a terminal facing the terminal 600 1200 (3)
1200
L From an opening in the car port into the 1200 1200 (3)
1200
building
M Vertically from a terminal on the same wall 1500 1500 (3)
1500
N Horizontally from a terminal on the same wall 300 300 (3)
300
P From a structure on the roof N/A N/A 1500 (for a ridge terminal) N/A
2000 (for any other
terminal, as given in BS
5440-1)
Q Above the highest point of intersection with N/A Site in accordance Site in accordance with 150
the roof with manufacturer’s BS 5440-1
instructions
Notes
1 An opening here means an openable element, such as an openable window, or a fixed opening, such as an air vent. However, in addition, the outlet should not
be nearer than 150mm (fanned draught) or 300mm (natural draught) to an opening into the building fabric formed for the purpose of accommodating a built-in
element, such as a window frame.
2 Boundary as defined in paragraph 0.4. of Approved Document J: smaller separations to the boundary may be acceptable for appliances that have been shown to
operate safely with such separations from surfaces adjacent to, or opposite, the flue outlet.
3 Should not be used.
4 This dimension may be reduced to 75mm for appliances of up to 5kW input (net).
Chapter 6.8
Where a flue outlet is not serving a balanced flue appliance, it should be:
z situated at roof level, so that air can pass freely across it z fitted with a flue terminal where the flue diameter is less
at all times than 170mm (larger diameter flues should be fitted with a
z a minimum of 600mm from openings terminal where required by Building Regulations).
flues should not

penetrate this area
600mm P
600mm
Q
Q
Q 2000mm
D,E
N
B
I
M
C
boundary
F A
J H H
K
H L I
G
Precautions should be taken, where appropriate, to prevent damp penetration in accordance with the requirements for resistance
to frost attack and weathering for solid fuel appliances (see Clause 6.8.6).
All flues which bridge the cavity of an external wall should have a means of preventing moisture crossing the cavity,
eg a moisture drip collar set in the centre of the cavity. For timber frame construction the guidance in IGE/UP/7 should be
adopted in relation to non combustible sleeving and to maintain the integrity of the vapour control layer.
6.8
Where cavity trays and weepholes are used they should be in line with chapter 6.1.
sheet metal plate

moisture drip collar sloping at 45° across
the cavity, located on top
of the flue assembly
and extending approx.
25mm each side
appliance appliance
circular flues rectangular flues
6.8.13 Oil – fireplaces and hearths

Fireplaces and hearths shall safely accommodate the fire or appliance and be suitably separated from
combustible materials.
Where the temperature of the hearth below the appliance is:
z likely to exceed 100°C, or the temperature is not known, z unlikely to exceed 100°C, the appliance may stand on a
precautions should be in accordance with the requirements rigid, non-combustible imperforate sheet of material without
for hearths for solid fuel appliances (see Clause 6.8.3). a constructional hearth.
Where appliances are likely to have back or side temperatures exceeding 100°C, hearths and shielding should be in accordance
with the requirements for gas appliances (see Clause 6.8.8).
Chapter 6.8
6.8.14 Oil – combustion air

Table 6: Combustion air to oil appliances
Oil up to 45kW output
England, Wales and the Isle of Man 550mm2/kW rating for an appliance in a room or space
Scotland
Northern Ireland Up to 6kW rating, 550mm2. Over 6kW, add 550mm2 for each kW above 6kW
6.8.15 Oil – flue pipes

Flue pipes shall safely connect an appliance to a chimney.
Flue pipes should:
z have a free area which is at least the same size as the z be vertical where possible, or no more than 45° from
outlet of the appliance vertical; a horizontal section, less than 150mm, long may be
used to connect a back outlet appliance to a flue.
6.8.16 Oil – chimneys

Chimneys shall incorporate flues capable of safely conducting products of combustion from an open fire
or other appliance to the external air. The structure shall be capable of supporting the flue lining and shall
provide adequate protection to adjacent materials. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) stability, size and direction c) flue liners
b) separation from adjacent spaces, materials and d) resistance to frost/chemical attack
combustible materials e) resistance to weather.
Stability, size and direction

Flue pipes should:
6.8
z have a free area which is at least the same size as the z where possible, be vertical (where this cannot be achieved,
outlet of the appliance there should be no more than two bends, which should not
be more than 45° from vertical).
z be designed in accordance with BS EN 1856 and BS EN z have a minimum operating life of 30 years
1859 and installed in accordance with BS EN 15287, or be z where they are part of a component system, comply with
assessed in accordance with Technical Requirement R3 BS EN 1856 and installed in accordance with BS 5440.
Separation from adjacent spaces, materials and combustible materials

Table 7: Protecting buildings from hot flues for flue gas temperatures not more than 250°C
Flue within: Protection measures
Connecting flue pipe Flues should be a minimum of 25mm from any combustible material. This is measured
from the outer surface of the flue wall and the inner wall of multi-walled products.
Factory-made chimney complying Where flues pass through a combustible wall, floor or roof (other than a compartment wall,
with BS EN 1856 floor or roof) separation can be achieved through the use of a non-combustible sleeve
around the flue pipe or chimney with a 25mm air space to the relevant flue wall.
The air space could be wholly, or partially, filled with non-combustible insulating material.
Factory-made chimney complying Refer to appropriate British Standards and manufacturers’ recommendations.
with: BS EN 1856
Masonry chimney Provide a minimum of 25mm of masonry between flues and any combustible material.
Flue block chimney Provide flue block walls a minimum of 25mm thick.
Flue assemblies for Flues passing through combustible walls should be surrounded by a minimum
roomed-sealed appliances of 50mm insulating material.
Provide a minimum clearance of 50mm from the edge of the flue outlet to any combustible
wall cladding.
Chapter 6.8
Flue liners
As for gas flue pipes where the flue gases are unlikely to exceed a temperature of 250°C (see Clause 6.8.10). As for solid fuel
flue pipes where the flue gases are likely to exceed a temperature of 250°C or the temperature is not known (see Clause 6.8.5).
Flexible flue liners are not acceptable for new build.
Resistance to frost/chemical attack

Resistance to frost attack as for solid fuel (see Clause 6.8.6).
Resistance to weather
Resistance to weather as for solid fuel (see Clause 6.8.6).
6.8.17 Oil – outlets and terminals

Outlets and terminals shall be adequately separated from combustible material and other parts of the home.
Balanced flue terminals should be positioned to allow free intake of air to the appliance.
Where terminals are of masonry construction, they should be in accordance with the requirements for solid fuel appliances
(see Clause 6.8.7b), otherwise they should be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Table 8: Minimum separation distances for oil terminals

Location of outlet(1) Appliance with Appliance with
pressure jet vaporising
burner (mm) burner (mm)
A Below an opening(2 & 3) 600 Should not be used
B Horizontally to an opening (2 & 3)
600
C Below a plastic/painted gutter, drainage pipe or eaves, where combustible 75
material protected(4)
D Below a balcony or a plastic/painted gutter, drainage pipe or eaves without protection 600
to combustible material
6.8
E From vertical sanitary pipework 300

F From an external or internal corner, or from a surface or boundary alongside the 300
terminal
G Above ground or balcony level 300
H From a surface or boundary facing the terminal 600
J From a terminal facing the terminal 1200
K Vertically from a terminal on the same wall 1500
L Horizontally from a terminal on the same wall 750
M Above the highest point of an intersection with the roof 600(6) 1000(5)
N From a vertical structure to the side of the terminal 750 (6)
2300
O Above a vertical structure which is less than 750mm (pressure jet burner) or 2,300mm 600(6) 1000(5)
(vaporising burner) horizontally from the side of the terminal
P From a ridge terminal to a vertical structure on the roof 1500 Should not be used
Notes
1 Terminals should only be positioned on walls where appliances have been approved for such configurations when tested in accordance with BS EN 303-1
or OFTEC standards OFS A100 or OFS A101.
2 An opening means an openable element, such as an openable window, or a permanently open air vent.
3 Not withstanding the dimensions above, a terminal should be at least 300mm from combustible material, eg a window frame.
4 To provide protection to combustible material, fit a heat shield at least 750mm wide.
5 Where a terminal is used with a vaporising burner, the terminal should be at least 2.3m horizontally from the roof.
6 Outlets for vertical balanced flues in locations M, N and O should be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Chapter 6.8
6.8.18 All – fireplaces and hearths

Fireplaces and hearths shall safely accommodate the appliances for which they are designed.
Combustible material should not be placed under a
constructional hearth unless it is:
z to support the edges of the hearth
z at least 250mm from the material to the top of the hearth, or
z separated from the underside of the hearth by an air space of
at least 50mm.
Fireplace recesses should be constructed of solid 500mm

min.
non-combustible material as follows (dimensions in the
diagrams are based on a 125mm concrete hearth below
an open fire). The space between a fire back and masonry
forming the recess should be filled with vermiculite concrete hearth 150mm min.
(1:4, lime:vermiculite with water).
100mm
min.
50mm min.
internal wall
external wall
external wall 200mm

min.
200mm
min.
6.8
vermiculite
concrete
approx.
1.1m
690mm-840mm 350mm
690mm-840mm 350mm
appliance recess with raft lintel: fire place recess for inset open fire (without boiler unit)
suitable for free-standing room heater
6.8.19 All – fireplace surrounds

Fireplace surrounds and their fixings shall be designed, specified and installed to ensure adequate
in-service performance and durability.
The fixing and support should safely accommodate the proposed type of fireplace surround (which could be manufactured in one
or a number of pieces), taking into account its size and weight. The walls and floors of the building should safely accommodate
the additional load of the proposed fireplace surround.
Fireplace surrounds should be installed by competent operatives, strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and fixing specification, and fixed to the structure using mechanical fixings, giving full consideration to:
z the type of material used to manufacture the surround z the type of supporting walls and floors, including the
z the configuration of the surround structure (eg framed or solid structure) and its finish
z the size and weight of the surround (eg wallboard or wet finish)
z the potential for overturning of the surround or parts thereof z the type, material, number and location of fixings.
Chapter 6.8
Fixings should be of durable material and be appropriate for the type of surround and the supporting wall or floor to which the
surround is to be fixed. Fixings should generally be of stainless steel to BS EN ISO 3506 ‘Mechanical properties of
corrosion-resistant stainless steel fasteners’ and be specified to provide suitable strength and durability. Materials that
comply with recognised standards which provide equal or better performance are also acceptable.
Methods that rely solely on adhesive for fixing fireplace surrounds to the structure are not acceptable.
More information on the installation of all types of natural and artificial stone fireplace surrounds can be found in the Stone
Federation Great Britain ‘Fireplace Surrounds’ data sheet (www.stonefed.org.uk).
6.8.20 All – flue pipes

Flue pipes and terminals shall be suitable for their purpose and provide unrestricted passage for combustion gases
between the fireplace, or appliance, and the outlet.
The connection between a fireplace, or appliance, and the flue should be correctly constructed.
flue liner flue pipe
reinforced concrete
raft lintel
non-combustible rope
fireplace surround
clamping ring
150mm deep concrete

blanking panel built
into jambs
fireplace side appliance side socketed flue pipe

throat unit connection to lintel flue pipe connection to raft lintel
Where the bottom of the flue is not directly over an appliance, it should be provided with a means of access for cleaning
and inspection.
Adjustable flue draught control units are not permitted where gas burning appliances are installed. Where adjustable throat units
6.8
are specified, they should be fitted in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Flue pipes should be jointed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, fixed socket up and correctly aligned.
Table 9: Acceptable standards for flue pipes
Flue material Guidance
Flue pipes for gas appliances BS EN 1856
Cast iron flue pipes BS EN 1856
Mild steel flue pipes BS 1449 (minimum 3mm wall thickness)
Stainless steel flue pipes BS EN 10088 (minimum 1mm thick) and be one of the
following grades: 1.4401, 1.4404, 1.4432 or 1.4436
Vitreous enamelled flue pipes BS EN 1856, low carbon steel coated internally and externally with acid-resisting enamel
6.8.21 All – flue liners

Flue liners shall be unaffected by flue gases and suitable for their purpose.
To produce a suitable flue path, appropriate components
bend
should be selected to keep cutting and joints to a minimum.
At changes in direction, including bends, offsets and tees,
purpose-made components should be used. 45º max.
offset using
prefabricated bends
weak insulating
concrete
bend
chimney with flue liner suitable for solid fuel

Chapter 6.8
Flue liners should be:

z clay or purpose-made concrete, as specified in the design z sealed at their joint with the starter block or throat unit
z handled carefully to prevent chipping or cracking (no cavity should be formed between the linings and the
z installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions starter elements)
and the design z placed with the sockets or rebate ends facing up.
Liners suitable for solid fuel appliances, and generally suitable for other fuels, include liners whose performance is at least equal
to the designation T450 N2 S D 3, as described in BS EN 1443, such as:
z clay flue liners with rebates or sockets for jointing meeting z other products that are independently assessed in
the requirements for class A1 N2 or class A1 N1 as accordance with Technical Requirement R3.
described in BS EN 1457
z concrete flue liners meeting the requirements for the
classification type A1, type A2, type B1 or type B2 as
described in prEN 1857(e18) January 2001, or
Alternatively, imperforate clay pipes with sockets for jointing as described in BS 65:1991 are acceptable.
Joints should be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, generally using:
z fire cement, or z refractory mortar.
Joints should be fully filled, and surplus material cleared from the inside of each joint as the flue is built.
Spaces between the lining and the surrounding masonry should be:
z filled with weak insulating concrete, or z in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations,
with the specified material providing adequate protection.
Ordinary concrete should not be used to fill the space between the lining and the surrounding masonry.
Suitable mixtures for weak insulating concrete include:
z one part ordinary Portland cement to 20 parts suitable z one part ordinary Portland cement to 10 parts perlite.
lightweight expanded clay aggregate, minimally wetted
6.8
z one part ordinary Portland cement to six parts
vermiculite, or
6.8.22 All – flues

Flues shall be suitable for their purpose and adequately separated from combustible materials.
Flues should be:
z suitable for the type and size of appliance which they serve z tested in accordance with this chapter.
z constructed in accordance with the design and the
Combustible materials close to any brickwork or blockwork chimney should be:

z 200mm minimum from a flue z metal fixings in contact with combustible materials should
z 40mm from the face of the chimney, in Scotland, and be a minimum of 50mm from the flue.
This does not apply to a floorboard, skirting, dado or picture rail, mantel shelf or architrave.
Twin wall flue systems should comply with:
z BS EN 1856, or z be assessed in accordance with
Chapter 6.8
6.8.23 All – chimneys

Chimneys shall provide fire protective casing for flues, and shall be capable of adequately supporting the
flue liner, while resisting damp penetration and the products of combustion. Issues to be taken into
account include:
a) construction of chimneys c) damp penetration and weatherproofing
b) typical construction details d) coring and drying.
Construction of chimneys
Masonry chimneys should be properly bonded to, or supported by, the adjoining walls of the building.
Foundations to a chimney should:
z be the same depth as adjacent wall foundations z where the chimney forms part of the wall, be a minimum of
z be designed to avoid uneven settlement 100mm wider than the chimney base.
Height (H) of an unrestrained chimney should:

z not exceed 4.5x the smallest dimension on plan of the
H H
chimney (W) (where the density of the masonry is a minimum
of 1500kg/m3), or
z be designed by an engineer in accordance with
W W
Chimneys which:
z are of block, brick or stone should have a minimum wall z form part of a compartment wall, and are not back to back
thickness of 100mm, excluding the lining thickness with an adjacent chimney, should have a minimum wall
z are built in a cavity separating wall should form two leaves, thickness of 200mm separating it from the other building
each a minimum of 100mm, between the flue and or home.
adjoining building
Factory-made insulated chimneys should be assembled, erected, anchored and protected in accordance with the
6.8
Masonry for chimneys:
z below roof level may be constructed using the same bricks z should be frost resistant above the roof unless protected
and mortar as used for the general brickwork by a capping projecting by a minimum of 50mm
z constructed with hollow or cellular blocks should be suitable (in Scotland, frost-resistant bricks should be used for all
for the construction of chimneys and filled with concrete as facing brickwork).
the work proceeds
Connections between flue blocks and ridge terminals should be made:
z as detailed in the design z using the correct fittings and supports as specified by
the manufacturers of the flue blocks, flue pipe and
ridge terminal.
Typical construction details
External fireplace recess and chimney

floor joist
above
mineral wool
firestop between 40mm min. air space
frame and chimney where non-combustible
200mm
min. material is less than
200mm thick
100mm
min. plan of chimney at upper floor level
plan of recess
Chapter 6.8
Timber chimney frame construction External chimney breast with masonry inner leaf
40mm min. air space where
chimney is less than 200mm
cripple studs to lintel,

gap to be filled with
mineral wool
timber lintel 300mm min.

from face of flue recess
cavity maintained
around chimney
with cavity wall hearth min.
ties as required 125mm thick
movement gap between timber and

masonry to be filled with mineral wool
for brick capping see Detail C
joists on hangers
In Scotland, joists, etc. should be min. 200mm from the inner surface
of the flue; brickwork or blockwork in chimney construction should
be min. 100mm thick with a min. density of 1 600 kg/m3; for brick capping see Detail B
aircrete blocks should be min. 150mm thick.
6.8
cavity
cavity tray
prefabricated
throating
see Detail A
Other alternatives may be suitable, provided they meet the appropriate performance standards.
Damp penetration and weatherproofing

Where chimneys exit close to the ridge of a pitched roof, occasional damp penetration may occur below roof level.
In this situation:
z the roof space should be well ventilated z any dampness penetrating downwards should not reach the
living areas.
Where chimneys exit close to the eaves of a pitched roof or through a flat roof, trays and flashings should be installed in the
chimney so that all damp penetration is prevented.
DPCs, flashings and gutters should be provided at the intersection point of the chimney with the surface of the roof through
which the chimney passes. DPCs to the main walls should be carried through the base of chimneys.
Flashings should be made from compatible non-ferrous metal. Lead trays should be bitumen coated where in contact with cement.
In areas of severe and very severe exposure, the following details should be used. In lower exposure zones, the tray upturn may
be on the outside of the flue liner. All other details are the same.
Chapter 6.8
cover flashing
saddle overlapping back
flashing gutter flashing
stepped flashing
turned in at joints one-piece tray
(min. 25mm) turned down on
cover flashing DPC tray four sides
overlapping back turned up at stepped side
gutter flashing two sides flashing
DPC tray at front
apron level
turned up apron
at three sides flashing
chimney stack at ridge
combined with DPC tray and flashing

chimney on outside wall
Coring and drying

Where a core (eg a sack full of loose straw, or similar) is used to prevent mortar dropping into the flue liner during construction,
the builder should ensure that it is removed on completion of the chimney.
A chimney should be allowed to dry naturally for a minimum period of 14 days before use.
6.8.24 Masonry
Masonry shall be capable of supporting intended loads and have appropriate resistance to the adverse
effects of frost and sulfates.
Masonry, including bricks, blocks, stone for masonry and reconstructed stone, should:
z be in accordance with BS 6461 or BS EN 15287-1 and z where blocks are used, have a minimum block density of
BS EN 771 1500 kg/m3 unless designed by an engineer in accordance
z where clay bricks are used in external chimney stacks, with Technical Requirement R5.
be of durability rating F2,S1 (as described in BS EN 771) or
6.8
protected by a projecting capping
In Scotland:
z frost-resistant bricks should be used for all external z where 100mm blocks are used for chimney construction,
facing brickwork they should have a minimum density of 1,500 kg/m3.
6.8.25 Mortar Also see: Chapter 6.1
Mortar shall be batched and mixed to achieve adequate strength and durability.
Mortar should be in accordance with Chapter 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’, and include sulfate-resisting cement where flue gases
are liable to affect the masonry, eg above roof level.
6.8.26 DPC
Materials for damp proofing shall adequately resist the passage of moisture into the building.
The following are acceptable for use as DPCs:
z bitumen to BS 6398 z proprietary materials assessed in accordance with
z polyethylene to BS 6515 (not to be used in the chimney Technical Requirement R3.
stack above roof level)
6.8.27 Flashings
Flashings and trays shall be capable of adequately resisting the entry of moisture into the building.
Suitable materials for flashings and trays include:
z milled sheet lead (minimum code 4) to BS EN 12588 z proprietary materials assessed in accordance with Technical
z zinc alloy complying to BS EN 988 and 0.6mm thick Requirement R3.
Chapter 6.8
6.8.28 Terminals
Flue terminals shall be suitable for their purpose and assist the functioning of the flue. Issues to be taken
into account include:
a) draught improvement b) chimney capping.
Relevant standards for flue terminals
BS EN 13502 ‘Chimneys. Requirements and test methods for clay/ceramic flue terminals’.
BS EN 1858 ‘Chimneys. Components. Concrete flue blocks.’
BS EN 1856 ‘Chimneys. Requirements for metal chimneys’.
Terminals should be:

z purpose-made or formed by extending the flue lining a z the same cross-sectional area as the flue (solid fuel has a
minimum of 20mm above the head of the chimney minimum requirement of a 200mm diameter).
z embedded a minimum of 125mm into the chimney,
excluding any flaunching, or 0.25x the length of the
terminal, whichever is the greater
flaunching
purpose-made
chimney cappings
freeze-/thaw-
min. min. resistant
50mm 30mm (F2,S1) bricks
chimney pot
chimney details with brick capping
6.8
The terminal of a masonry flue should be jointed to the flue lining with cement mortar to form a seal.
Draught improvement
Where downdraughts may occur, terminals designed to increase updraught should be fitted. However, a terminal will not
overcome problems caused by high pressure zones. Where relevant, the Solid Fuel Association or other authoritative body
should be consulted.
Chimney capping
Where a chimney is to be capped:
z a single unjointed concrete or stone capping should be used z the slab should project 50mm beyond the sides of the
z it should project and be throated to cast water away from chimney, and the withes between flues should be carried to
the face of the chimney the underside of the slab.
Decorative brick cappings should be carefully constructed to avoid rain penetration and frost damage. The use of frost-resistant
bricks may be required.
In Scotland, bricks used for facing brickwork should be frost-resistant.
Chapter 6.8
6.8.29 Flue testing

Installations shall be tested before use.
Flues should be checked during construction to ensure:
z there are no obstructions in the flue z when the flue is complete, a visual check should be made
z mortar or other blockages are removed and obstructions cleared.
Coring ball test for solid fuel appliances

When a visual test cannot be conducted, or is inconclusive, the coring ball test should be conducted as follows:
z a suitable concrete or metal ball should be attached to a z where a blockage or obstruction is found, it must be
strong cord or rope removed and the test repeated until the flue is completely
z the ball should be slowly lowered from the flue outlet to the clear of obstruction.
bottom of the flue (the fireplace recess or the
appliance connection)
Smoke test for solid fuel appliances

This test is designed to show that a flue draws adequately and that there are no leaks between the appliance and the terminal.
It must be conducted when neither the flue to be tested or adjacent flues are in use. The test should be conducted as follows:
z the flue should be warmed for 10 minutes with a heat z the whole structure forming the flue should be inspected
source such as a blow lamp. Where an appliance is fitted, externally for smoke leakage. This should include the top
all doors, including flue access doors, should be closed. of cavity walls and any other possible smoke paths, even
z two purpose-made smoke pellets should be placed in the those terminating some distance from the flue
appliance firebox or in the bottom of the flue and ignited, z the test should be continued for a minimum of five minutes.
then, closed or sealed off and the smoke allowed to rise.
z when smoke appears at the top of the flue, the outlet should
be sealed with a blow-up rubber ball or other airtight
closing system
Flues for gas appliances

For gas appliances, more sophisticated flue tests may be required and should be conducted by the appliance installer.
6.8
Flues for oil appliances

Flues for oil fired appliances should be tested as required by the appliance manufacturer.
6.8.30 Further information

z Approved Document J - Combustion appliances and fuel z Institution of Gas Engineers publications: ‘Guide for gas
storage systems. installation in timber framed housing’ and ‘Specification for
z Building Standards (Scotland) Regulations flues for Class II appliances in timber framed housing’.
z Building Regulations (Northern Ireland) Technical Booklet L
‘Combustion appliances and fuel storage systems’
Chapter
6.9
Curtain walling
and cladding
Requirements for curtain walling and cladding.
6.9.1 Compliance 03
6.9.3 Certification 03
6.9.4 Loads 03
6.9.5 Support and fixings 04
6.9.6 Durability 05
6.9.7 Interfaces 05
6.9.8 Insulation 05
6.9.9 Damp proofing and vapour control 06
6.9.10 Installation and tolerances 07
6.9.11 Electrical continuity and
earth bonding 07
6.9.12 Maintenance 07
6.9.13 Glazing, gaskets and sealants 08
6.9.14 Cavity barriers and firestops 08
6.9.15 Ventilation screens 08
6.9.16 Handling and storage 08
6.9.17 Curtain walling 09
6.9.18 Rainscreen cladding 11
6.9.19 Insulated render and brick
slip cladding 13
1 Curtain walling and cladding I 2024
Chapter 6.9
Introduction
This chapter gives guidance on the forms of curtain walling and cladding acceptable to NHBC. Curtain walling and
cladding systems that do not conform to the descriptions in this chapter will not generally be acceptable.
Conservatories are not covered by this chapter.
Guidance on the use of other types of cladding, including brickwork, rendered masonry, vertical tile and slate cladding
and timber cladding, is given in Chapter 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ and Chapter 6.2 ‘External timber framed walls’.
Curtain walling
Comprising a prefabricated or site assembled support 3D
framework with infill panels and/or wall sections with glazing
systems which include:
z structural silicone glazing
z mechanically fixed structural glazing
z slope glazing, excluding patent glazing
z coupled door and window frame assemblies
(including spandrel panels) which are one storey or more
in height, or not contained between a floor and ceiling.
Rainscreen cladding
Comprising: 3D
z an outer skin of panels which have unsealed, open, baffled
or labyrinth (rebated) joints
z a minimum 50mm pressure equalised air gap between the
insulation and the panels
z an insulated and airtight backing wall.
6.9
Insulated render
Comprising insulated render systems fixed to a backing wall. 3D
Brick slip cladding

Comprising brick slip cladding fixed to a backing wall. 3D
Stone and precast concrete cladding

Stone and precast units should be designed as curtain walling or rainscreen cladding in accordance with this chapter.
2024 I Curtain walling and cladding 2
Chapter 6.9

Air barrier A continuous layer that limits air leakage through the backing wall
Air cushion Balancing external and internal air pressure to create a cushion within the air gap
Air gap The space between the back of the cladding panels and the external face of the insulation in a
rainscreen system
Backing wall A framed or masonry wall to which the system is fixed
Brick slip cladding A brick slip system fixed to masonry or framed backing walls, generally supported by a
system proprietary carrier
Cavity The space between the cladding system and the backing wall. The cavity should be adequately
drained, and ventilated where required
Cladding panels The outer units of a rainscreen cladding system which provide some protection
Compartmentation The provision of baffles and cavity closers to form compartments within the air gap of a rainscreen
cladding system to equalise pressure
Curtain walling A form of enclosure that supports no load other than its own weight and the environmental forces that
act upon it, eg wind, water and solar.
Curtain walling The vertical building enclosure system, including frames, brackets, fixings, flashings, gutters, copings,
system glass, panels, gaskets and sealant, that forms the assembly
CWCT The Centre for Window and Cladding Technology at Bath University
CWCT Standard The current Centre for Window and Cladding Technology Standard for systemised
building envelopes
Design life The period for which materials, products and systems should be designed to be durable,
assuming routine inspection and maintenance
DPC/DPM Prevents the passage of moisture. In curtain walling terminology, a DPC is often referred to as a DPM
Façade The external facing part of the building envelope.
Fire and smoke Prevention of the transmission of fire and smoke through voids or cavities
stopping
Fixing Componentry used to attach or secure other components, eg curtain walling or a cladding system,
to the structure
Gasket A compressible material used to form an airtight and/or watertight seal
6.9
In-service The manner or quality of functioning of a material, product or system
performance
Insulated render A cladding system applied externally to an insulating layer which is fixed to a backing wall
system
Interstitial Condensation caused by vapour from within the building condensing on colder surfaces within the
condensation wall construction, often occurring due to a cold bridge
Negative pressure Where the air pressure on the internal face of the system is greater than that on the external face
Positive pressure Where the air pressure on the external face of the system is greater than that on the internal face
Primary components Components and parts of the system that are not easily replaceable. These may include:
z cladding panels z insulation
z fixings z vapour control layers
z framing z weathering components.
Pressure equalisation The creation of an air cushion within the cavity to reduce the amount of water passing through the
joints of a rainscreen. Compartmentation and adequately large joints are required to achieve
pressure equalisation
Rainscreen The part of the assembly, generally the outermost, that prevents the majority of rain from penetrating
the wall. Some water may pass through the joints of a rainscreen, but this should be limited by
appropriate detailing of open joints or the provision of baffled or labyrinth joints
Rainscreen cladding A façade that provides a barrier to wind and rain and which typically includes a vapour control layer,
system air barrier, supporting framework and fixings, insulation, breather membrane, cavity/air gap and
cladding panels. Traditional tile hanging and timber cladding are not classed as rainscreen cladding
systems under the definitions of this chapter
Replaceable Those which are readily replaceable without compromising the design and durability of the building
components or the need for progressive dismantling of the envelope. Where this cannot be achieved, components
should be designed as primary components. A method statement should be provided to demonstrate
how components will be replaced with specific reference to accessibility as detailed in this chapter
Secondary Components and parts of the system that are easily replaceable. These may include:
components z cladding panels z internal linings
z external finishes z seals and sealant
z glazing and gaskets z window and door furniture.
Chapter 6.9
Separating floors Floors and walls designed to provide separation between homes.
and walls
Slope glazing A drained and ventilated sloped roofing system.
Systems For the purposes of this chapter, this term refers to acceptable forms of curtain walling,
rainscreen cladding, insulated render systems and brick slip cladding systems.
Spandrel panel A panel used in place of glazing units to hide the edges of floor slabs, ceiling details, insulation, and
other building elements.
Test pressure The pressure at which testing is conducted.
Vapour control layer A layer used to restrict the passage of water vapour into the construction to reduce the risk of
interstitial condensation.
Curtain walling and cladding systems shall comply with the Technical Requirements.
Curtain walling and cladding systems that comply with the guidance in this chapter will generally be acceptable.

z a full set of drawings z fixing schedules
z a schedule of revisions z manufacturer’s recommendations for proprietary items
z manufacturer’s specification z details of the on-site testing regime.
z specific details of all interfaces
6.9.3 Certification
6.9
Curtain walling and cladding systems shall be adequately tested, certified and designed in accordance with
appropriate standards.
Curtain walling and cladding systems should have certification confirming satisfactory assessment, undertaken by an
independent technical authority. Where applicable, certification should be in accordance with CWCT Standard for systemised
building envelopes (or a suitable alternative acceptable to NHBC). Independent technical approvals authorities acceptable to
NHBC include:
z British Board of Agrément (BBA) z certification bodies considered by NHBC to be a
z Building Research Establishment (BRE), or suitable alternative.
Certification and test documentation should be:

z made available to NHBC before work begins on site z used as reference to ensure compliance.
The use of the system should be within the scope of the certification and test documentation.
6.9.4 Loads
Curtain walling and cladding systems, including brackets and fixings, shall allow movement without
causing damage or deformation, and safely transfer loads to the building.
Dead loads and live loads should:
z be transferred safely to the building’s structure z be calculated in accordance with BS EN 1991-1-1 and
without undue permanent deformation or deflection of BS EN 1991-1-4, and take account of internal and external
any component pressures, the location, shape and size of the building.
Chapter 6.9
The following should be accommodated without any reduction in performance:

z thermally induced loading due to differential stresses z stresses in components and materials (these should not
caused by temperature gradients within materials exceed the permissible values recommended by the
or components product manufacturer)
z movement within the curtain walling or cladding.
Causes of movement include:

z dead and live loads z freezing of retained moisture
z changes in temperature z creep.
z changes in the moisture content of components
Allowance for movement should be provided in accordance with the design.
6.9.5 Support and fixings

Curtain walling and cladding systems shall be securely fixed with suitably durable fixings to ensure
adequate in-service performance.
The cladding system and associated fixings should be correctly located and securely fixed in accordance with the design and the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Fixings and supports, including the type, size and positioning of anchors, fixing rails, frames,
fixings, fasteners and bracketry, should be in accordance with the design, and:
z accommodate specified loads z be installed ensuring dissimilar metals are separated to
z account for packing of brackets to achieve surface tolerance, avoid bimetallic corrosion
in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations z be installed ensuring aluminium components are separated
z be accurately set out from direct contact with cementitious surfaces.
z generally be stainless steel, suitable non-ferrous metal or
appropriate plastics
Mechanically fixed systems should be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, and fixings should:
z have the correct embedding, spacing and edge distances z have suitable locking nuts and washers.
z be installed to the correct torque settings
6.9
Fixings should be manufactured from:
z phosphor bronze z BS EN 573 and BS EN 755 aluminium alloy
z silicon bronze z appropriate plastics
z BS EN ISO 3506 stainless steel z materials assessed in accordance with
z mild steel with coatings to BS EN ISO 2081, BS EN 1461, Technical Requirement R3.
or other appropriate treatment in accordance with
BS EN ISO 12944 or BS EN ISO 14713
Materials that comply with recognised standards and which provide equal or better performance to those above will generally be
acceptable to NHBC.
Pull-out or destructive testing of anchors and fixings should:
z comply with BS8539 and BS5080 z be carried out in accordance with the design
z comply with the Construction Fixings Association Guidance z carried out at a frequency agreed with NHBC.
Note ‘Procedure for Site Testing Construction Fixings’
The test report should be made available to NHBC.

Adhesive-fixed systems should be installed to a suitably prepared backing wall, providing:
z an assessment of the backing wall is available to z it is used in accordance with the design.
confirm suitability
Adhesive fixing of rails, frames, fixings and fasteners should:
z only be specified where there is no suitable alternative z be used in accordance with the
Timber should only be used where it is:
z easily inspected and replaced without disturbing the curtain z treated in accordance with Chapter 3.3 ‘Timber preservation
walling system (natural solid timber)’.
Chapter 6.9
6.9.6 Durability Also see: Chapter 3.3
Curtain walling and cladding systems shall provide satisfactory durability (subject to routine inspection
and maintenance). Timber shall be either naturally durable or preservative treated to provide adequate
protection against rot and insect attack.
The system should be designed to avoid the need for disproportionate work when repairing or replacing individual components.
In addition:
z primary components should provide satisfactory z secondary components should provide satisfactory
in-service performance for the design life of the building in-service performance for a minimum of 25 years.
The curtain walling system should be constructed with corrosion resistant or adequately protected materials. The risk of
bimetallic corrosion should be avoided by the isolation of dissimilar metals.
Systems should not include materials liable to infestation by micro-organisms, fungi, insects or vermin.
6.9.7 Interfaces
Curtain walling and cladding systems shall have suitable interfaces and resist the penetration of water
and wind.
The design should indicate the contractor responsible for constructing interfaces.
Interfaces, including those between curtain walling and cladding systems, and those between curtain walling and cladding
systems and other elements of the building (eg walls, roof, doors and windows), should be carefully designed and detailed to be
weather resistant, and prevent moisture reaching parts of the wall that it could adversely affect.
The design should take account of:
z differing profile characteristics z tolerances and deviation
z movement z the erection sequence
z continuity of insulation, vapour barriers and z planned maintenance.
breather membranes
6.9.8 Insulation
6.9
Insulation shall be suitable for the intended use.

Insulation should be:
z in accordance with the design and the z securely fixed to the support frame or backing wall with
manufacturer’s recommendations appropriate fixings and/or adhesive in accordance with the
z installed correctly to minimise the risk of thermal bridging, manufacturer’s recommendations
surface and interstitial condensation z returned into window and door openings, and continuous
around penetrations through the wall
z neatly cut around fixings and brackets.
Insulation materials should:

z be inert, durable, rot and vermin proof z be one of the materials listed in Table 1.
z not be adversely affected by moisture
Table 1: Materials for insulation

Insulation type Relevant standard
Mineral wool BS EN 13162
FR grade (flame retardant) expanded polystyrene BS EN 13163
FR grade (flame retardant) extruded polystyrene BS EN 13164
Rigid polyurethane foam and polyisocyanurate BS EN 13165
Phenolic foam BS EN 13166
Cellular glass BS EN 13167
Other materials Technical Requirement R3
Reference should be made to BRE document BR135 – 2003 ‘Fire performance of external thermal insulation for walls of multi-
storey buildings’ when specifying the type of insulation system to be installed.
Chapter 6.9
Rainscreen cladding
The backing wall should be adequately insulated, particularly at exposed areas. Where open joints are used, a continuous and
durable breather membrane should be provided over the outer face of the insulation.
Where the insulation is fixed to the backing wall, a minimum of one non-combustible fixing per 1m2 or per insulation batt,
whichever is the lesser, should be provided in addition to the other fixings.
insulation neatly fitted

between support frame
Insulated render
A minimum of one non-combustible fixing per 1m2 or per
insulation batt, whichever provides the greater number,
should be provided in addition to the other fixings.
Non-combustible fixings should be fixed through the
mesh reinforcement. each layer cut
to fit neatly
around flue outlet
Insulation should be suitable to receive the
render finish, and keyed where appropriate.
6.9
Brick slip cladding
Where the insulation is fixed to the backing wall, a minimum
of one non-combustible fixing per 1m2 or per insulation batt,
whichever is the lesser, should be provided in addition to the
other fixings.
insulation and carrier

neatly cut
around openings
6.9.9 Damp proofing and vapour control

Curtain walling and cladding systems, including damp proofing materials and breather membranes,
shall adequately resist the passage of water into the building and allow water vapour to pass outwards.
Damp proofing should:
z be installed correctly to provide a physical barrier to the z use DPCs/DPMs where necessary, including the junction
passage of water, and to ensure water is directed to between the system and any other component
the outside or systems
z include cavity trays with stop ends at the base of the z use only appropriate tapes and sealant (but not solely rely
system, above openings, above cavity barriers, interfaces on sealant) in accordance with the design and the
and other interruptions to the cavity where necessary manufacturer’s recommendations.
For curtain walling systems, the DPC/DPM should extend the full height of the system and have appropriate details at each
interface (including floors, walls, roofs, balconies and terraces).
Chapter 6.9
DPCs/DPMs and flexible cavity trays

Damp proofing should be:
z formed from materials which are compatible with z constructed from preformed components at
adjoining components complicated junctions.
z the correct dimensions to suit the detailed design
The following materials are acceptable for use as DPCs/DPMs:

z BS 6515 polyethylene z neoprene
z EPDM z materials assessed in accordance with
Flashings
The following materials are acceptable as flashings:
z BS EN 12588 rolled lead sheet (minimum Code 4) z BS EN 988 zinc alloys
z BS EN 485 and BS EN 573 aluminium and aluminium alloys z stainless steel.
Breather membranes
Breather membranes should:
z comply with BS EN 13859-2: 2014 z be in accordance with Technical Requirement R3.
(Type 1 in areas of very severe exposure), or
6.9.10 Installation and tolerances Also see: Chapter 9.1
Curtain walling and cladding systems shall:

a) be installed by competent operatives b) be installed to achieve design tolerances and
established standards.
Installation
Systems should be installed by operatives who:
z are competent z hold a certificate confirming that they have been trained by
z are familiar with the system being installed the system manufacturer, supplier or installer.
6.9
Tolerances
Systems should be completed, within reasonable tolerances, in accordance with the design, and allowing for the line, level,
plumb and plane of the completed wall to be within reasonable tolerances for the materials involved.
6.9.11 Electrical continuity and earth bonding

Curtain walling and cladding systems shall ensure electrical continuity and earth bonding.
Curtain walling and rainscreen cladding should comply with:
BS 7671 ‘IET Wiring Regulations Requirements for Electrical Installations’, formerly ‘IEE Wiring Regulations’
BS EN 62305 ‘Protection against lightning. General principles’
BS EN 62305-3 ‘Physical damage to structures and life hazard’
6.9.12 Maintenance
Curtain walling and cladding systems shall have appropriate access arrangements for the purposes
of cleaning, inspection, maintenance and repair.
Provision should be made for safe future access to the façade. Access should generally be provided from a safe working
platform, such as a cradle or mobile elevating platform.
Appropriate arrangements should be made for the replacement of failed insulating glass units without incurring excessive costs
for gaining access.
Chapter 6.9
6.9.13 Glazing, gaskets and sealants

Glazing shall be carried out in accordance with relevant standards. Materials used for glazing, gaskets and
sealants shall provide satisfactory performance.
Glazing, including insulating glass units, should be in accordance with Chapter 6.7 ‘Doors, windows and glazing’.
Extruded rubber gaskets should comply with BS 4255 or assessed in accordance with Technical Requirement R3.
Sealant and tapes should be selected and applied in accordance with:
z BS 6213 z BS EN ISO 11600.
Sealant used in locations where differential movement may be expected, eg interfaces between the façade and the structure,
should be one of the following:
z one or two part polysulphide z one or two part polyurethane
z one part silicone z materials assessed in accordance with
6.9.14 Cavity barriers and firestops

Materials used for cavity barriers and firestops shall be capable of producing adequate resistance to fire
and smoke.
Materials are acceptable where they are:
z specified in Building Regulations z assessed in accordance with Technical Requirement R3.
Systems incorporating proprietary intumescent materials should follow the guidance provided by:
z the Intumescent Fire Seals Association (IFSA) z the Association for Specialist Fire Protection (ASFP).
6.9.15 Ventilation screens

Ventilation openings shall be protected from the entry of birds and animals.
Where openings are larger than 10mm, a screen to prevent birds and animals entering the cavity should be provided:
6.9
z in accordance with the design z at penetrations through the cladding.
z at the top and bottom of the rainscreen
6.9.16 Handling and storage

Materials, products and systems shall be protected and stored in a satisfactory manner to prevent damage,
distortion, uneven weathering and degradation.
The handling and storage of curtain walling or cladding system should ensure:
z components are transported, lifted, handled and stored in z insulated glass units are carefully stored and protected in a
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations sheltered dry area.
Practical steps should be taken to avoid the risk of damage to the curtain walling or cladding system during construction.
Chapter 6.9
6.9.17 Curtain walling

Curtain walling shall ensure adequate in-service performance. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) acoustic performance e) opening doors and lights
b) weather resistance f) off-site testing
c) thermal bridging condensation g) site testing.
d) air infiltration
Acoustic performance
Noise from the curtain walling system caused by loads, movements and changes in the environmental conditions should be
accommodated without being intrusive.
The curtain walling system should be designed to resist the passage of airborne and impact sound within the building. To reduce
flanking transmission, precautions may be required at the:
z edges of separating floors z outer ends of partition walls
z outer ends of separating walls z junctions with roof constructions and parapets.
Weather resistance
Curtain walling systems should have: Figure 1: Curtain walling to insulated render system:
z external and internal air and water seals with a drained horizontal section
and ventilated cavity at each interface 3D
internal DPC/DPM
z drained and ventilated glazing rebates including gaskets
and seals. internal seal
The following illustrations show typical interfaces and

general design principles:
external DPC/DPM
external seal
6.9
Figure 2: Curtain walling to balcony/terrace: vertical section Figure 3: Curtain walling to conventional brick and block
wall: horizontal section
internal seal
internal DPC/DPM
DPC/DPM external
DPC/DPM
linked to
roofing
membrane external
seal
roofing
membrane
Chapter 6.9
Figure 4: Curtain walling to soffit: vertical section Figure 5: Curtain walling to roof, including coping detail:
vertical section
external seal external DPC/DPM

linked to
roofing membrane
internal external
DPC/DPM DPC/DPM
roofing membrane
Thermal bridging and condensation

The design and construction of curtain walls should:
z ensure interfaces are adequately insulated and installed in z ensure thermal bridging is controlled so that no part of the
accordance with the design curtain wall is more at risk from surface condensation than
z minimise the risk of surface and interstitial condensation the glazing.
by providing thermal breaks and a continuous and
durable vapour control layer in accordance with
the design
Air infiltration
Curtain walling systems should be sealed with preformed
factory-moulded ‘picture frame’ type vulcanised EPDM or
picture frame
silicone internal gaskets. Gaskets and sealants should: gasket
z be used to resist the flow of air from the outside to the interior
surface of the curtain walling system
6.9
z comply with BS 6213 and be used in accordance with
typical profile
Particular attention should be given to the interfaces between
the curtain walling system and the walls, roof, doors,
windows and cladding system.
Opening doors and lights

Opening doors and lights should:
z hang square within the curtain wall frame z fit neatly and with minimal gaps to ensure effective
weatherproofing.
Off-site testing
Air and water testing of the ‘prototype’ curtain walling system should be carried out in accordance with, and pass, the CWCT
Standard (test sequence A or B), when tested at a test pressure of 600 pascals. Panels tested should be of a similar size and
configuration to those to be used on the building.
Where the maximum calculated design wind pressure is above 2400 pascals, the test pressure should be increased to 0.25 x the
design wind pressure.
The ‘prototype’ should remain watertight during and after the test.
At a test pressure of 600 pascals, an air infiltration rate no higher than 1.5m3/hr/m2 for fixed glazed panels is permissible,
provided there is no evidence of concentrated leakage.
Wind resistance, serviceability and safety testing should be carried out in accordance with the CWCT Standard.
Chapter 6.9
Site testing
Site testing should:
z be conducted to determine resistance to water penetration, z ensure a minimum of 5% of the completed curtain walling
including joints and interfaces which are intended to be system is tested, especially in vulnerable areas such as
permanently closed and watertight joints and interfaces.
z ensure a representative sample of the finished installation is
hose tested in accordance with the current CWCT Standard
for curtain walling
Other testing may be acceptable where it is considered to be a suitable alternative by NHBC.
The results of the test should be made available to NHBC.
6.9.18 Rainscreen cladding

Rainscreen cladding systems shall ensure adequate in-service performance. Issues to be taken into
account include:
a) acoustic performance e) compartmentation
b) weather resistance f) certification
c) thermal bridging and condensation g) site testing.
d) air infiltration
Acoustic performance
Noise from the rainscreen cladding system caused by rain striking the outer surface of panels should be accommodated without
being intrusive through the use of material that is:
z noise absorbing, or z anti-drumming.
Weather resistance
To ensure moisture is directed to the outside, DPC/DPM arrangements should be correctly formed with suitable upstands and
stop ends, including at the junction between the rainscreen cladding and any other component or system. External and internal
air and water seals and a drained cavity should be provided at all interfaces.
6.9
The air gap between the face of the insulation and the back of the panels should be of sufficient width and have suitably sized
drainage, allowing any water passing the joints to:
z run down the back of the rainscreen panels z be discharged externally without wetting the insulation or
the backing wall.
Free drainage
Air gaps should be adequately ventilated and the following
minimum widths maintained behind all rainscreen panels:
10mm
z 50mm for panels with open joints, or 10mm min. 10mm
min. min.
z 38mm for panels with baffled or labyrinth (rebated) joints.
Open, baffled or labyrinth (rebated) joints should have a

minimum 10mm opening, unless specified otherwise.
open joint baffled joint labyrinth (rebated)
joint

The system should:
z be designed to minimise the risk of thermal bridging, z generally include a vapour control layer fixed to the warm
surface and interstitial condensation side of the wall insulation.
z be assessed using a BS 5250 condensation risk analysis
Chapter 6.9
Air infiltration
Before installation of the system, the backing wall should be reasonably airtight with:
z masonry walls jointed to a high standard, ie, each joint filled z framed walls, including a rigid sheathing on the cavity face,
with each joint taped or sealed.
Where reasonable airtightness cannot be achieved:
z a separate continuous vapour permeable air barrier should z joints should be taped or sealed.
be provided on the outer face of the backing wall
Compartmentation
Rainscreen cladding systems that have open joints between
1.5m max.
the panels should be designed to be pressure equalised. The
cavity should be compartmented by: 6.0m max.
z a horizontal cavity closer at each floor level

z vertical cavity closers at centres not exceeding 6m
z vertical cavity closers at centres not exceeding 1.5m
within 6m of an internal or external corner
horizontal cavity
z a vertical cavity closer as close as possible to an external closer at each
floor level
corner, generally within 300mm.
The NHBC Standard for compartmentation is in addition to Building Regulations (to control the spread of smoke and fire), but
may be used for the same purpose.
Cavity closers should:
z be rigid and installed in accordance with the z enable ventilation and drainage to be maintained in
manufacturer’s recommendations accordance with the design.
Certification
Rainscreen cladding systems, including panels, should have current certification confirming satisfactory assessment by an
appropriate independent technical approvals authority accepted by NHBC.
6.9
Site testing
On-site hose or sparge bar testing should be carried out with emphasis on interfaces that are designed to be permanently closed
and watertight.
The building should remain watertight during and after the test.
Chapter 6.9
6.9.19 Insulated render and brick slip cladding Also see: Chapter 6.2
Insulated render and brick slip cladding shall be designed and installed to ensure adequate
in-service performance. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) weather resistance d) insulated render: reinforcement and render
b) thermal bridging and condensation e) brick slip cladding: slips, carriers and joints.
c) air infiltration
Weather resistance
Timber and steel framed backing walls should have a cavity 15mm min. drained 15mm min.
and vented cavity drained cavity
between the wall and the insulation which is:
z a minimum of 15mm wide
z drained and vented (for timber frame)
z drained (for steel frame).
A cavity can increase the risk of damage from impact,

especially at low level, around balconies and where cradle
systems etc can come into contact with the façade. Suitable
precautions to resist impact damage should be provided eg
by the provision of a rigid board behind the insulation whilst
maintaining the cavity.
timber frame steel frame
The following illustrations show typical interfaces and general design principles:
Figure 6: Insulated render system to Figure 7: Penetration of gas flue Figure 8: Brick slip cladding to
windows and doors: through insulated render insulated render system:
horizontal section system on horizontal section
light gauge steel frame:
horizontal section
6.9
internal seal
DPC/DPM external
seal
external
seal
external
seal
external seal
Movement joints in the backing wall should be:

z continued through the insulated render system z formed in accordance with the

The system should:
z be designed to minimise the risk of thermal bridging, z generally include a vapour control layer, fixed to the warm
surface and interstitial condensation side of the wall insulation.
z be assessed using a suitable condensation risk analysis
Air infiltration
Before installation of the system, the backing wall should be reasonably airtight with:
z masonry walls jointed to a high standard ie, each joint filled z each joint taped or sealed on framed walls, including a rigid
sheathing on the cavity face.
Chapter 6.9
Insulated render: reinforcement and render

Reinforcement should: additional reinforcement
at points of increased stress
z be detailed in the design and be in accordance with the
z be formed with appropriate trim at openings, corners, angles,
interfaces and movement joints
z include additional mesh where there may be increased stress
in the render system, ie, at the corners of window or
door openings
z be lapped to a minimum of 100mm.
reinforcement continuous
across face of insulation
Render should:
z not be applied where the surface has contamination, z be mixed to ensure colour consistency where coloured
dust or loose particles pigments are specified
z have the appropriate number and thickness of coats in z be specified and used with the appropriate trims to form
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations corners, returns and features in accordance with the
Brick slip cladding: slips, carriers and joints

Brick slip systems, including proprietary carriers forming an
integral part of the system, should:
z be specified and fixed in accordance with the design and the
manufacturer’s recommendations, taking account of relevant
height restrictions
6.9
z be set out and designed to ensure that excessive cutting of
brick slips is avoided, ie, in the storey heights, at corners and
around openings
z have coursing arranged to suit lintel heights.
Mortars, proprietary mortars and grouts should be specified: insulation (carrier) neatly cut
around openings and positioned
z to enable each joint to be adequately filled and to avoid excess cutting of slips
appropriately struck
z in accordance with the system
Chapter
6.10
Light steel framed walls
and floors
Requirements for light steel framed walls and floors and:
z applies specifically to ‘warm frame’ and ‘hybrid construction’
using 0.45-4.0mm thick framing
z does not apply to light steel framed walls used in basements.
6.10.1 Compliance 01
6.10.3 Structural certification 02
6.10.4 Structural design of load-bearing
floors and walls 03
6.10.5 Structural design of infill walls 06
6.10.6 Roofs 06
6.10.7 Steel and fixings 06
6.10.8 Detailing of steel joists 08
6.10.9 Restraint 09
6.10.10 Construction of load-bearing walls
and external infill walls 09
6.10.11 Interfaces with staircases 10
6.10.12 Fixing floor decking and ceilings 11
6.10.13 Other design issues 11
6.10.14 Behaviour in relation to fire 11
6.10.15 Acoustic performance 12
6.10.16 Moisture control 12
6.10.17 Insulation 13
6.10.18 Air and vapour control layers 14
6.10.19 Breather membranes 14
6.10.20 Cladding, lining and
sheathing boards 15
6.10.21 Wall ties 16
For figure reference tables in
6.10.22 Services 17 this chapter, please go to the
6.10.23 Further information 17 end of the chapter
1 Light steel framed walls and floors I 2024
Chapter 6.10

Differential movement Movement between the frame and cladding, eg due to thermal expansion, shrinkage (in concrete
masonry) and moisture expansion (in clay masonry).
External infill Walls which are built between the floors of steel or concrete frames and are designed to resist wind
loading and to support the weight of the other wall components. They do not provide stability to the
building or resist floor loading. External infill is considered as a secondary structural component.
Hybrid construction Cavity construction where insulation is installed both between the studs and on the cavity side of the
steel frame.
LSF Light steel frame. In this chapter, ‘LSF’ refers to construction framing members made from
cold-formed profiles 0.45-4.0mm thick. Structural members are typically at least 1.0mm thick.
Primary structural Elements of the structure designed to carry and transfer primary loads of the building as a whole,
components including self-weight, dead loads and live loads.
Secondary structural Elements of the structure which do not play a wider role in the structure, but carry loads directly
components imposed on them (and transfer them to the primary structure) such as self-weight, wind loads,
cladding and openings.
Sheathing Board applied to the outside of the steel frame (installed where required by the design).
Warm frame Cavity construction where insulation is installed on the cavity side of the steel frame.
LSF structures shall comply with the Technical Requirements.

LSF structures (ie, walls, roofs and floors) that comply with the guidance in this chapter will generally be acceptable.
LSF structures may be:
z structurally independent (primary) and used to form z infill walls (secondary), or
whole buildings, additional storeys, annexes, extensions, z bespoke facades (where support may be required from
penthouses, etc other structural elements).
Construction should be ‘warm frame’ or ‘hybrid’ construction, with sufficient insulation outside the steel envelope to ensure that
condensation does not occur within the depth of the light steel members.
6.10
Stud partitions are considered in Chapter 6.3 ‘Internal walls’. LSF systems that do not comply with the principles of this chapter
should be assessed in accordance with Technical Requirement R3.
Where the components of the LSF cannot be inspected on site (eg closed panels or fitted out volumetric or modular units) the
system should be treated as a proprietary building system under Technical Requirement R3 and subject to assessment by an
appropriate independent technical approvals authority or be assessed under the NHBC Accepts service -
see www.nhbc.co.uk/accepts.

Designs and specifications should be issued to site supervisors, relevant specialist subcontractors and suppliers, and include:
z a full set of drawings and material specifications z positions and materials for fire stops and cavity barriers in
z a typical wall build-up, including wall ties, breather accordance with relevant Building Regulations
membranes, sheathing and vapour control layers, z the number and spacing of bolts, screws and rivets
where applicable z the manufacturer’s recommendations relating to
z fixing schedules and details of each connection that is to be proprietary items
made on site z details of how wall panels are to be fixed to the substructure,
z details of connections with other building elements, including adjacent panels, and floor and roof framing
roofs, floors and openings z the specification for each type of fixing, including
z information on integration of services and work of corrosion protection.
subsequent trades
2024 I Light steel framed walls and floors 2
Chapter 6.10
6.10.3 Structural certification Contact us: technical@nhbc.co.uk
The LSF system shall be adequately tested and certified. The design of superstructures with primary
structural components formed from LSF shall be checked by an NHBC registered LSF certifier.
Primary structural components formed from LSF require two-stage certification confirming that both the system and the project
have been checked. External infill does not require Stage 1 and 2 certification (see Clause 6.10.5).
Stage 1 – system certification

NHBC requires manufacturers of LSF systems, which form primary structural components, to submit a system manual to the
Steel Construction Institute (SCI) for assessment. The manufacturer is the company which assembles the steel frame sections to
form the wall and/or floor panels. If in doubt, consult NHBC Standards, Innovation and Research.
The manual should contain the information described in Table 1. Further performance issues may be considered at the discretion
of SCI and the manufacturer (see Table 7).
Table 1: Items included in the system manual
Topic Description
Description of system z key features.
Application z usage, eg maximum number of storeys and type of cladding
Durability z demonstrate that design life is at least 60 years (including environment category)
z grade of steel
z corrosion protection
z supplementary protection
Strength and stability z structural design philosophy (including codes of practice referenced and test reports)
z grade of steel (traceability)
z section properties
z loading
z ultimate limit state
z serviceability limit state
z resistance to overturning
z racking resistance
6.10
z holding down
z connections within the system
z connections with other building elements
z structural integrity
z positions and sizes of holes through members
Additional checks where LSF is z module-to-module connections (strength as well as accuracy)
used in volumetric construction z module-to-foundation connections
z rigidity in transportation
z lifting
Where there are various configurations (eg types of claddings), the manufacturer will need to specify which options SCI is to
consider in its assessment. Upon satisfactory completion, SCI will approve the manufacturer’s system manual and issue a
numbered ‘system certificate’ which includes:
z a detailed description of the system z information for reference by the designer and LSF
z details of usage limitations project certifier.
Chapter 6.10
Stage 2 – project certification

The design of all primary structural components should be subject to a Stage 2 certification check by an NHBC registered
LSF certifier.
The LSF certifier should:
z be listed on NHBC’s list of LSF certifiers z ensure that the proposals are in accordance with the
z be a suitably qualified and experienced civil or structural manufacturer’s Stage 1 system certificate (issued by SCI)
engineer with appropriate professional indemnity insurance and this chapter
z not be the designer of the LSF or be employed by the z provide confirmation that the requirements have been
same practice satisfied for the project
z check supporting details and calculations z provide the registered builder with the completed and signed
z ensure the Stage 1 system certificate is valid and current project certificate confirming assessment of structural
adequacy for each specific project.
The registered builder should ensure that the completed Stage 2 certificate is available on site for inspection by NHBC.
Contact NHBC Standards, Innovation and Research via technicalsupport@nhbc.co.uk:
z if you require contact details of frame certifiers, or z to apply to become an LSF certifier.
6.10.4 Structural design of load-bearing floors and walls

LSF floors and walls shall be designed to support and transfer loads safely and without undue movement.
a) structural floors c) overall stability.
b) structural walls
Structural floors
Floors should:
z be of the correct type z have a typical maximum joist spacing of 600mm, although
z be fitted in the specified location greater spacings may be applied when designed by an
z have suitably sized trimmers around floor openings engineer in accordance with Technical Requirement R5 or
6.10
covered by an SCI system-specific Stage 1 assessment

with the project-specific application reviewed and checked
by an NHBC registered LSF certifier.
Light steel joists should be fixed to supporting walls by either:

z web cleats z direct attachment to wall studs, or
z ‘Z’ or ‘L’ hangers z bearing onto the supporting structure (bearing stiffeners
z a track connection may be required).
Joist support cleats should:

z be of the correct type z use fixings as specified in the design.
z be fitted in the specified location
Where required, web stiffeners should be properly fitted.

Where joists are fitted directly to light steel wall studs, pre-drilled holes should be correctly aligned before making the
final connection.
Fixing holes should not be enlarged, and additional holes should not be cut without prior approval of the designer.
Figure 1: Joist bearing onto structure with stiffener Figure 2: Web cleat connection Figure 3: Bolted web to web connection
Chapter 6.10
Static criteria for the maximum permissible deflection of a single joist due to:
z imposed load, limited to (span/450) z dead and imposed loads, limited to the lesser of (span/350)
or 15mm.
Dynamic criteria:
z the natural frequency of the floor should not be less than z the deflection of the floor (ie, a series of joists plus the floor
8Hz for dead load plus 0.2 x imposed load; this can be decking) when subject to a 1kN point load should be limited
achieved by limiting the deflection of a single joist to 5mm to the values in Table 2.
for the given loading.
Table 2: Deflection with point loads of 1kN
Span (m) Maximum deflection (mm)
3.5 1.7
3.8 1.6
4.2 1.5
4.6 1.4
5.3 1.3
6.2 1.2
The deflection of a single joist is dependent on the:
z overall floor construction z number of effective joists that are deemed to share the
applied 1kN point load (typical values are given in Table 3).
Table 3: Typical values
Floor configuration Number of effective joists
400mm joist centres 600mm joist centres
Chipboard, plywood or oriented strand board 2.5 2.35
Built-up acoustic floor 4 3.5
Light steel ground floor construction

Provision should be made to prevent ground moisture affecting light steel floors. This can be achieved by covering the ground
below the floor with either:
6.10
z 50mm oversite concrete or 50mm fine aggregate on 1200 z 100mm oversite concrete on a compacted clean, inert
gauge (0.3mm thick) polyethylene membrane laid on 50mm hardcore bed. Where necessary, this concrete should be
sand blinding, or protected against sulfate attack by the use of a lapped
polyethylene DPM, not less than 1200 gauge (0.3mm thick)
or 1000 gauge where assessed in accordance with Technical
Requirement R3.
Floors should have a 150mm minimum void below the floor which is ventilated by:
z openings on at least two opposite sides z 1500mm2 per metre run of external wall or 500mm2 per m2
of floor area (whichever provides the largest area).
Where there is shrinkable soil, heave can occur. The minimum underfloor void ventilation requirement should be increased
as follows:
z high potential – 150mm (300mm total) z low potential – 50mm (200mm total).
z medium potential – 100mm (250mm total)
See Chapter 4.2 ‘Building near trees’ for definitions of high, medium and low volume change potential.
For concrete ground floors refer to Chapters 5.1 ‘Substructure and ground-bearing floors’ and 5.2 ‘Suspended ground floors’.
Concrete upper floors
Concrete floors may be used with LSF and may be constructed using either thin precast units or in-situ concrete placed on steel
decking. The deflection of simply supported composite floors should be limited to take account of the long-term effects of creep
and shrinkage. Composite floors should be appropriately propped until the concrete reaches the required strength and should
not be overloaded during construction. Guidance can be found in Section 6.3 of SCI publication P402 ‘Light steel framing in
residential construction’.
Chapter 6.10
Structural walls
The structural design of the building should ensure adequate resistance to loadings including dead loads, imposed loads, wind
loads and snow loads, in accordance with:
z BS EN 1991-1-1 z BS EN 1991-1-4.
z BS EN 1991-1-3
Further guidance on deflection limits can be found in SCI guidance P402 ‘Light steel framing in residential construction’.
Individual studs should generally:
z be sized to meet structural requirements, allowing for board z consider deflection if not designed to carry vertical loading
fixings at joints and construction tolerances from the primary structure.
z have a maximum spacing of 600mm
Alternative stud arrangements should be agreed with NHBC.

Lintels, including trussed lintels, should be: Figure 4: Lintel arrangement
z provided to any opening in load-bearing panels where

one or more studs is cut or displaced to form the
opening, but are not required where an opening falls
between studs
z securely fixed to supporting studs to ensure that loads
are fully transferred.
At openings, additional studs may be required to provide support
or fixing points for wall ties, cladding and wall linings.
Multiple studs should be included to support multiple joists,
unless otherwise specified by the designer.
Where panels are diagonally braced with a flat strip, the brace should be fixed to each stud at the intersection to minimise
bowing in the bracing member. Alternatively, bracing may be tensioned using alternative methods where included in the scope of
the Stage 1 certification.
6.10
Appropriate holding-down devices should be provided to resist uplift, where necessary. The anchorage for holding-down devices
should have sufficient mass to resist the uplift forces (See Clause 6.10.10).
Where roof trusses sit directly on a top track, the design should consider all loads, such as:
z wind uplift z vertical loading (assuming that trusses may be offset
z lateral support from studs).
Where included in the design, timber wall plates should be:

z fixed to the head rail of wall panels onto which timber roof z sized (including the head rail) to permit single timber trusses
trusses bear to be positioned at any point between studs.
Allowance for movement, including at openings and penetrations, should:
z prevent load transfer onto services or flues z be fully coordinated with the whole building design.
z consider elastic shortening of the LSF and movement
potential of any panels, cladding or boards
Overall stability
Methods to provide overall stability should either:
z be designed to BS EN 1993-1-1, or z be tested to BS EN 594.
Wall panels may provide stability using one or more of the following techniques:
z internal bracing z external sheathing board in accordance with Clause 6.10.20

z crossed flat bracing z rigid frame action.
Internal lining boards can be used where demonstrated to be suitable for the purpose.
Chapter 6.10
6.10.5 Structural design of infill walls Also see: Chapters 7.1 and 7.2
Infill walls shall be designed to support and transfer loads to the structure safely and without undue
distortion or movement.
Infill panels should be designed to resist the expected wind loads, any loads transferred by the cladding system, and those
imposed by windows and doors within the panels. Load concentrations resulting from the presence of openings should also be
considered. The design should be in accordance with BS EN 1993-1-3. Additional information can be found in SCI publication
ED017 ‘Design and installation of light steel external wall systems’.
6.10.6 Roofs
Roofs supported by LSF constructions shall be designed to support the roof coverings and transfer loads
safely and without undue movement.
Connections between LSF walls and timber or LSF pitched roofs require careful consideration in the design.
LSF pitched or flat roofs should only be used in warm-roof or hybrid construction, ie, with insulation over rafters (or joists in
flat roofs).
Condensation risk should be considered in accordance with BS 5250.
6.10.7 Steel and fixings

Steel and fixings shall be suitable for the intended use. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) steel grade c) connections and fixings
b) protection against corrosion d) holes and notches.
Steel grade
Steel should be in accordance with BS EN 10346 and of any of the following grades:
z S280 z S390
6.10
z S320 z S420
z S350 z S450.
Protection against corrosion

All steel should be pre-galvanised in accordance with BS EN 10346 (minimum 275g/m2 zinc coating (Z) or 150g/m2 aluminium-
zinc alloy coating (AZ)). Structural steel members should not be altered without the approval of the designer. Welded zones
should be cleaned and treated with a zinc-rich paint to prevent corrosion.
Where the LSF floor is to be located at 150mm or more above the external ground level, the junction between the ground floor
joists and their support should be designed to maintain the durability of the floor. Light steel floor joists and ring beams in such
floors should be galvanised to 450g/m2.
Alternatively, they can be galvanised to 275g/m2 with additional protection of a two-coat bitumen-based coating to BS 1070,
BS 3416 or BS 6949, or have a two-coat liquid asphaltic composition applied. Ring beams to ground floors should be totally
protected, and joists protected for a minimum of 300mm adjacent to an external wall support or ring beam.
Where steel is used less than 150mm above ground level the guidance in Clause 6.10.16 should be considered.
Connections and fixings

Where two metals are to be joined, they should either be:
z compatible and not cause bimetallic corrosion, or z isolated from each other.
Connections should be:

z properly installed z justified in accordance with BS EN 1993-1-3 or a test
z securely made by clinching, crimping or by one of the method acceptable to NHBC.
methods detailed in Table 4
Chapter 6.10
Table 4: Types of connections

Type of connection Relevant standard
Cleats BS EN 1993-1-1
Countersunk bolts (tightened to the correct torque) BS 4933
Hot-dip galvanised fasteners BS EN ISO 10684
Rivets, including self-piercing rivets Manufacturer’s recommendations
Screws BS EN ISO 10666
BS EN ISO 15480
BS EN ISO 15481
BS EN ISO 15482
BS EN ISO 15483
(also see BS EN ISO 4042)
Welded connections BS EN 1011 and BS EN 1090
Zinc-plated bolts BS 7371-3
Holding-down devices
Holding-down devices should be suitable for the environment they will be exposed to, and manufactured from:
z mild steel with zinc coating to BS EN ISO 1461 z stainless steel to BS EN 10095 (suitable for
most environments).
Holes and notches

Figure 5: Holes and notches
Joists and studs should not be altered without the approval of the steel
frame designer, and the drilling, cutting or punching through of members
shall only be undertaken to an engineer’s design in accordance with grommets or swaging
to punched holes
To prevent damage to services, holes and penetrations should be fitted
6.10
with grommets or swaged under factory conditions.

End notching of light steel joists may be required for the interconnection reinforced
service hole
of trimming joists and should be in accordance with the design. Notches
elsewhere in the span are not acceptable.
elongated service
hole
Also see Clause 6.10.22.
unacceptable
notch
Chapter 6.10
6.10.8 Detailing of steel joists

Steel joists, fixings and connections shall be suitably detailed and provide satisfactory performance.
a) installation details b) prevention of roll.
Installation details
Joists or floor beams should be:
z spaced as shown in the design z joined with the correct type, size and number of fixings.
z accurately cut to length in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations to ensure a tight fit
Where light steel joists are supported by steel joists, cleats or web stiffeners should be used in accordance with the design.
Joists may be doubled up to support partitions or to form trimmers.
Continuous joists on load-bearing intermediate walls should be reinforced as required by the design.
Figure 6: Web stiffeners for continuous joists over Figure 7: Joists overlapping on load-bearing
load-bearing intermediate wall intermediate wall
6.10
Where joists overlap on load-bearing intermediate walls, they should be fixed together with bolts or screws. This is to prevent the
floor decking being pushed up, or the ceiling being cracked, when the cantilevered part of the joist moves upwards.
Prevention of roll
Bridging and blocking should be provided in accordance with the design Figure 8: Floor bracing examples
to prevent roll.
Floors constructed using joists with an asymmetric web, eg of C or Sigma
profile, can cause the floor to roll. To avoid roll, unless otherwise specified
in the design, one of the following alternatives should be used where the
span exceeds 3.5m for C joists or 4.2m for Sigma joists:
z a continuous line, or lines, of proprietary steel herringbone
struts provided between the joists; the pairs of struts should
have a physical gap between them so that they do not rub
against each other at the cross-over point and create noise.
z solid blocking provided to every alternate pair of joists with
ties between them as shown.
z joists alternately reversed and tied together in pairs.
z joists alternately reversed and continuous ties
(eg resilient bar) fixed to the joist flanges.
Where joists bear onto steelwork or are supported by cleats, blocking is
not necessary adjacent to the supports.
Chapter 6.10
6.10.9 Restraint
Restraint strapping shall be provided in accordance with the design.
Where external walls, not constructed from LSF, are to be stabilised by a connection to the floor, straps may be required.
Straps will generally be fixed to the web of the joist, to suit the masonry courses.
Where joists run parallel to the wall, straps should be supported on noggings fixed between the joists. Straps should be placed
at a maximum of 2m apart and carried over three joists. Packing should be provided between the wall and the first joist.
Straps should be fixed with suitable bolts, screws or rivets and should bear on the centre of bricks or blocks, not across
mortar joints.
6.10.10 Construction of load-bearing walls and external infill walls

Construction of load-bearing walls and external infill walls shall ensure adequate stability. Issues to be
taken into account include:
a) preparation c) accommodation of deflection.
b) anchoring
Preparation
The following should be in accordance with the design: Figure 9: Floor edges
z the setting out of the structure onto which the LSF is to

be erected.
z the transfer of loads from the LSF.
where insulation is
The supporting structure may have local deviations in level along its stepped, DPC required
with upstand and
length, and packing will be required to achieve the required tolerances dressed down face of
insulation
and to provide for effective load transfer.
Concrete kickers should be carefully formed, ensuring that the concrete
is adequately compacted and the top surface is suitably flat and level.
6.10
12mm max. refer also to 12mm max. from edge

LSF manufacturer's guidance with ledge protected
Table 5: Acceptable methods of packing under frames

Gap under base rail Acceptable packing
Less than 10mm Provide shims under each stud position
10-20mm Provide shims under each stud position, and grout under the whole length of the base rail with cement:
sand mortar
More than 20mm Obtain advice from the frame designer/manufacturer.
Remedial work to the substructure may be required before erection commences
Shims should be of pre-galvanised steel (the galvanised coating being at least equivalent to that of the member/s being packed)
or other suitable material, ie, not timber or plastic.
Wall frames should be checked to ensure that they are dimensionally accurate before erection commences.
Chapter 6.10
LSF should be correctly positioned, square and plumb, and within the Figure 10: Correct positioning
following tolerances: nominal line line of
of frame frame
z the vertical position of members should be within +/-5mm per
storey relative to the base 5mm max.
z the horizontal position of base rails should not vary in
alignment by more than 5mm in 10m.
10m
Anchoring
The frame should be anchored to resist both lateral movement and uplift in accordance with the design, including bolt-down
brackets where required.
Figure 11: Strap anchor example Figure 12: Bolt-down anchor example
anchor fixed
to studs
anchor in
accordance
with design
anchor built
into masonry
Anchoring should ensure:

z that appropriate edge details are provided and minimum z where fixings are into masonry, they are into solid concrete
edge distances specified by the fixing supplier are blocks with a minimum crushing strength of 7.3N/mm2 and
6.10
maintained, to avoid spalling of masonry or concrete positioned to receive fixings.
Where the design incorporates gas membranes (methane or radon), fixings should not puncture them, but where this is
unavoidable, the penetration should be sealed.
Accommodation of deflection
Infill walls should accommodate anticipated deflection within the primary frame in accordance with the structural design.
6.10.11 Interfaces with staircases Also see: Chapter 6.4
Floors and walls shall be designed to accommodate installation of any staircases without compromising
performance.
Wall linings should be continuous behind the string of staircases.
Fixing connections should be coordinated to ensure fire protection continuity and structural adequacy.
Chapter 6.10
6.10.12 Fixing floor decking and ceilings

Floor decking and ceilings shall be adequately fixed using a material of adequate strength and moisture
resistance.
Joist spacing and decking thickness should be compatible. Material standards and minimum board thicknesses for domestic
loads (imposed load of 1.5kN/m2) are shown in Table 6.
Table 6: Joist spacing and decking type
Material Standard Minimum thickness of decking (mm)
400mm joist centres 600mm joist centres
Chipboard BS EN 312 moisture-resistant type P5 18 22
Plywood BS EN 636 15 18
Oriented strand board type OSB3 BS EN 300 15 18
Other materials In accordance with Technical
Requirement R3
In England and Wales, the thicknesses listed above may not achieve the 15 kg/m2 mass required to meet sound
insulation requirements.
Flooring should be fixed at maximum 300mm centres using self-tapping screws or fixings approved by the LSF manufacturer
and in accordance with Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete upper floors’.
Plasterboard should be fixed in accordance with Chapter 9.2 ‘Wall and ceiling finishes’, using self-drilling, self-tapping screws.
6.10.13 Other design issues

The home shall be designed to adequately address all critical performance issues.
The designer should ensure that all critical performance issues listed in Table 7 are appropriately addressed.
Table 7: Critical performance issues requiring the designer’s consideration

Topic Description
6.10
Behaviour in relation to fire z compliance with Building Regulations

z internal linings
z fire stops and cavity barriers
z penetrations
Acoustic performance z compliance with Building Regulations
Moisture control, including thermal z type, thickness and location of insulation material
performance, condensation risk and z protection from water ingress at low levels
water ingress z condensation risk analysis and management of water vapour in the structure
Wall construction z acceptable claddings (see Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and cladding’)
z provision of cavity
z type of wall ties
z sheathing
Balconies, terraces and parapets z specific design considerations: structural design, durability, weather-tightness
Guidance for some of the performance issues listed in Table 7 may be included in the Stage 1 certificate.
6.10.14 Behaviour in relation to fire

LSF walls and floors shall be in accordance with applicable Building Regulations.
Guidance within supporting documents to the Building Regulations should be fully considered in the design and construction of
LSF walls, floors and roofs.
Detailing and specification of components should be in accordance with the steel frame manufacturer’s recommendations and/
or guidance from SCI (see guidance in P424 ‘Light steel framing in fire’) and supported with representative test evidence to
appropriate standards such as BS 476:21 or BS EN 1365:1 for load-bearing walls, BS 476:22 or BS EN 1364:1 for infill walls and
BS EN 1365:2 for floors.
The performance of specific details should be taken into account, including:
z fire protection to the structure around openings z detailing around service penetrations
z detailing of cavity barriers, including moisture protection z compartmentation including interfaces with fire doors.
to the barrier
Chapter 6.10
6.10.15 Acoustic performance

LSF walls and floors shall have adequate resistance to the passage of sound.
Internal walls and floors should be in accordance with relevant Building Regulations.
Separating walls
Separating walls should be in accordance with the design. Care should be taken to avoid gaps:
z between mineral wool quilt or batts z between cavity barriers
z between internal lining board layers z around openings for services.
Separating floors
The floating part of a floor should be separated from the main structure and surrounding walls by a resilient layer.
Where boards are laid loose over insulation without battens, joints should be glued.
6.10.16 Moisture control

The structure shall be adequately protected from the effects of moisture. Details for LSF at low level shall
fully consider the durability of materials, protection of the building from moisture ingress and thermal
bridging. Issues to be taken into account include:
a) cavities in external walls c) DPCs, DPMs and cavity trays.
b) protection of steel at low level
Cavities in external walls

A clear cavity in accordance with Table 8 should be provided between the cladding and insulation.
Table 8: Minimum cavity widths

Cladding Cavity width
Masonry 50mm
Render on board background 25mm
6.10
Vertical tile hanging(1) where a breather membrane Dependent on batten support layout and spacing(1)
is provided and fixed to the sheathing
Other cladding(1) 15mm
Notes
1 See Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and cladding’.
The cavity should:

z extend at least 150mm below the DPC z be provided with weepholes or other suitable means
z be kept clear to allow drainage of drainage.
Protection of steel at low level

The base rail of LSF should be kept a minimum of 150mm above the Figure 13: Ground level interface
external ground level (or waterproofing layer of a flat roof, balcony or
terrace) and cavity fill. In such cases, the LSF may be protected against
corrosion in accordance with Cl. 6.10.7
base rail
Locally raised ground levels (up to the internal floor finish) to less than 150mm min.
external wall
above external
insulation to
15% of the external perimeter (of an individual building, eg row of ground level
extend 150mm
min. below
terraced homes, apartment blocks and detached garages, measured steel frame
on plan) to accommodate level thresholds can be accepted. The cavity
should be kept clear and allow drainage. Wall insulation should overlap
the base rail by a minimum of 150mm.
Chapter 6.10
Alternatively, where the base rail or lowest steel is less than 150mm above ground level (or waterproofing layer of a flat roof,
balcony or terrace), the design should consider the following:
z factory-applied protection to the steel frame to achieve z drainage of the cavity (ground conditions should be
a design life of 60 years. This may be LSF: considered where the cavity discharges below
– Galvanised to 600g/m2, or ground level)
– Galvanised to 275g/m2 with the addition of two coats of z insulation to limit thermal bridging and interstitial
heavy duty bituminous paint, 200μm total thickness condensation. NHBC may ask for thermal modelling of
z sheathing, or backing boards to waterproofing, used the junction to demonstrate that these issues have been
below 150mm, should be service class 3 in accordance sufficiently limited.
with BS EN 13986
Where levels are raised above the base rail or lowest steel:
z local areas of LSF walls (less than 15% of the external z in addition, where more than 15% of the external perimeter
perimeter) retaining up to a maximum of 600mm of has ground levels above the internal floor finish (up to a
ground can be acceptable, subject to appropriate maximum of 600mm), the structure should be designed by
waterproofing design an engineer in accordance with Technical Requirement R5.
Waterproofing should be designed by a waterproofing design specialist and be in accordance with Chapter 5.4 ‘Waterproofing of
basements and other below ground structures’.
The manufacturer of the waterproofing system should confirm compatibility between the waterproofing and sheathing board,
which should be supported by test evidence.
DPCs, DPMs and cavity trays

DPCs, DPMs and cavity trays should:
z be provided at openings to prevent rain penetration z be installed underneath the full width of the base rail and lap
with the DPM where present.
Materials acceptable for use as DPCs include:
z BS 6515 polyethylene z materials assessed in accordance with
z BS 6398 bitumen Technical Requirement R3.
6.10
6.10.17 Insulation Also see: BRE Report ‘Thermal insulation:avoiding risks’
Insulation shall be correctly installed, be of a suitable material and thickness to comply with Building
Regulations and reduce the risk of interstitial condensation.
Insulation should:
z be inert, durable, rot and vermin proof, and should not be z extend 150mm below the base rail to minimise thermal
adversely affected by moisture or vapour bridging and maintain a warm frame
z cover the whole external face of the wall and be complete z be tightly butted with joints of rigid board insulation taped,
within the frame where required by the design.
Foil-faced insulation boards with an integral facing on one side only should be fixed with the foil face on the cavity side.
Table 9: Acceptable insulation materials

Material Relevant standard
Mineral wool BS EN 13162
Flame retardant (FR) grade expanded polystyrene BS EN 13163
FR grade extruded polystyrene BS EN 13164
Rigid polyurethane foam and polyisocyanurate BS EN 13165
Phenolic foam BS EN 13166
Cellular glass BS EN 13167
Other insulation materials Technical Requirement R3
Account should be taken of Accredited Construction Details where applicable.
Reference should be made to BRE document BR 135 ‘Fire performance of external thermal insulation for walls of multi-storey
buildings’ when specifying the type of insulation system to be installed.
Chapter 6.10
6.10.18 Air and vapour control layers

Air and vapour control layers (AVCLs) shall restrict the passage of vapour from within the home to the steel
frame and be correctly installed.
An AVCL should be provided, unless a condensation risk analysis shows it is not necessary. An analysis in accordance with
BS EN ISO 13788 (Glaser method), using the following boundary conditions, will generally be acceptable:
z >60% internal RH z at -2ºC externally.
z at 21ºC internally
Split layers of AVCL-type material should be avoided, except where condensation risk analysis shows it to be acceptable.
Where they are provided, AVCLs should be:
z 500g polyethylene sheet, vapour control plasterboard, z placed to cover the external wall, including base rails,
or material assessed in accordance with head rails, studs, lintels and window reveals
Technical Requirement R3 z overlapping the base rail
z fixed on the warm side of the wall insulation and frame z fully sealed and punctures made good.
z in accordance with the design
Where polyethylene sheet is used:

z each joint in the AVCL should be located on studs or z double-sided tape or adhesive should be used as a
noggings and lapped by a minimum of 100mm temporary fixing before the wall board is fixed.
Where vapour control plasterboard is used:
z joints between sheets should be positioned on studs z care should be taken not to displace the vapour control
or noggings material when cutting vapour control plasterboard.
6.10.19 Breather membranes

Breather membranes shall be capable of allowing vapour to pass into the cavity, and provided to protect
the sheathing and frame from external moisture.
6.10
Breather membranes should be:
z vapour resistant to less than 0.6MNs/g (0.12 Sd) when z At least Class W2 to BS EN 13859-2 with no water leakage
tested in accordance with BS EN ISO 12572 using the during testing. In areas of very severe exposure (see
set of conditions C and using five test specimens Clause 6.1.6 for classification of exposure zones) or where
z capable of resisting water penetration liquid water penetration of the cladding is anticipated,
z self-extinguishing for example open-jointed cladding, Class W1 should
z durable be used. When open-jointed claddings are used or the
membrane likely to be left exposed during construction
z installed so that each joint is protected and moisture
for a duration longer than normally to be expected (also
drains outwards
see the membrane manufacturers recommendations on
z lapped to a minimum of 100mm at horizontal joints and a
exposure times), performance should be based on artificial
minimum of 150mm at vertical joints
aged behaviour in accordance with BS EN 13859-2. Where
a vented and ventilated cavity with full rainscreen and no
gaps, for example masonry or rendered board claddings,
are used, performance should be based on artificial aged
behaviour in accordance with BS EN 13111.
Breathable membranes should be used to protect sheathing board and insulation. Breather membranes may be omitted
where water resistant insulation boards with taped joints are used. Tape should be of a type recommended by the insulation
manufacturer, breathable to allow water vapour to move freely and resist water penetration. Suitable taping should be applied at
the lintel interfaces and other penetrations to direct water outside.
Chapter 6.10
6.10.20 Cladding, lining and sheathing boards

Cladding panels, lining and sheathing boards shall be suitable for their intended purpose. Issues to be
taken into account include:
a) external cladding c) internal lining boards.
b) sheathing
External cladding
The design and construction of the external walls should fully consider:
z cavity drainage z restraint
z differential movement z fire resistance.
In external walls, a clear cavity should be provided between the external insulation and the cladding. The cavity should:
z be drained z have drainage at its base, equivalent to 500mm2/m run,
z have cavity trays and weepholes installed where the cavity eg for masonry, one open perpend every 1.5m
is not fully maintained, eg at cavity barriers z have drainage openings placed to prevent the ingress
z be kept clean, free of obstructions and capable of of rain.
draining freely
Masonry cladding should:

z be constructed in accordance with Chapter 6.1 ‘External Figure 14: Allowing for differential movement
masonry walls’
z not be supported by the LSF walls unless designed in
accordance with Technical Requirement R5
z be tied to the LSF walls with flexible wall ties fixed through
to the studs
z include movement joints as appropriate (eg a 1mm gap compressible joint should
be at least 1mm thick per
per continuous metre of vertical clay masonry should be continuous metre of vertical
clay masonry, to allow for
provided at openings and soffits) to allow for differential vertical differential movement
movement due to thermal expansion, shrinkage (in
6.10
concrete masonry) and moisture expansion (in clay)

in accordance with PD 6697. The brick/block
manufacturer’s advice should be sought on the level
of movement to be expected.
Lightweight cladding should be:

z in accordance with Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling z supported by systems assessed in accordance with
and cladding’ Technical Requirement R3 which ensure that cladding
z compatible with the LSF system construction design loads are effectively transferred to the
building structure.
Sheathing
Sheathing boards should be:
z of a suitable strength and quality z attached using suitable quality fixings.
z compatible with the steel frame
Sheathing boards contribute to meeting many of the critical performance issues described in Table 7 and cannot be easily
replaced, so they should be specified in accordance with the design life of the building.
Sheathing boards should be appropriate for the exposure of the building and suitable for use in humid conditions.
Chapter 6.10
Table 10: Requirements for sheathing board materials

Material Relevant standards Minimum thickness (mm)
Cement bonded particle board BS EN 13986 By design
BS EN 634
BS EN 12467
Oriented strand board (OSB3 required) BS EN 300 8.0
Plywood BS EN 13986 5.5
BS EN 636
Proprietary materials Technical Requirement R3 Technical Requirement R3
Fixings used to apply sheathing boards should be selected in accordance with the board manufacturer’s instructions and be
suitably specified for strength and long-term durability in the anticipated exposure condition.
Sheathing boards should be adequately protected from weather during construction. This can be done through a combination of:
z the use of water resistant boards with accredited proof of z sequencing construction to minimise daily exposure with
performance in accordance with Technical Requirement R3 fully waterproof temporary coverings overnight and during
z the use of sealed jointed water resistant insulation to reduce inclement weather.
water penetration
z the application of a breathable membrane to the
sheathing board
For all sheathing board types, junctions between adjacent boards, and at interfaces with other building elements, should be
sealed and/or taped in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
A breather membrane should be used to provide protection to the building during and after construction in areas of very severe
exposure to wind-driven rain.
Internal lining boards

Internal lining boards should be:
z fixed in accordance with the design and the z attached to light steel studs using self-drilling, self-tapping
manufacturer’s recommendations screws at a maximum of 300mm centres.
6.10
In addition to the general guidance for internal lining boards, plasterboard should:
z be shown to provide adequate fire resistance z be a minimum of 9.5mm for stud spacing up to 450mm
where required z be a minimum of 12.5mm for stud spacing up to 600mm.
z comply with BS EN 520 and be in accordance with
Chapter 9.2 ‘Wall and ceiling finishes’
6.10.21 Wall ties

Wall ties shall be suitable to connect the steel frame to the cladding.
Generally, wall ties should be: Figure 15: Providing wall ties
z in accordance with BS 845-1 3D

z fixed to the studs and not the sheathing
z inclined away from the LSF
z austenitic stainless steel and of a type which
accommodates the differential movement between the
LSF and the cladding, or assessed in accordance with
Wall ties for masonry cladding should be according to the design and:
z installed at a minimum density of 3.7 ties/m2, eg spaced z spaced at jambs of openings, a maximum of 300mm
at a maximum of 600mm horizontally and 450mm vertically within 225mm of the masonry reveal
vertically (except where alternative densities have been (additional studs may be needed to achieve this)
demonstrated by building specific calculation and accepted z kept clean and free from mortar droppings.
under the Stage 2 certificate)
Chapter 6.10
6.10.22 Services
Services shall be adequately protected from damage.
Service mains and service outlets should be:
z designed to ensure the fire resistance of walls and floors is z installed in accordance with the design
not impaired z on the warm side of the insulation.
z designed to ensure that the required sound insulation of
walls and floors is maintained
Light steel joists or studs should not be notched to accommodate services. Holing of structural light steel members should be
carried out in accordance with this chapter and the manufacturer’s recommendations. On-site hole cutting should be avoided,
as badly cut edges can have an adverse effect on the durability of the frame and may cause damage to pipes and cables.
Where on-site adaptation of the frame is unavoidable, it should be undertaken by the manufacturer, with prior notification to
NHBC, and completed in line with the steel frame designer’s remedial details with all cut edges treated and badly cut edges
avoided. Significant adaptations should be overseen by the design engineer.
Grommets should be used around the edge of service holes to protect electrical cables and reduce the risk of bimetallic
corrosion between the LSF and copper pipes. Swaged holes for electric cables and plastic piping do not require grommets.
In Scotland, services are not permitted within:
z framed separating walls z separating wall cavities.
6.10.23 Further information

z The Steel Construction Institute (SCI) publications, Silwood Park, Ascot, Berkshire, SL5 7QN
SCI publications:
- Building design using cold formed steel sections:construction detailing and practice (P165)
- Modular construction using light steel framing: design of residential buildings (P302)
- Light steel framing in residential construction (P402)
- Design and installation of light steel external wall systems (ED017)
6.10

Figure 1 Joist bearing onto structure with stiffener 6.10.4 3
Figure 2 Web cleat connection 6.10.4 3
Figure 3 Bolted web to web connection 6.10.4 3
Figure 4 Lintel arrangement 6.10.4 5
Figure 5 Holes and notches 6.10.7 7
Figure 6 Web stiffeners for continuous joists over load-bearing intermediate wall 6.10.8 8
Figure 7 Joists overlapping on load-bearing intermediate wall 6.10.8 8
Figure 8 Floor bracing examples 6.10.8 8
Figure 9 Floor edges 6.10.10 9
Figure 10 Correct positioning 6.10.10 10
Figure 11 Strap anchor example 6.10.10 10
Figure 12 Bolt-down anchor example 6.10.10 10
Figure 13 Ground level interface 6.10.16 12
Figure 14 Allowing for differential movement 6.10.20 15
Figure 15 Providing wall ties 6.10.21 16
Chapter
6.11
Render
This chapter gives guidance on meeting the
Technical Requirements for factory-made and
traditional render applied to external walls and
render onto board backgrounds.
Render intended for below ground waterproofing is
outside the scope of this chapter (see Chapter 5.4
‘Waterproofing of basements and other below ground
structures’). Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and cladding’
contains guidance for insulated render systems.
6.11.1 Compliance 01
6.11.3 Weather conditions 02
6.11.4 Backgrounds 03
6.11.5 Accommodation of movement 04
6.11.6 Mixes 05
6.11.7 Detailing 08
6.11.8 Render onto board backgrounds 10
6.11.9 Finishes 12
For figure reference tables, please go to the end of each chapter.

1 Render I 2024
Chapter 6.11
Introduction
This chapter is arranged in sections covering:
z site and factory-made render z detailing.
z render onto board backgrounds

Background The surface to which the render is applied
Base coat The first render coat
Cured The finished render state when all chemical reactions have taken place
Decorative finishes An aesthetic finish not generally contributing to weathertightness
Dry dash Aggregate applied to finish the render
Factory-made Render mortar arriving on site premixed, generally including admixtures and colouring, and either
ready to use or requiring only the addition of water
Final coat The last render coat
Movement joint A joint designed to accommodate predicted movement in the background or render
Preparation coat An application to provide an appropriate key or bond, including a spatterdash or stipple coat
Proprietary render Renders and their specified backgrounds with proven compatibility, which fall outside the guidance
systems given for site and factory-made renders
Ribbed metal lathing Metal lathing that can be used as a carrier for render
Site-made Renders made on site to recognised designated or prescribed mix proportions
Structure Structural elements of the building providing support to the render or proprietary render system
Substrate The wall composition which offers support to the background intended to be rendered (the substrate
and background may sometimes be the same)
Undercoat The coats preceding the final coat
Wet dash A traditional render consisting of aggregate bound in slurry applied to the undercoat prior
to setting
6.11
6.11.1 Compliance Also see: BS EN 13914-1 and BS 8000-0
Render, including site-made, factory-made and render onto board backgrounds shall comply with the
Technical Requirements.
Render that complies with the guidance in this chapter will generally be acceptable.

information, and be distributed to all appropriate personnel.
Design and specifications should be issued to site supervisors, relevant specialist subcontractors and/or suppliers and, where
relevant, include the following:
z a full set of drawings indicating areas to be rendered, and z mix proportions for site-made render
construction details, eg the position of movement joints z details of the substrate and background
and how interfaces are formed z details of any technical assessments
z the render manufacturer’s technical information, (ie, third-party certifications)
including parts of the system design manual z details of interfaces and abutments, such as joints,
or installation guidance relevant to the specific site and junctions, and service penetrations
construction type z ancillaries that form part of a rendering system.
2024 I Render 2
Chapter 6.11
Table 1: Process chart for the application of site and factory-made render to masonry backgrounds
Process Steps See clause
Structure design Identify a suitable background material compatible with the intended render finish and 6.11.4
consider any preparation requirements
Consider how movement will be controlled, ie, are movement joints or bed joint 6.11.5
reinforcement needed?
Render design
Select an appropriate render strength that is compatible with the background 6.11.6
Determine the exposure zone which will influence the render's thickness 6.11.6
Construction Protect the background from adverse weather conditions at the earliest opportunity during 6.11.3
and following construction
Assess the likely weather conditions prior to and after rendering 6.11.3
Assess the background, eg suction and surface preparation, and apply a preparation coat 6.11.4
where necessary
Protect the completed render as it cures 6.11.3
6.11.3 Weather conditions

Rendering shall only be carried out in suitable weather conditions unless appropriate precautions
are taken.
6.11
Consideration should be given to likely weather conditions and, where required, measures taken to allow render to
cure satisfactorily.
When applying render in wet conditions:
z the background should not be saturated z curing render should be protected from heavy rainfall
z downpipes or temporary downpipes should be used to z specialist preparation coats should be used in accordance
prevent the background or completed render from with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
becoming saturated
When applying render in hot conditions the following precautions should be considered:
z avoid curing render from being directly exposed to z lightly spray the render with clean water to prevent
strong sunlight rapid drying.
When applying render in cold conditions:
z the air temperature should be at least 2°C and rising z the background should not be saturated.
z the background should be free from visual signs of frost
Where the air temperature is at, below or likely to fall below 5°C, appropriate precautions such as covering with a hessian sheet
should be used to protect curing render.
Factory-made render should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for weather conditions.
Acrylic renders have different curing requirements which should be considered.
3 Render I 2024
Chapter 6.11
6.11.4 Backgrounds
Backgrounds shall be appropriate for their intended purpose and suitably prepared to receive render.
a) preparation of masonry backgrounds c) ribbed metal lath.
b) preparation of clay brick backgrounds
Preparation of masonry backgrounds

Masonry backgrounds should be constructed in accordance with Chapter 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ and include DPCs and
cavity trays. The thickness of single-leaf masonry walls should be in accordance with PD 6697.
The surface to be rendered should be free from dust, loose particles, efflorescence, and organic growth, and, where applicable,
be prepared in accordance with the render manufacturer’s recommendations.
Masonry backgrounds with a smooth surface or close texture should be treated to provide an adequate key by either applying:
z lath, or z a spatterdash or stipple coat.
The suction of the block should be appropriate for rendering. High or low suction will generally require a preparatory coat. The
likely suction of the block can be gauged by applying a small quantity of water to the surface and observing the effects:
z water being absorbed instantly is an indication of z water running from the surface with little absorption
high suction suggests the background has low suction.
A spatterdash coat typically comprises cement and sand at a ratio of 1:3 mixed with water and often a bonding agent, such as
styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) or ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA). The mix should be applied by dashing onto the background to
give a rough texture approximately 3-7mm thick.
Generally, raking out mortar joints to blockwork will not sufficiently improve the key, and may extend the curing time of the
base coat.
Preparation of clay brick backgrounds

The brick manufacturer’s recommendations for rendering should be followed.
Where S1 bricks are used, the render mix should resist sulfate.
6.11
To provide an appropriate bond, clay brick backgrounds with a water absorption rate of between 9% and 15% should generally
have sufficient suction to provide a mechanical key. Alternatively, when rendering onto bricks, one or more of the following
methods of improving the key can be adopted:
z keyed bricks used z mortar joints raked out to a depth of 10-12mm (although this
z a spatterdash coat applied may increase curing time).
Render on an external leaf of clay bricks (F2,S1 or F1,S1 designation bricks to BS EN 771) in severe or very severe exposures
is not permitted where the cavity is to be fully filled with insulation.
Ribbed metal lath

Ribbed metal lath should be:
z fixed in accordance with the z fixed with the correct side to be rendered facing out
manufacturer’s recommendations z fixed with a 25mm drained and vented cavity when applied
z supported at 350mm and up to 600mm centres for stiffer to framed structures
metal profiles z austenitic stainless steel to BS EN 10088-1.
Render onto ribbed metal lath can be vulnerable to damage where impact is likely to occur, such as beside communal paths.
Appropriate reinforcement may be used to help improve the render’s impact resistance.
2024 I Render 4
Chapter 6.11
6.11.5 Accommodation of movement Also see: PD 6697
Rendered walls shall be detailed to reduce the risk of damage due to movement in the background. Issues
to be considered include:
a) movement in masonry background c) movement in ribbed metal lath render.
b) dissimilar materials
The construction should include appropriate measures to reduce the risk of damage to the render caused by movement in the
background, such as shrinkage, thermal or differential movement. The designer should follow the guidance in this chapter,
together with the render/background manufacturer’s recommendations. Alternatively, provision for movement should be designed
by an engineer in accordance with Technical Requirement R5.
Areas of the building to be rendered should be identified prior to construction, and movement control considered as part of
the design.
Movement in masonry background

Render and masonry backgrounds should be detailed to reduce the likelihood of cracking and crazing in the render. Issues to be
considered include:
z the potential for movement in the background and render z the orientation of the building
z size, quantity, and positioning of openings z thermal shock
z compatibility with the background z moisture content of the materials
z density of the masonry z exposure conditions.
z the size and geometry of rendered panels
Where length/height ratios are greater than 3:1, consideration should be given to providing suitably designed:
z movement joints, or z bed joint reinforcement.
Where movement joints are provided, they should: Figure 1: Typical movement joint
compressible filler
z be continued through the background and render (including any

horizontal beads)
z be made weathertight with an appropriate sealant weathertight seal
6.11
z not align with openings such as windows, doors, or meter boxes.
external render
Austenitic stainless steel bed joint reinforcement conforming to BS
EN 845-3 should be provided in the first two courses of the external
masonry leaf above and below any opening to help distribute
tensile stress and avoid localised cracking. Where possible,
the reinforcement should project 600mm beyond the opening.
Table 2: Concrete block categorisation

Category Compressive strength of the blockwork Dry density
Low density aircrete 2.9-3.6N/mm2 <500kg/m3
Normal density aircrete 3.6-9.0N/mm2 500kg/m3+
Ultra lightweight aggregate 3.6-7.3N/mm 2
<950kg/m3
Lightweight aggregate 3.6-7.3N/mm 2
950-1500 kg/m3
Dense aggregate 7.3N/mm2+ 1,500kg/m3+
Table 3: Preparation of blockwork backgrounds(1)

Category Normal movement joint spacing Maximum distance of joint from Suction control
restrained end, ie, corners
Low density aircrete Specialist advice required(2)
Normal density aircrete 6m 3m (half normal spacing) Yes
Ultra lightweight aggregate 6m 3m (half normal spacing) Not generally required
Lightweight aggregate 6m Half normal spacing Not generally required
Dense aggregate 7.5 - 9m (3)
Half normal spacing Not generally required
Notes:
1 The guidance in this table is generally acceptable for render coats in accordance with Table 5 and factory-made one-coat render based on 1:1:6 mix = 3.5N/mm².
2 Specialist advice from the block and render manufacturer should be sought.
3 Specialist advice should be sought where clay brick backgrounds are used.
5 Render I 2024
Chapter 6.11
Dissimilar materials
Backgrounds should not be constructed from materials of Figure 2: Metal lath reinforcement and separation strip (min. 300mm)
different densities. Where possible, render should not be
continuous across dissimilar materials. Where this cannot be
avoided the render should:
z be stopped at appropriately formed movement joints, or
z have austenitic stainless steel lath reinforcement carried
across the joint with a separation strip, such as building
min. 300mm metal lath reinforcement and separation strip
paper, behind.
Where significant differential movement is likely to occur, such as the junction between masonry and board backgrounds, render
should be stopped either side of an appropriately formed joint.
Movement in ribbed metal lath render

To avoid cracking, ribbed metal lath backgrounds should be divided with movement joints into bays no more than 5m wide and:
z site-made render should be applied in three coats z factory-made render should be applied in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations.
6.11.6 Mixes Also see: Chapter 6.1
The render mix shall be appropriate for the intended purpose, be compatible with the background and be
designed to minimise the risk of de-bonding, cracking, and crazing. Issues to be considered include:
a) sand e) application of site-made render
b) mix design f) factory-made renders
c) admixtures and bonding agents g) lime.
d) coat thickness of site-made render
Render coats should not be stronger than the background or any previous coat to which they are applied. Weaker coats can be
achieved by reducing the cement content of each coat or by using the same mix but decreasing the coat thickness.
Potable water should be used for mixing render.
6.11
Sand
Sand for render should be well-graded category 2, in accordance with BS EN 13139. Sand with excessive fine material, clay or
silt can shrink and crack so should be avoided.
A sharp gritty or coarse sand is required for strength in the backing coats, but finer sand should be used for the finishing coat.
Typical sand grades should be:
z 5mm down to 0.075mm – undercoat(s) z 1.18mm down to 0.075mm – final coat.
Mix design
Designation ii, iii and iv (strength class M6, M4 and M2) mixes are generally used for rendering.
Stronger mixes are generally more moisture resistant; however, they are also more prone to shrinkage, which increases the
likelihood of the render cracking. Weaker mixes may be appropriate for weaker backgrounds in less exposed zones.
For exposure zone classification, see Clause 6.1.6.
2024 I Render 6
Chapter 6.11
Table 4: Designation mix proportions for cement-based mixes

Mix Mortar Mix proportions by volume based on damp sand
designation compressive Cement:lime: Cement:ready-mixed lime/sand(1) Cement:sand(1) Masonry
strength class sand (using plasticiser) cement:sand(1)
equivalent Ready-mixed Cement:
lime:sand ready-mixed
material
i M12 1:¼:3 1:12 1:3 - -
Weaker – stronger
ii M6 1:½:4 - 4½ 1:9 1:4 - 4½ 1:3 - 4 1:2½ - 3½

iii M4 1:1:5 - 6 1:6 1:5 - 6 1:5 - 6 1:4 - 5
iv M2 1:2:8 - 9 1:4½ 1:8 - 9 1:7 - 8 1:5½ - 6½
v - 1:3:10 - 12 1:4 1:10 - 12 - -
Notes:
1 With fine or poorly graded sands, the lower volume of sand should be used.
2 Where soluble salts could be present in the background, mixes should have sulfate-resisting properties.
3 Where pigments are specified, batching should be undertaken with care to ensure colour consistency pigments to BS EN 12878 can be used but should not
exceed 10% of the cement weight, or 3% where carbon black is used (white Portland cement may be used).
Render mixes should be:

z in accordance with BS EN 13914 ‘Design, z appropriate to the strength of the background
preparation and application of external rendering and z checked against the specification
internal plastering’ z of adequate strength and thickness to achieve durability.
Where enhanced water-resisting properties are required:

z Portland cement with a waterproofing agent already z a waterproofing agent should be added to the render mix in
incorporated may be used in the undercoat, or accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Rendering mortar should not be left turning over in the mixer for longer than necessary.
Admixtures and bonding agents
6.11
Admixtures and bonding agents should:
z be assessed in accordance with Technical Requirement R3 z be compatible with the render
z be used in accordance with the z not be used with factory-made renders without the prior
manufacturer’s recommendations approval of the render manufacturer.
The effect on the adhesion of subsequent render coats should be considered when water-repelling agents are used.
Plasticisers and air entrainers should comply with BS EN 934 and not be used in mortars containing masonry cement.
Coat thickness of site-made render

The number of coats should be designed to take account of the background and exposure conditions of the site.
The mix and its application should be suitable for the specific background. Items to consider include:
z the number and thickness of coats z the strength of the coat (subsequent coats should be
weaker than the background or the previous coat).
Render should have a nominal total finished thickness of not less than:
z 16mm for sheltered and moderate exposure zones, or z 20mm for severe and very severe exposure zones.
7 Render I 2024
Chapter 6.11
Table 5: Site-made render designation and typical thickness

Typical two-coat application
Normal density aircrete
Undercoat 8-12mm designation iii (M4)
Final coat 6-8mm designation iv (M2)(1)
Ultra lightweight and lightweight aggregate blockwork
Undercoat 8-12mm designation iii (M4)
Final coat 6-8mm designation iv (M2)(1)
Dense aggregate blockwork
Undercoat 8-12mm designation ii (M6)
Final coat 6-8mm designation iii (M4)
Clay brick
Final coat 6-8mm designation iii (M4)
Ribbed metal lath
First coat 8-12mm designation i (M12)
Final coat 6-8mm designation ii (M4)
Notes:
1 Designation iii (M4) should be used for the final coat in severe or very severe exposure zones.
2 For block classifications, see Table 2.
3 Specialist advice should be sought for low density aircrete backgrounds.
Where a three-coat render is used, this should include a second undercoat that is:
z the same thickness but a slightly weaker mix than the first z a slightly thinner coat of the same strength mix.
undercoat, or
Application of site-made render

When applying render, previous coats should be allowed to cure before applying the next coat (typically three to four days).
6.11
To avoid surface crazing:

z properly graded sand should be used with limits on fine z overworking (polishing) of the render should be avoided, as
sand proportions this causes laitance to be drawn to the surface.
Surfaces should be appropriately prepared to receive following coats. This can be achieved by either combing or scratching.
The final coat should be applied to an undercoat that is suitably keyed.
The size of the background to be rendered should be assessed to determine if it can be rendered in the time available.
This will help to establish the most suitable location for day joints.
The final coat should be of uniform thickness and not used to even out irregularities, which should be accommodated in
previous coats.
Factory-made renders
Factory-made renders should be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, including those for
ancillary components.
Factory-made renders with a declared mix in accordance with Table 4, applied to the thickness recommended in Table 6, and
that otherwise comply with the recommendations for site-made renders, will generally be acceptable to NHBC.
2024 I Render 8
Chapter 6.11
Table 6: Minimum thickness of factory-made single-coat renders

Background Sheltered and moderate exposure zone Severe and very severe exposure zone
Single-leaf masonry wall 20mm In accordance with the render
Masonry cavity wall partially filled 15mm manufacturer’s recommendations.
Masonry cavity wall fully filled 20mm
Lath(1) 15mm
Notes:
1 Lath backgrounds generally require two coats.
2 Alternative single-coat thicknesses may be acceptable when accompanied by appropriate third-party assessment in accordance with Technical Requirement R3.
Lime
Render mixes containing hydrated lime can improve the ability of the render to accommodate movement, improving resistance to
cracking and crazing. The use of lime should be in accordance with BS EN 459.
Natural hydraulic lime (NHL) is used without cement, which can allow greater moisture vapour movement through the structure.
Specialist advice may be required for the use of NHL render.
6.11.7 Detailing
Rendering shall be detailed to ensure appropriate weathertightness and durability. Issues to be
considered include:
a) copings, cappings and sills e) exposed elements
b) abutments and interfaces f) ancillary items
c) weepholes g) render below the DPC
d) detailing at openings h) resistance to sulfate attack.
Copings, cappings or sills

Render should be protected from damage by copings, cappings or sills made of a material of low permeability or with suitably
detailed DPCs. A minimum 40mm projection with a throating or drip detail should be provided to all copings, cappings and sills.
6.11
Extending sills or sub-sills beyond window reveals can help to disperse water and prevent staining.
Figure 3: Detailing of copings to protect render Figure 4: Detailing of capings to protect render
coping stone metal caping

throating clear plywood plate
DPC supported of the render
over cavity tray
40mm
optional render 40mm overhang
optional render
150mm 150mm
min. min.
weep holes weep holes
(max. spacing 1m) (max. spacing 1m)
render render
9 Render I 2024
Chapter 6.11
Abutments and interfaces

Where raked roof abutments occur against a rendered masonry wall, preformed cavity trays and appropriate flashings should be
provided. Clauses 6.1.17 and 7.2.20 contain guidance for stepped cavity trays and flashings to masonry walls.
Cavity trays with stop ends are required above all openings. Where required a minimum of two weepholes per opening should
be provided.
A site made or preformed cavity tray should be provided at horizontal abutments with weepholes at maximum 1m centres.
Render abutting exposed features, such as stone string courses or quoins, should be finish neatly without gaps.
Abutments between render and exposed masonry should be detailed to prevent moisture passing in behind the render or
adversely affecting the building.
When rendering into window or door frames, the render should be stopped against a bead and sealed, or a bead of sealant
applied between the frame and render.
Weepholes
Weepholes should be provided: Figure 5: Provision of weepholes to window head
z where required for ventilation to timber

frame construction
z to cavity trays in parapet walls and horizontal roof abutments
at not more than 1m centres
z to the last tray at stepped abutments
z in severe or very severe exposure zones where rendering is
returned into the window or door head (weepholes are not
required where the render is not returned). min. two weep holes per
opening in severe or very
To prevent staining, weepholes should be of a type which restricts severe exposure zones
render stopped
the entry of wind-driven rain. against corner bead
6.11
render returned and

sealed at the window head
Detailing at openings
Design features around openings and at the head of the Figure 6: Check reveal detail
rendering should provide shelter and help shed water away
external min. 12mm overlap to frame
from the surface below.
window
In areas of very severe exposure, and in Scotland, a check sill
reveal should be provided at openings.
Proprietary render systems should be detailed at abutments in
sealant
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
sealant
internal
Exposed elements
Render to exposed masonry elements, such as parapets, freestanding walls, pillars, retaining walls or chimneys, should be of a
type appropriate for severe exposure conditions.
When rendering both sides of freestanding or parapet walls of single leaf construction, care should be taken to prevent damage
caused by moisture becoming trapped. For example:
z the detailing should prevent the masonry from z rendering both sides of single leaf walls in areas of very
becoming saturated severe exposure to frost attack should be avoided
z the wall should be protected from rain during construction (see Clause 6.1.6c).
Bricks with S1 or S0 designation are not recommended for exposed elements that are to be rendered.
2024 I Render 10
Chapter 6.11
Ancillary items
Stop beads and render stops should be austenitic stainless steel or PVC. Long runs of steel beads and stops should be avoided
due to their expansion potential.
Corner beads should have an appropriate projection to prevent thin tapering of the render which reduces its
overall thickness.
Beads should be:
z adhesive-fixed using a material appropriate for external z mechanically fixed using suitably durable fixings.
use and in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations, or
Render below the DPC
To prevent damage caused by prolonged periods of wetting, it is preferable to stop the render at DPC level. Where rendering is
continued below the DPC, the following precautions should be taken:
z for site-made render, use a stronger mix (M4) that is sulfate z factory-made render used in accordance with the
resisting, or manufacturer’s recommendations.
Consideration should be given to providing:

z appropriate drainage installed along the perimeter or ground z adjacent surface finishes which do not promote splashing.
falling away from the building
Admixtures may be required to enhance performance.
Resistance to sulfate attack

To prevent sulfate attack, the wall construction should restrict moisture from entering the background and having a detrimental
effect on the performance of the render.
When detailing between the render and exposed brickwork, it is advisable to use appropriate materials resistant to, or without
sources of, sulfate.
6.11
6.11.8 Render onto board backgrounds
Render onto board backgrounds shall be suitable for the intended use and detailed to provide satisfactory
performance. Issues to be considered include:
a) provision of a system manual d) weather resistance
b) compatibility between the render and background e) movement joints
c) fixing back to the structure f) board backgrounds.
Provision of a system manual

Where render is applied to a board background, the render manufacturer should clearly define the system in a manual, including:
z materials and components z design guidance
z common details z installation guidance.
The system should be used in full accordance with the manufacturer’s guidance and third-party certification.
Compatibility between the render and background

The background should be appropriate for its intended use. Issues to be considered include:
z compatibility between the board and render z durability classification of the board and its suitability for use
in exterior conditions, including resistance to weather prior
to the render being applied.
Render onto board backgrounds should:

z not be applied where the surface has contamination, dust or z be mixed to ensure colour consistency where coloured
loose particles pigments are specified
z consider the effects of solar radiation (colour, orientation, z be specified and used with the appropriate ancillary items,
and shading) such as trims to form corners and returns.
Boards should not be left exposed prior to rendering for longer than is necessary.
11 Render I 2024
Chapter 6.11
Fixing back to the structure

Board backgrounds should be fixed back to the structure in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and
third-party certification.
The fixing design should consider:
z negative (suction) and positive (pressure) wind loads z anticipated movement
z pull-out strength z self-weight.
z pull-through resistance
A suitably qualified and experienced chartered engineer should check that an adequate number of fixings are used to attach
the system.
Fixing battens and rails should be installed vertically and not block drainage paths. Timber battens should be suitably treated.
To reduce the risk of damage from impact, especially at low level, where people have access around balconies and where cradle
systems etc can meet the façade, appropriate precautions such as closer supports should be considered.
Cavity barriers should be appropriately detailed to ensure satisfactory performance and:
z be provided in accordance with Building Regulations z account for movement in the frame
z not block ventilation or drainage paths z be used in accordance with the
Weather resistance
Timber and steel framed backing walls should be protected with breather membranes and have a minimum 25mm cavity.
Cavities to timber framed walls should be drained and vented, and cavities to steel framed walls should be drained.
Movement joints
Movement joints should be provided to accommodate movement in timber frame structures. Where board backgrounds are used,
movement joints should be:
z formed in accordance with the system z positioned to accommodate calculated deflection
manufacturer’s recommendations or movement
6.11
z continued through the background board z provided at floor zones.
Board backgrounds
Board backgrounds to be rendered should be external grade and recommended for use in the render manufacturer’s
system manual and third-party certification.
Boards should be set out in accordance with the system manufacturer’s recommendations, taking account of possible
compression, deflection, and alignment of joints in relation to openings in the external wall, such as windows and doors.
The render should have alkali-resistant mesh embedded into the base coat across the whole surface.
Edges of boards should be suitably treated to provide protection from weather during construction and to maintain durability after
the render is completed.
2024 I Render 12
Chapter 6.11
6.11.9 Finishes
Finishes shall be to a satisfactory standard. Issues to be considered include:
a) decorative finishes b) appearance.
Decorative finishes
The choice of decorative finish should take account of:
z the exposure zone z background movement potential.
Scraped or textured finishes can reduce the risk of crazing and can break up the drainage path of rainwater as it runs down the
face of the wall.
Wet dash and dry dash finishes should have an aggregate size generally between 6mm and 14mm. Dry dash should be applied
to the final coat before it has fully cured.
Appearance
Render on external walls should be reasonably consistent in texture, finish, colour, and line. Clause 9.1.2b provides further
guidance on tolerances to render finishes.
Consideration should be given to detailing that will avoid obvious staining (eg the positioning of discharge pipes).
Completed render should be protected from damage that could be caused by construction activities.
Render may not be resistant to staining and may require periodic maintenance such as cleaning.

Figure 1 Typical movement joint 6.11.5 4
Figure 2 Metal lath reinforcement and separation strip (min. 300mm) 6.11.5 5
6.11
Figure 3 Detailing of copings to protect render 6.11.7 8
Figure 4 Detailing of capings to protect render 6.11.7 8
Figure 5 Provision of weepholes to window head 6.11.7 9
Figure 6 Check reveal detail 6.11.7 9
Effective from 01/24 V208b 01/24

NHBC Standards 2024 6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NHBC Standards 2024 6

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NHBC Standards 2024 6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter

Definitions for this chapter

6.1.1 Compliance Also see: Chapter 2.1

External walls shall comply with the Technical Requirements.

6.1.2 Provision of information

6.1.3 Structural design

Compliance with relevant standards

The ends of every wall should be bonded or otherwise

Lateral restraint and acoustics

Table 1: Suitable dimensions and spacings for movement joints(1)

Damp proof courses

6.1.4 Fire resistance

6.1.5 Acoustic resistance

6.1.6 Exposure Also see: Chapter 6.7

Cavities should be continuous around enclosed porches

places where the exposure to driving rain is very severe,

Sills, copings and similar features should be weathered

Figure 5: Exposure zones

Moderate 33 to less than 56.5 Adapted from the map in the

The following should be taken into account when selecting bricks:

unless completely protected by a cladding which can

persistently wet, bricks should be specified that are low AB

sulfate attack or other detrimental effects. PA

Severe exposure to frost attack LA

brick are acceptable: SY TF WS

Exceptionally severe frost exposure

6.1.7 Thermal insulation

Thermal Insulation materials

z satisfactorily assessed by an appropriate independent z assessed in accordance with Technical Requirement.

Thermal Insulation materials may:

Where cavity insulation is used:

When installing full fill insulation:

Injected and blown fill insulation

Full fill cavity insulation

Fair faced masonry with impervious cladding 50 50 50

6.1.8 Concrete blocks

Freeze/thaw and sulfate attack

Tolerances of clay bricks

6.1.10 Stone masonry

The construction of masonry walls should comply with the following:

When setting out masonry:

All work should be reasonably level and true, and:

Where a different size of masonry unit is needed to

Bricks and blocks should have a solid mortar bedding and

Protection of cavity walls during construction

z the frame in-situ, or

Openings should be the correct size, square and:

Proprietary cavity closers should be fitted in accordance with

Corbelling Figure 18: Corbelling

For feature brickwork sections the masonry should only be

Chasing for services

Protection of ancillary components

Table 4: Protection of ancillary components

6.1.12 Lintels Also see: Chapter 6.5

Where steel lintels are used: Figure 20: Combined lintel

z the manufacturer’s recommendations for providing adequate

Thermal insulation and condensation

Placing lintels Figure 23: Lintel end bearing

The design should be checked and lintels should:

Concrete floor units or other heavy components which bear on